JVC CA-UXP450, SP-UXP450 Instructions Manual

Add to My manuals
198 Pages

advertisement

JVC CA-UXP450, SP-UXP450 Instructions Manual | Manualzz

UX-P450US.book Page 1 Friday, May 21, 2004 11:24 AM

MICRO COMPONENT SYSTEM

微型組合音響

UX-P450

—Consists of CA-UXP450 and SP-UXP450

— 由 CA-UXP450 及 SP-UXP450 組成

SUPER VIDEO

INSTRUCTIONS

使用說明書

GVT0129-008A

[US/UN]

UX-P450US.book Page 1 Friday, May 21, 2004 11:24 AM

Warnings, Cautions and Others/ 警告,注意及其他須知事項

Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off completely

(all lamps and indications go off). The STANDBY/ON button in any position does not disconnect the mains line.

• When the unit is on standby, the STANDBY/ON lamp lights

• in red.

When the unit is turned on, the STANDBY/ON lamp lights in green.

The power can be remote controlled.

CAUTION

To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.:

1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet.

2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.

注意 — STANDBY/ON

無論 STANDBY/ON

開關 !

開關在任何位置,電源線的電源還是

沒 有被切 斷,若要將 電源完 全關閉,應 把電 源插頭 拔离插 座

(所有的燈和信息均熄滅)。

• 當主機正處于備用狀態, STANDBY/ON 燈為紅色。

• 當主機開啟后, STANDBY/ON 燈為綠色。

電源開關可用遙控器控制。

注意

為了減少触電,火災等危險:

1.

切勿擅自卸下螺絲釘,蓋子或機殼。

2.

切勿讓本機受雨淋或置潮濕環境中。

CAUTION

• Do not block the ventilation openings or holes.

(If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a

• newspaper or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.)

Do not place any naked flame sources, such as lighted candles, on the apparatus.

When discarding batteries, environmental problems must be considered and local rules or laws governing the disposal of these batteries must be followed strictly.

Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS

1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

2.

CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified service personnel.

3.

CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam.

4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED

INSIDE THE UNIT.

注意

• 切勿堵塞通風口或通風孔。

( 如果通風口或通風孔被報紙或布等堵塞,熱量將無法散

出。)

• 切勿在本設備上放置任何裸露的火源,如點燃的蜡燭。

• 處理廢棄電池時,必須考慮環境問題 ,并嚴格遵守當地關

于處理廢棄電池的有關法律或規定。

• 切勿將本裝置暴露于雨水所及,潮濕 ,滴水或濺起水花的

地方,亦不要將任何裝滿液体的物件 ( 如花瓶 ) 放置在本

裝置上。

鐳射產品的重要說明

1.

一級鐳射產品。

2.

注意: 切勿打開頂蓋板。本机內部沒有用戶可自行維修的部

件;所有維修工作應由有資格的人員完成。

3.

注意: 當內部鎖定裝置失效或者損坏后,打開蓋板可能會產

生可見或不可見的鐳射輻射。應避免受到鐳射光束的直接照

射。

4.

標簽的復制標示:注意標簽位于機內。

Caution: Proper Ventilation

To avoid risk of electric shock and fire, and to prevent damage, locate the apparatus as follows:

1. Front: No obstructions and open spacing.

2. Sides/ Top/ Back: No obstructions should be placed in the areas shown by the dimensions below.

3. Bottom: Place on the level surface. Maintain an adequate air path for ventilation by placing on a stand with a height of

10 cm or more.

15 cm

15

1 cm

1

15 cm

15

1 cm

1

15 cm

15

注意 : 正确通風

為免發生触電和火警的危險,及防止本機受損,請將本機如下

放置:

1.

前面:沒有障礙物及地方開闊。

2.

側面 / 頂面 / 背面:在圖中所示范圍中,不應放置任何障礙

物。

3.

底部:放置在水平面上。放置在一個高 10 厘米或以上的臺

上,以保証足夠的通風道。

15 cm

15

15 cm

15

SP-UXP450 CA-UXP450 SP-UXP450

10 cm

10

CA-UXP450

G-1

UX-P450USTOC.fm Page 1 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:54 PM

Contents

Introduction ..................................................... 2

Precautions ......................................................................2

How to Read This Manual...............................................2

On-Screen Disc Operations .......................... 24

On-screen Bar Information............................................ 24

Operations Using the On-screen Bar ............................. 25

Selecting Browsable Still Pictures................................. 27

Operations on the CONTROL Screen ........................... 27

Getting Started................................................. 3

Step 1: Unpack ................................................................3

Step 2: Prepare the Remote Control ................................3

Step 3: Hook Up ..............................................................4

Setting the Video Output Selector ...................................6

Changing the Scanning Mode .........................................6

Advanced Tape Operations .......................... 29

Recording on a Tape...................................................... 29

Synchronized Disc Recording ....................................... 30

Before Operating the System.......................... 7

Playable Disc Types ........................................................7

Display Indicators............................................................8

Timer Operations .......................................... 31

Setting the Timer ........................................................... 31

Setup Menu Operations ................................ 33

Operating Procedure ...................................................... 33

Restricting the Review—Parental Lock ........................ 37

Daily Operations—Playback ........................ 10

Listening to the Radio ...................................................11

Playing Back a Tape ......................................................12

Playing Back a Disc.......................................................12

Daily Operations—Sound & Other

Adjustments ................................................... 15

Adjusting the Volume....................................................15

Adjusting the Sound ......................................................15

Presetting Automatic DVD Video Sound

Increase Level ............................................................16

Changing the Display Brightness ..................................16

Changing the Picture Tone ............................................16

Setting the Clock ...........................................................17

Turning Off the Power Automatically...........................17

Additional Information................................. 39

Learning More about This System ................................ 39

Maintenance .................................................................. 41

Troubleshooting............................................................. 42

Language Code List....................................................... 43

Country/Area Codes List............................................... 44

DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals ..................... 45

Specifications ................................................................ 46

Parts Index ..................................................................... 46

Unique DVD/VCD Operations ..................... 18

Selecting the View Angle ..............................................18

Selecting the Subtitle Language ....................................18

Selecting the Audio Track .............................................19

Playing Back a Bonus Group ........................................19

Special Effect Playback .................................................20

Advanced Disc Operations............................ 21

Programming the Playing Order—Program Play..........21

Playing at Random—Random Play...............................22

Playing Repeatedly ........................................................23

Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock ........................23

1

Introduction.fm Page 2 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:53 PM

2

Introduction

Precautions

Installation

• Install in a place which is level, dry and neither too hot nor too cold—between 5°C and 35°C.

• Install the System in a location with adequate ventilation to prevent internal heat buildup inside the System.

DO NOT install the System in a location near heat sources, or in a place subject to direct sunlight, excessive dust or vibration.

How to Read This Manual

To make this manual as simple and easy-to-understand as possible, we have adapted the following methods:

• Button and control operations are explained as listed in the table below.

• Some related tips and notes are explained later in the sections “Additional Information” and

“Troubleshooting,” but not in the same section explaining the operations.

If you want to know more about the functions, or if you have a doubt about the functions, go to these sections and you will find the answers.

• Leave sufficient distance between the System and the TV.

• Keep the speakers away from the TV to avoid interference with TV.

Power sources

• When unplugging the System from the wall outlet, always pull on the plug, not the AC power cord.

Indicates that you press the button briefly .

Indicates that you press the button briefly and repeatedly until an option you want is selected.

DO NOT handle the AC power cord with wet hands.

Indicates that you press one of the buttons.

Moisture condensation

Moisture may condense on the lenses inside the System in the following cases:

• After starting to heat the room

• In a damp room

• If the System is brought directly from a cold to a warm place

Should this occur, the System may malfunction. In this case, leave the System turned on for a few hours until the moisture evaporates, unplug the AC power cord, then plug it in again.

Others

• Should any metallic object or liquid fall into the System, unplug the AC power cord and consult your dealer before operating any further.

2 sec.

Indicates that you press and hold the button for specified seconds.

• The number inside the arrow indicates the period of press (in this example, 2 seconds).

• If no number is inside the arrow, press and hold until the entire procedure is complete or until you get a result you want.

Indicates that you turn the control toward the specified direction(s).

DO NOT disassemble the System since there are no user serviceable parts inside.

• If you are not going to operate the System for an extended period of time, unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet.

If anything goes wrong, unplug the AC power cord and consult your dealer.

Remote

ONLY

Main Unit

ONLY

Indicates that this operation is only possible using the remote control.

Indicates that this operation is only possible using the buttons and controls on the main unit.

Introduction.fm Page 3 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:53 PM

Getting Started

Step 1

:Unpack the package and check the accessories.

Step 2

: Prepare the remote control.

Step

1

: Unpack

After unpacking, check to be sure that you have all the following items. The number in parentheses indicates the quantity of each piece supplied.

• FM antenna (1)

• AM loop antenna (1)

• Composite video cord (1)

• Remote control (1)

• Batteries (2)

• AC plug adaptor (1)

If any item is missing, consult your dealer immediately.

Step

2

: Prepare the Remote Control

Insert the batteries into the remote control by matching the polarity (+ and –) correctly.

1

2

Step 3

: Hook up the components such as AM/FM antennas, speakers, etc. (see pages 4 to 6).

3

R6(SUM-3)/AA(15F)

Finally plug the AC power cord.

• If the wall outlet does not match the AC plug, use the supplied AC plug adaptor.

Now you can operate the System.

• DO NOT use an old battery together with a new one.

• DO NOT use different types of batteries together.

• DO NOT expose batteries to heat or flame.

• DO NOT leave the batteries in the battery compartment when you are not going to use the remote control for an extended period of time. Otherwise, the remote control will be damaged from battery leakage.

3

Connection.fm Page 4 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:53 PM

Step

3

: Hook Up

If you need more detailed information, see page 6.

Illustrations of the input/output terminals below are typical examples.

When you connect other components, refer also to their manuals since the terminal names actually printed on the rear may vary.

Turn the power off to all components before connections.

For better FM/AM reception

AM loop antenna

Keep it connected.

Outdoor FM antenna

(not supplied)

Before connecting optical digital cord

Remove the protective cap from the DVD

OPTICAL DIGITAL

OUT terminal.

Vinyl-covered wire (not supplied)

Extend it horizontally.

TV

DECODER

AUX

VCR, etc.

VIDEO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

Y

P

B

P

R

AV

COMPU LINK

Disconnect the supplied FM antenna, and connect to an outdoor FM antenna using a 75

wire with coaxial type connector.

Yellow

Composite video cord (supplied)

OR

S-video cord (not supplied)

OR

Green

Blue

Red

Component video cord (not supplied)

AV COMPU LINK cord (not supplied)

(cord with monaural mini plug)

• For details, see “AV COMPU LINK remote control system” on page 6.

OPTICAL

DIGITAL IN

Optical digital cord (not supplied)

AUDIO OUT

LEFT

RIGHT

White

Red

Audio cord (not supplied)

4

Connection.fm Page 5 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:53 PM

AM loop antenna (supplied)

Turn it until the best reception is obtained.

FM antenna (supplied)

Extend it so that you can obtain the best reception.

Before plugging in the System

Set the correct voltage for your area with the voltage selector on the rear.

Use a screwdriver to rotate the voltage selector so that the voltage marker is pointing at the same voltage as where you are plugging in the unit. (See also the back cover page.)

Voltage marker

OPEN

PUSH

REVERSE

VIDEO

OUT

SELECT

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

PAL

NTSC

Y

S-VIDEO

P

R

DO NOT plug in before setting the voltage selector and all connection procedures are complete.

To a wall outlet

Plug the AC power cord only after all connections and selector settings on the rear are complete.

5

Connection.fm Page 6 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:53 PM

To connect the AM loop antenna

1 Hold

2 Insert

3 Release

IMPORTANT

The speakers are magnetically shielded to avoid color distortions on TVs. However, if not installed properly, it may cause color distortions. So, pay attention to the following when installing the speakers.

• When placing the speakers near a TV set, turn off the

TV’s main power switch or unplug it before installing the speakers. Then wait at least 30 minutes before turning on the TV’s main power switch again.

Some TVs may still be affected even though you have followed the above. If this happens, move the speakers away from the TV.

• If the AM loop antenna wire or speaker cords are covered with vinyl, remove the vinyl to expose the tip of the antenna by twisting the vinyl.

• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch any other terminals, connecting cords and power cord. Also, keep the antennas away from metallic parts of the System, connecting cords, and the AC power cord. This could cause poor reception.

To connect the speaker cords

Connect the right speaker to the RIGHT terminals, and the left speaker to the LEFT terminals.

AV COMPU LINK remote control system

This system allows you to use JVC’s TV with simple operations; by starting playing back a disc, the TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture.

• To use AV COMPU LINK, you need to connect the

System and the TV by using a cord with monaural miniplugs (not supplied) in addition to the video input/output connection through the COMPONENT jacks, S-VIDEO jack or VIDEO (composite) jack on the rear.

1 Hold

2 Insert

3 Release

• When connecting the speaker cords, match the polarity of the speaker terminals: Red cord to (+) and black cord to (–).

Setting the Video Output Selector

You can select the video output to match it to the color system of your TV.

NTSC: For an NTSC TV.

PAL: For a PAL TV.

VIDEO

OUT

SELECT

PAL

NTSC

• When using a multi-color system

TV, either position will work.

• DO NOT connect more than one speaker to each terminal.

• DO NOT allow the conductor of the speaker cords to be in touch with the metallic parts of the System.

Changing the Scanning Mode

Remote

ONLY

This System supports progressive scanning.

If you connect a progressive TV through the COMPONENT jacks, you can enjoy a high quality picture from the built-in

DVD player by selecting “PROGRE.”

PROGRESSIVE

0

PROGRE

INTER

PROGRE

INTER

(at the same time)

Progressive scanning. For a progressive TV.

Interlaced scanning. For a conventional TV.

6

Connection.fm Page 7 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:53 PM

Before Operating the System

Playable Disc Types

This unit has been designed to play back the following discs:

Disc Type Mark (Logo)

Video

Format

Region

Code*

Number

DVD Video

3 or

ALL

DVD Audio

Video CD

(VCD)

Super Video

CD (SVCD)

DIGITAL VIDEO

SUPER VIDEO

NTSC or

PAL

DVD Video—digital audio formats

The System can play back the following digital audio formats.

• Linear PCM: Uncompressed digital audio, the same format used for CDs and most studio masters.

• Dolby Digital: Compressed digital audio, developed by

Dolby Laboratories, which enables multi-channel encode to create the realistic surround sound.

• DTS (Digital Theater Systems): Compressed digital audio, developed by Digital Theater Systems, Inc., which enables multi-channel like Dolby Digital. As the compression ratio is lower than for Dolby Digital, it provides wider dynamic range and better separation.

When playing a multi-channel encoded DVD, the System properly converts these multi-channel signals into 2 channels, and emits the downmixed sound from the speakers.

• To enjoy the powerful sound of these multi-channel encoded DVDs, connect a proper decoder or an amplifier with a proper built-in decoder to the digital output terminal on the rear.

Audio CD

CD-R

CD-RW

DVD-R

DVD-RW

COMPACT

DIGITAL AUDIO

The System can play back CD-R or CD-RW recorded in the Audio CD, Video CD, SVCD,

MP3, WMA, and JPEG formats.

The System can play back DVD-R or DVD-

RW recorded in the video format.

In addition to the above discs, this System can play back audio data recorded on CD Text, CD-G (CD Graphics), and CD-Extra.

• The following discs cannot be played back:

DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, DVD+R, DVD+RW, CD-I (CD-I

Ready), CD-ROM, Photo CD, etc.

Playing back these discs will generate noise and damage the speakers.

• In this manual, “file” and “track” are interchangeably used for MP3/WMA/JPEG operations.

* Note on Region Code

DVD players and DVDs have their own Region Code numbers.

This System can play back only DVDs recorded with the NTSC or PAL color system whose Region Code numbers including

“3.”

EX.:

If a DVD with the improper Region Code numbers is loaded,

“RGN ERR (Region Code Error)” appears on the display and playback will not start.

• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “MLP Lossless”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

• “DTS” and “DTS2.0

+DIGITAL OUT ” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

• This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by

Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by

Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT ALL HIGH

DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE FULLY

COMPATIBLE WITH THIS PRODUCT AND MAY

CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE

PICTURE. IN CASE OF 525 OR 625 PROGRESSIVE

SCAN PICTURE PROBLEMS, IT IS RECOMMENDED

THAT THE USER SWITCH THE CONNECTION TO

THE ‘STANDARD DEFINITION’ OUTPUT. IF THERE

ARE QUESTIONS REGARDING OUR TV SET

COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS MODEL 525p AND

625p DVD PLAYER, PLEASE CONTACT OUR

CUSTOMER SERVICE CENTER.

7

Connection.fm Page 8 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:53 PM

Display Indicators

The indications on the display teach you a lot of things while you are operating the System.

Before operating the System, be familiar with when and how the indicator illuminates on the display.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8

SLEEP MONO ST MP3 WMA 3DPHONIC REC

123 REC

RANDOM

PRGM ALL BONUS B.S.P.

A.STANDBY

9 p q w e

1 Rhythm Ax indicator

• Lights when Rhythm Ax is activated.

2 Daily Timer indicators

• : lights when Daily Timer stands by or is being preset.

• 1/2/3: lights when a Daily Timer (1, 2, or 3) stands by; flashes while setting or working.

• REC: lights when the Recording Timer stands by; flashes while setting or working.

3 SLEEP indicator

• Lights when the Sleep Timer is activated.

4 FM reception indicators

• MONO: lights while receiving an FM stereo station in monaural.

• ST (stereo): lights while an FM stereo station with sufficient signal strength is tuned in.

5 MP3/WMA indicators

• MP3: lights when an MP3 track is detected.

• WMA: lights when a WMA track is detected.

6 3D PHONIC indicator

• Lights when 3D Phonic is activated.

7 REC indicator

• Lights while recording.

8 Tape operation indicators

2 3

(tape direction):

– Lights to indicate the current tape running direction.

– Flashes slowly during playback and recording.

– Flashes quickly while rewinding a tape.

(reverse mode):

: tape play continues endlessly.

: tape automatically reverses once.

: tape play stops at the end of one side.

9 Disc operation indicators

• RANDOM: lights when Random Play is activated.

• PRGM (program): lights when Program Play is activated.

• (repeat)/ALL:

– ALL : lights when Disc Repeat is activated.

– : lights when any Repeat other than the above is activated.

p BONUS indicator

• Lights when a DVD Audio with a bonus group is detected.

q B.S.P. (Browsable Still Picture) indicator

• Lights when Browsable Still Pictures are detected while playing a DVD Audio.

w Main display

• While listening to radio: Band (or preset number) and station frequency appear.

• While selecting “AUX”: “AUX” appears.

• While playing a tape: “TAPE” appears.

• While playing a disc: See “Indications on the main display while operating a disc” on page 9.

e A(auto). STANDBY indicator

• Lights when Auto Standby is activated.

• Flashes when disc playback stops with Auto Standby activated.

8

Connection.fm Page 9 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:53 PM

Indications on the main display while operating a disc

While playing back a disc:

• DVD Video:

While disc play is stopped:

• DVD Video:

Current chapter no.

Elapsed playing time

• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current title and chapter numbers for a few seconds.

• DVD Audio: • DVD Audio:

Total title no.

Track no.

Current track no.

Elapsed playing time

• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current group and track numbers for a few seconds.

• Audio CD: • Audio CD:

Total group no.

Group no.

Current track no.

Elapsed playing time

• SVCD/VCD:

Total track no.

• SVCD/VCD:

Total playing time

Current track no.

Elapsed playing time *

* “PBC” appears while playing a disc with PBC.

• MP3/WMA:

Total track no.

Total playing time *

* Changes to “PBC” when stopping PBC playback.

• MP3/WMA:

Current track no.

Current track no.

Elapsed playing time

• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current group and track numbers for a few seconds.

• JPEG: • JPEG:

Current group no.

Current group no.

Current file no.

Current group no.

• If Resume is turned “ON” (see page 36), “RESUME” appears when you stop playback.

Current file no.

9

Basic.fm Page 10 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:52 PM

10 keys

ENTER

TOP MENU

2

8

GROUP/TITLE

4 / ¢

SHIFT

1

2

DVD/CD

3

4

VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

Daily Operations

—Playback

1

SET

MENU

, , ,

RETURN

7

1 / ¡

3D PHONIC

3

In this manual, the operation using the remote control is mainly explained; however, you can use the buttons and controls on the main unit if they have the same (or similar) name and marks.

1

Turn on the power.

The STANDBY/ON lamp on the main unit lights in green.

• Without pressing STANDBY/ON , the System turns on by pressing one of the source selecting buttons in the next step.

2

Select the source.

Playback automatically starts if the selected source is ready to start.

• If you press AUX, start playback source on the external component.

3

Adjust the volume.

4

Operate the target source as explained later.

To turn off (stand by) the unit

STANDBY/ON

The STANDBY/ON lamp on the main unit lights in red.

• A small amount of power is always consumed even while on standby.

For private listening

Connect a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack on the main unit. The sound will no longer come out of the speakers. Be sure to turn down the volume before connecting or putting the headphones.

• Disconnecting the headphones will activate the speakers again.

DO NOT turn off (stand by) the System with the volume set to an extremely high level;

Otherwise, the sudden blast of sound can damage your hearing, speakers and/or headphones when you turn on the System or start playback.

10

Basic.fm Page 11 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:52 PM

Listening to the Radio

Main Unit

ONLY

To set the AM tuner interval spacing

Before operating the tuner, it is required to select the appropriate AM space interval used for your area.

1 Select the AM band.

To tune in to a station

While FM or AM is selected...

Remote control: Main unit:

2 sec.

GROUP/TITLE

DOWN

2 sec.

UP

FM AM

2 Turn off the power.

STANDBY/ON

3 Select the appropriate AM space interval for your area.

• You can only use the button and the control on the front panel.

Frequency starts changing on the display.

When a station (frequency) with sufficient signal strength is tuned in, the frequency stops changing.

• When you repeatedly press the button, the frequency changes step by step.

To stop searching manually, press either button.

Remote

ONLY

If the received FM station is hard to listen

FM MODE

9

DOWN

While holding...

UP

While holding...

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY/ON

AM 9KHZ

(9 kHz interval)

AM 10KHZ

(10 kHz interval)

(at the same time)

The MONO indicator lights on the display. Reception will improve though stereo effect is lost—Monaural reception mode.

To restore the stereo effect, press the button again (the

MONO indicator goes off).

Remote

ONLY

To preset the stations

You can preset 30 FM and 15 AM stations.

1

2

Tune in to a station you want to preset.

• You can also store the monaural reception mode for FM preset stations if selected.

Activate the preset number entry mode.

SET

• Finish the following process while the indication on the display is flashing.

To select the band (FM or AM)

FM AM

11

Basic.fm Page 12 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:52 PM

3 Select a preset number for the station you store.

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

REV. MODE

7

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

8

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

FM MODE

9

10 10

Examples:

To select preset number 5, press

5.

To select preset number 15, press +10, then 5.

To select preset number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.

• You can also use the ¡ or 1 buttons.

4

Store the station.

SET

To start: To stop:

To rewind tape:

Before or after play...

GROUP/TITLE

Rewind the tape to the right.

Rewind the tape to the left.

To tune in to a preset station

1 Select the band (FM or AM).

FM

Remote

ONLY

AM

To change the tape running direction

3

(forward play)

2

(reverse play)

To reverse the tape automatically

REV. MODE

7

2 Select a preset number for the station you store.

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

REV. MODE

7

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

8

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

FM MODE

9

• You can also use the

¡

or

1

buttons.

10 10

Playing Back a Tape

To insert a tape

You can play back tapes of types I, II, and IV.

Push Insert Close

With the tape side facing outside

(at the same time)

Tape is played from the forward side to the reverse side. When the reverse side is played back, playback stops.

Tape is automatically reversed, and playback repeats until you stop it.

Tape will not be reversed. When the current side of the tape reaches its end, playback stops.

Playing Back a Disc

IMPORTANT: Before playing a disc, make sure of the following...

• Turn on the TV and select an appropriate input mode on the TV to view the pictures or on-screen displays on the

TV screen.

• For disc playback, you can change the initial setting to your preference. See “Setup Menu Operations” on page 33.

If “ ” appears on the TV screen when you press a button, the disc cannot accept the operation you have tried to do, or data required for that operation is not recorded on the disc.

12

Basic.fm Page 13 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:52 PM

Before operating a disc, be familiar how a disc is recorded.

• DVD Video comprises of “ Titles ” which includes

“ Chapters ,” DVD Audio/MP3/WMA/JPEG comprise of

“ Groups ” which includes “ Tracks ,” and CD/SVCD/VCD comprise of only “ Tracks .”

• For JPEG playback, see “Operations on the CONTROL

Screen” on page 27.

To insert a disc

You can insert a disc while playing another source.

On-screen guide icons

• During DVD Video playback, the following icons may appear on the TV:

At the beginning of a scene containing multiangle views.

At the beginning of a scene containing multiaudio sounds.

At the beginning of a scene containing multisubtitles.

• The following icons will be also shown on the TV to indicate your current operation.

, , , , ,

To close the disc tray, press

0

again.

• If you press DVD/CD

3

, disc tray closes automatically and playback starts (depending on how the disc is programmed internally).

To start: To pause: To stop:

DVD/CD

To select a title/group

While playing...

Remote

ONLY

GROUP/TITLE

To release, press

DVD/CD

3

.

• While playing DVD/SVCD/VCD: This System can store the stop point, and when you start playback again by pressing DVD/CD

3

(even while on standby), it starts from the position where you have stopped—Resume Play.

(“RESUME” appears on the display when you stop playback.)

To stop completely while Resume is activated, press

7 twice. (To cancel Resume, see “RESUME” on page 36.)

• When operating the System, the on-screen guide icon (see the following table) appears on the TV.

To deactivate the on-screen guide icons, see “ON

SCREEN GUIDE” on page 36.

(at the same time)

• Group name appears for MP3/WMA discs.

To select a chapter/track

While playing...

GROUP/TITLE

• First time you press

4

, you can go back to the beginning of the current chapter/track.

Remote

ONLY

To locate a particular portion

While playing a disc except MP3/WMA...

SLOW – SLOW

+ x2 x5 x10 x20 x60 x2 x5 x10 x20

• No sound comes out while searching on DVD Video/

SVCD/VCD.

To return to normal playback, press DVD/CD

3

.

x60

13

Basic.fm Page 14 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:52 PM

Remote

ONLY

To locate an item directly

You can select a title/chapter/track directly and start playback.

• For DVD Video, you can select a title before starting playback , while you can select a chapter after starting playback .

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

REV. MODE

7

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

8

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

FM MODE

9

Examples:

To select number 5, press 5.

To select number 15, press +10, then 5.

To select number 30, press +10,

+10, then 10.

10 10

7

For SVCD/VCD with PBC:

While playing a disc with PBC, “PBC” appears on the display.

When disc menu appears on the TV, select an item on the menu. Playback of the selected item starts.

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

REV. MODE

7

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

8

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

FM MODE

9

Examples:

To select number 5, press 5.

To select number 15, press +10, then 5.

To select number 30, press +10,

+10, then 10.

10 10

To move to the next or previous page of the current menu:

GROUP/TITLE

Moves to the next page.

To use 3D Phonic

While playing...

3D

PHONIC

3D PHONIC ACTION

3D PHONIC OFF

(Canceled)

3D PHONIC

3D PHONIC

DRAMA

THEATER

• The selected mode can only be shown on the TV.

ACTION Suitable for action movies and sports programs.

DRAMA Creates natural and warm sound. Enjoy movies in a relaxed mood.

THEATER Enjoy sound effects like in a major theater.

To play back using the disc menu

7 For DVD Video/DVD Audio:

1 Show the disc menu.

TOP MENU

SET UP

MENU

Remote

ONLY

2 Select an item on the disc menu.

ENTER

Moves to the previous page.

To return to the previous menu:

CANCEL

RETURN

(at the same time)

To cancel PBC

AUDIO

1

SUB TITLE

2

ANGLE

3

ZOOM

4

REV. MODE

7

DVD LEVEL

5

8

VFP

6

FM MODE

9

10 10

Select a track.

Stop playback.

Playback starts with the selected track.

To reactivate PBC, press

7

(twice if Resume is turned

“ON”), then press DVD/CD

3

.

• With some discs, you can also select items by entering the number using the 10 keys.

14

Basic.fm Page 15 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:52 PM

Daily Operations

—Sound & Other Adjustments

Remote control

Adjusting the Volume

You can adjust the volume level from level 0 (VOL MIN) to level 40 (VOL MAX).

Remote control: Main unit:

VOLUME DVD LEVEL

CLOCK/

TIMER

ENTER

VFP

SLEEP

A.STANDBY

SET

, , ,

VOLUME

FADE

MUTING

Remote

ONLY

To drop the volume in a moment

To restore the volume, press again, or adjust the volume level.

BASS/TREBLE

DISPLAY

DIMMER

SHIFT

RHYTHM AX

VOLUME

+/–

FADE

MUTING

Adjusting the Sound

To emphasize rhythm feeling—RHYTHM AX

This function emphasizes bass attack feeling, and also changes the subwoofer level.

RHYTHM AX

RHYTHMAX OFF

(Canceled)

Main unit

RHYTHM AX

VOLUME +/–

To adjust the tone

You can adjust the bass and treble level from –5 to +5.

To adjust the bass

BASS/

TREBLE

BASS TRE

Canceled

VOLUME

To adjust the treble

BASS/

TREBLE

BASS TRE

Canceled

VOLUME

15

Basic.fm Page 16 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:52 PM

Presetting Automatic DVD Video Sound

Increase Level

Remote

ONLY

The DVD Video sound is sometimes recorded at a lower level than for other discs and sources. You can set the increase level for the currently loaded DVD Video, so you do not have to adjust the volume every time you change the source.

DVD LEVEL

5

NORMAL MIDDLE

HIGH

(at the same time)

NORMAL Original recording level.

MIDDLE Output level is increased (less than “HIGH”).

HIGH Output level is increased (more than

“MIDDLE”).

• Once the current DVD is ejected, this setting is canceled and set automatically to “NORMAL.”

Changing the Picture Tone

Remote

ONLY

While showing a playback picture on the TV, you can select the preset picture tone, or adjust it and store your own taste.

To select a preset picture tone

1 While playing, display VFP setting screen.

NORMAL

VFP

GAMMA

BRIGHTNESS

6

CONTRAST

SATURATION

TINT

SHARPNESS

(at the same time) On the TV

0

0

0

0

0

0

2 Select a preset picture tone.

NORMAL

USER2

CINEMA

USER1

Changing the Display Brightness

You can dim the display window.

Remote

ONLY

DIMMER

DIM1

DIM OFF

(Canceled)

DIM2

AUTO DIM

DIM1

DIM2

Dims the display.

Erases the display illumination.

AUTO DIM Erases the display illumination when disc playback starts.*

• The display illuminates when playback stops.

* “AUTO DIM” does not work for CD/MP3/WMA.

NORMAL

CINEMA

Normally select this.

Suitable for a movie source.

USER1/USER2 You can adjust parameters and can store the settings (see below).

To erase the screen, press VFP again while holding SHIFT.

To adjust the picture tone

1 Select “USER1” or “USER2.”

• Follow steps 1 and 2 explained above.

2 Select a parameter you want to adjust.

ENTER

GAMMA Adjust if the neutral color is bright or dark (–3 to +3).

BRIGHTNESS Adjust if the entire picture is bright or dark (–8 to +8).

CONTRAST Adjust if the far and near positions are unnatural (–7 to +7).

SATURATION Adjust if the picture is whitish or blackish (–7 to +7).

TINT Adjust if the human skin color is unnatural (–7 to +7).

SHARPNESS Adjust if the picture is indistinct

(–8 to +8).

16

Basic.fm Page 17 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:52 PM

3 Adjust the parameter.

ENTER

Turning Off the Power

Automatically

Remote

ONLY

To turn off the unit after playback is over—Auto

Standby

4 Repeat steps 2 to 3 to adjust other parameters.

To erase the screen, press VFP again while holding SHIFT.

SLEEP

A.STANDBY

On

Canceled

Setting the Clock

Remote

ONLY

Without setting the built-in clock, you cannot use Daily

Timers, Recording Timer (see page 31) and Sleep Timer.

• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL or CLOCK/TIMER. You can return to the previous step.

1 Activate the clock setting mode.

CLOCK/

TIMER

• If you have already adjusted the clock before, press the button repeatedly until the clock setting mode is selected.

2

Adjust the hour.

SET

(at the same time)

When Auto Standby is in use, the A.STANDBY indicator lights on the display.

When disc play stops, the A.STANDBY indicator starts flashing. If no operation is done for about 3 minutes while the indicator is flashing, the System turns off (stands by) automatically.

• Auto Standby does not work while you are listening to radio (FM/AM) and the external component (AUX).

To turn off the unit after a certain period of time

—Sleep Timer

1 Specify the time (in minutes).

SLEEP

A.STANDBY

10 20 30 60 90 120

Canceled

150

3 Adjust the minute.

SET

2 Wait until the set time goes off.

To check the time remaining until the shut-off time

SLEEP

A.STANDBY

SLEEP

Now the built-in clock starts working.

To check the current clock time during play

DISPLAY

Clock

Source information

• While playing a DVD and MP3/WMA, you cannot check the current clock time (see page 9) .

• If you press the button repeatedly, you can change the shutoff time.

17

UniqueDVD.fm Page 18 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:52 PM

Remote control

SUB TITLE

AUDIO

ZOOM

, , ,

DVD/CD

3

8

SHIFT

Unique DVD/VCD Operations

ANGLE

10 keys

Selecting the View Angle

Remote

ONLY

While playing back a chapter (of DVD Video) containing multi-view angles, you can view the same scene from different angles.

• You can also select the multi-view angles using the onscreen bar (see page 24).

While playing...

ANGLE

3

ENTER

7

SLOW –/+

Ex.:

1/3

1

1/3

1

(at the same time)

2/3

2

2/3

2

3/3

3

3/3

3

Selecting the Subtitle Language

Remote

ONLY

For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter (of DVD

Video) containing subtitles in different languages, you can select the subtitle language to display on the TV.

For SVCD: While playing, you can select the subtitles even if no subtitles are recorded on the disc.

• You can also select the subtitle language using the onscreen bar (see page 24).

While playing a DVD Video...

1

Display the subtitle selection window.

1/3

ENGLISH

SUB TITLE

2

1/3

ENGLISH

(at the same time)

18

UniqueDVD.fm Page 19 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:52 PM

2

Select the subtitle language.

While playing a DVD Video...

Ex.:

1/3

ENGLISH

2/3

FRENCH

3/3

JAPANESE

Ex.:

1/3

ENGLISH

1/3

ENGLISH

2/3

FRENCH

2/3

FRENCH

3/3

JAPANESE

3/3

JAPANESE

1/3

ENGLISH

2/3

FRENCH

3/3

JAPANESE

While playing a DVD Audio...

Ex.:

1/3 2/3

1 2

3/3

3

While playing an SVCD video...

SUB TITLE

2

–/4

OFF

(at the same time)

1/4

1

4/4

4

3/4

3

AUDIO

1

(at the same time)

2/4

2

Selecting the Audio Track

Remote

ONLY

For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter containing audio languages, you can select the language to listen to.

For DVD Audio: While playing back a track containing audio channels, you can select the audio channel to listen to.

For Karaoke SVCD/VCD: When playing back a track, you can select the audio channel to play.

• You can also select the audio track using the on-screen bar

(see page 24).

While playing a Karaoke SVCD or VCD...

AUDIO

1

SVCD

ST1

R2

VCD

ST

ST2

L2

L

(at the same time)

L1

R1

R

ST1/ST2

ST

L1/L2/L

R1/R2/R

To listen to normal stereo (2 channel) playback.

To listen to the left audio channel.

To listen to the right audio channel.

• SVCD can have 4 audio channels. Karaoke SVCD usually uses these 4 channels to record two 2-channel recordings

(ST1/ST2).

Playing Back a Bonus Group

Remote

ONLY

Some DVD Audios have a special group called “bonus group” whose contents are not open to the public.

• To play back a bonus group, you have to enter the specific

“key number” (a kind of password) for the bonus group.

The way of getting the key number depends on the disc.

1

Select the bonus group.

• The bonus group is usually recorded as the last group

(for example, if a disc contains 4 groups including a bonus group, “group 4” is the bonus group).

• For how to select the group, see “To select a title/group” on page 13.

19

UniqueDVD.fm Page 20 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:52 PM

2

Enter the key number.

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

REV. MODE

7 8

PROGRESSIVE

0

FM MODE

9

ENTER

3

Follow the interactive instructions shown on the screen.

To cancel the key number entry, press

7

.

Special Effect Playback

Still picture playback

Remote

ONLY

To start still picture playback:

While playing...

To resume normal playback:

DVD/CD

Frame-by-frame playback

1

2

While playing...

Still picture playback starts.

Advance the still picture frame by frame.

To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD

3

.

Slow-motion playback

1

While playing...

Still picture playback starts.

2

Select slow motion speed.

SLOW – SLOW +

Forward slow motion starts.

Reverse slow motion* starts.

SLOW

+

1/32 1/16 1/8 1/4 1/2

SLOW –

1/32 1/16 1/8 1/4 1/2

*Not available for SVCD/VCD.

To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3 .

To replay the previous scenes

(One-Touch Replay)

• This function is only used while playing DVD Video.

While playing back...

The playback position moves back about 10 seconds before the current position (only within the same title).

Zoom

1

Remote

ONLY

While playing back...

ZOOM

4

(at the same time)

ZOOM

4

ZOOM 1

ZOOM OFF

ZOOM 2

ZOOM 6

ZOOM 3 ZOOM 4

ZOOM 5

2

Move the zoomed-in position.

To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly (while holding

SHIFT) until “ZOOM OFF” appears on the TV.

20

AdvancedDisc.fm Page 21 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:51 PM

Remote control

10 keys

,

DVD/CD

3

8

4

/

¢

SHIFT

Main unit

DVD/CD

3

4 , 7 , ¢

Advanced Disc Operations

Programming the Playing Order—

Program Play

Remote

ONLY

You can arrange the playing order of the chapters or tracks

(up to 99) before you start playback.

1

Before starting playback, activate Program Play.

PLAY

MODE

PROGRAM

Canceled

RANDOM

ENTER

CANCEL

7

PLAY

MODE

REPEAT

REPEAT A-B

PRGM

On the display

PROGRAM

No

1

8

9

6

7

10

2

3

4

5

Group/Title Track/Chapter

USE NUMERIC KEYS TO PROGRAM TRACKS.

USE CANCEL TO DELETE THE PROGRAM.

On the TV

2

Select chapters or tracks you want for Program Play.

• For DVD/MP3/WMA:

1 Select a title or group number.

2

3

Select a chapter or track number.

Repeat the above steps 1 and 2 .

• For SVCD/VCD/CD:

1 Select tracks.

To enter the numbers directly:

AUDIO

1

SUB TITLE

2

ANGLE

3

ZOOM

4

REV. MODE

7

DVD LEVEL

5

8

VFP

6

FM MODE

9

Examples:

To enter number 5, press 5.

To enter number 15, press +10, then 5.

To enter number 30, press +10,

+10, then 10.

10 10

0

21

AdvancedDisc.fm Page 22 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:51 PM

3

Start playback.

DVD/CD

Playback starts in the order you have programmed.

Playing at Random—Random Play

Remote

ONLY

You can play all chapters or tracks at random.

• Random Play cannot be used for some DVDs.

1

Before starting playback, activate Random Play.

PLAY

MODE PROGRAM

Canceled

RANDOM

To skip a step:

GROUP/TITLE

To pause:

To release, press

DVD/CD

3

.

To check the programmed contents

Before or after playback...

In the reverse order.

To stop:

RANDOM

2

Start playback.

DVD/CD

Playback starts in random order.

Random Play ends when the entire disc has been played.

In the programmed order.

• You can also use

4

or

¢

to check the programmed contents.

To modify the program

Before or after playback...

To erase the last step: To erase the entire program:

CANCEL

RETURN

To skip a chapter/ track:

To pause: To stop:

To release, press

DVD/CD

3

.

To exit from Random Play

Before or after playback...

PLAY

MODE PROGRAM

Canceled

RANDOM

To add steps in the program:

Repeat step 2 .

To exit from Program Play

Before or after playback...

PLAY

MODE PROGRAM

Canceled

RANDOM

22

AdvancedDisc.fm Page 23 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:51 PM

Playing Repeatedly

Remote

ONLY

• You can also select the repeat mode using the on-screen bar (see page 25).

Repeat Play

You can repeat playback.

• For DVD Video:

While playing...

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

REP CHAP

*

REP OFF

(Canceled)

REP TTL

• For DVD Audio:

While playing or before playback...

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

REP TRK

*

REP GRP

REP OFF

(Canceled)

• For MP3/WMA:

While playing or before playback...

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

REP TRK

*

REP OFF

(Canceled)

REP GRP

REP ALL

• For CD/SVCD/VCD:

While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD) or before playback...

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

REP TRK

*

REP OFF

(Canceled)

REP ALL

REP CHAP * Repeats the current chapter.

REP TTL Repeats the current title.

REP TRK * Repeats the current track.

REP GRP Repeats the current group.

REP ALL Repeats the disc or program.

*During Program Play and Random Play, “REP STEP” appears instead of these indications, and repeat modes change as follows for all the discs.

REP STEP REP ALL

REP OFF

(Canceled)

A-B Repeat

You can repeat playback of a desired portion by specifying the beginning (point A) and the ending (point B).

• A-B Repeat cannot be used for MP3/WMA and for some

DVDs.

• A-B Repeat can be used within the same title while playing a DVD Video, and within the same track for the other discs.

1

While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), select the start point (A).

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

starts flashing on the display.

• A appears on the TV if the TV is turned on.

(at the same time)

2

Select the end point (B).

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

stops flashing.

TV.

A-B appears on the

• You can search for the end point using the

¡

button.

(at the same time)

To cancel A-B Repeat, press REPEAT A-B again while holding SHIFT.

• A-B Repeat will also be canceled when you stop play or skip the chapter or track.

Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock

Main Unit

ONLY

You can lock the disc tray so that no one can eject the loaded disc.

• This is possible while the System is on standby.

While the disc tray is closed...

(at the same time)

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.

“UNLOCKED” appears on the display.

23

OSDOperation.fm Page 24 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:51 PM

24

On-Screen Disc Operations

Remote control

ZOOM

, , ,

ON SCREEN

DVD/CD

3

8

4

/

¢

SHIFT

On-screen bars

DVD Video

1

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

DVD Audio

1

2 3

CHAP.

TITLE 14

1 /

CHAP

1/3

23

1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

4

2 3

DVD-AUDIO

TIME OFF

SVCD

1

SVCD

TRACK

GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58

1 / 3 PAGE 1 / 3

4

2 3

TITLE 14

/ 1/3

CHAP 23

1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1/3

4

VCD

1

VCD

2

TITLE 14 CHAP 23

1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1/3

3

4

CD

1 2 3

CD TITLE 14 CHAP

1/3

23

1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1/3

4

10 keys

ENTER

CANCEL

7

REPEAT

¡

On-screen Bar Information

You can check the disc information (except for MP3/WMA/

JPEG disc) and use some functions through the on-screen bar.

1 Disc type

2 Playback information

Indication Meanings

Mbps Current transfer rate

(Megabits per second)

TITLE 2 Current title

CHAP 3

GROUP 1

TRACK 14

Current chapter

Current group

Current track

TOTAL 1:25:58 Time indications

3 Operation modes

Indication Meanings

Playback

/

/ Forward/Reverse search

Forward/Reverse slow-motion

Pause

Stop

4 Function icons (on the pull-down menu)

Indication Meanings

TIME

Select to change the time indication.

OFF

CHAP.

TRACK

Select to repeat playback.

Select for time search.

Select for chapter search.

Select for track search.

1/3

1/3

1/3

PAGE 1 / 5

Select to change the audio language or channel (see also page 19).

Select to change subtitle language

(see also page 18).

Select to change the view angle (see also page 18).

Select to change the page.

OSDOperation.fm Page 25 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:51 PM

Operations Using the On-screen Bar

Remote

ONLY

Ex.: Selecting a subtitle (French) for DVD Video

While a disc is selected as the source...

1

Display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.

ON SCREEN

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

TITLE 2 CHAP 3 TIME 0:00:58

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

CHAP.

14

1 / 1/3

23 TOTAL 1:25:58

1 / 1/3 1 1/3

Goes off

2

Select (highlight) the item you want.

For detailed operations of the following functions, see also “Operations Using the On-screen Bar” on the left.

To change the time information

You can change the time information in the on-screen bar and the display window on the main unit.

1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pulldown menu.

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

CHAP.

TITLE 14 CHAP 23

1 / 1/3 1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

2 Make sure TIME is selected (highlighted).

3 Change the time indication.

ENTER

TIME 0:00:58

T.REM 0:35:24

REM 0:11:23

TOTAL 1:01:58

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

CHAP.

TITLE 14 CHAP 23

1 / 1/3 1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

3

Display the pop-up window.

ENTER

TITLE 14

1

CHAP

1/3

23

1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

ENGLISH

4

Select the desired option in the pop-up window.

TITLE 14 CHAP

1 1/3

23

2 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

FRENCH

5

Finish the setting.

ENTER

Pop-up window goes off.

To erase the on-screen bar

ON SCREEN

TIME

REM

TOTAL

T.REM

Elapsed playing time of the current chapter/track.

Remaining time of the current chapter/ track.

Elapsed disc time.

Remaining disc time.

To erase the on-screen bar

ON SCREEN

Repeat Play

• See also page 23.

1 While playing a disc (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.

• Except for DVD Video: Repeat Play can be selected before starting playback.

3 Display the pop-up window.

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

CHAP.

TITLE 14

1 /

CHAP

1/3

23

1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

OFF

25

OSDOperation.fm Page 26 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:51 PM

4 Select the repeat mode you want.

A-B

TITLE

TRACK *

OFF

Repeats a desired portion (see below).

Repeats the current title.

GROUP

ALL

Repeats the current group.

Repeats the disc (except for DVD) or program.

CHAPTER * Repeats the current chapter.

Repeats the current track.

Cancels Repeat Play.

* During Program Play and Random Play, “STEP” appears.

5 Finish the setting.

ENTER

A-B Repeat

• See also page 23.

1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pulldown menu.

3 Display the pop-up window.

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

CHAP.

TITLE 14 CHAP 23 TOTAL 1:25:58

1 / 1/3 1 / 1/3 1 1/3

OFF

Time Search

You can move to a particular point by specifying the elapsed playing time from the beginning.

1 While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.

• Except for DVD: Time Search can be used before starting playback.

2 Select .

3 Display the pop-up window.

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

TITLE 14

CHAP.

TIME _ : _ _ : _ _

1 /

CHAP

1/3

23

1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

4 Enter the time.

You can specify the time in hours/minutes/seconds.

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

REV. MODE

7 8

PROGRESSIVE

0

FM MODE

9

Examples:

To move to a point of 1

(hours): 02 (minutes): 00

(seconds), press 1, 0, 2, 0, then

0.

To move to a point of 54

(minutes): 00 (seconds), press

0, 5, 4, 0, then 0.

• It is always required to enter the hour digit (even “0” hour), but it is not required to enter trailing zeros (the

• last two digits in the examples above).

To correct a misentry, press Cursor < to erase the last entry.

5 Finish the setting.

ENTER

The System starts playing the disc from the selected playing time.

4 Select “A-B.”

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

CHAP.

TITLE 14 CHAP

1 / 1/3

23

1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

A–B

5 Select the start point (A).

ENTER

DVD-VIDEO

A-

8.5Mbps

CHAP.

TITLE 14 CH

1 / 1/3

6 Select the end point (B).

ENTER

A-B Repeat starts. The selected portion plays repeatedly.

• Before pressing ENTER, you can search for the end point using the

¡

button.

To cancel A-B Repeat, repeat steps 1 to 3 , and select “OFF” in step 4 .

Chapter/Track Search

You can search for the chapter (DVD Video) or track (DVD

Audio) number to play.

1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pulldown menu.

2 Select CHAP.

or TRACK .

3 Display the pop-up window.

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

TITLE 14 CHAP 23

CHAP.

CHAPTER _

1 1/3 1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

26

OSDOperation.fm Page 27 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:51 PM

4 Enter the desired chapter/track number.

AUDIO

1

SUB TITLE

2

ANGLE

3

ZOOM

4

REV. MODE

7

DVD LEVEL

5

8

VFP

6

FM MODE

9

PROGRESSIVE

0

Examples:

To select chapter/track 5, press

5.

To select chapter/track 15, press 1, then 5.

To select chapter/track 30, press 3, then 0.

• To correct a misentry, press the 10 keys until the desired number shown in the pop-up window.

5 Finish the setting.

ENTER

The System starts playing the searched chapter or track.

Selecting Browsable Still Pictures

Remote

ONLY

While playing back a track (of DVD Audio) linked to browsable still pictures (BSP), you can select the still picture

(turn the page) to be shown on the TV.

• If a track is linked to browsable still pictures (BSP), they are usually shown in turn automatically during playback.

1 While playing a DVD Audio, display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.

3 Display the pop-up window.

DVD-AUDIO

TIME OFF TRACK

GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58

1 / 3 PAGE 1 / 5

1

4 Select a still picture you want.

DVD-AUDIO

TIME OFF TRACK

GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58

1 / 3 PAGE 3 / 5

3

5 Finish the setting.

ENTER

Operations on t he CONTROL Screen

Remote

ONLY

The CONTROL screen automatically appears on the TV when you load an MP3, WMA, or JPEG disc.

You can search for and play the desired tracks through the

CONTROL screen.

• If both types of files (MP3/WMA files and JPEG files) are recorded on a disc, select the file type to play (see page 35).

CONTROL screen

Ex.: When the MP3 disc is loaded.

1

2

3

4

Group : 2 / 3

Spring

Summer

Fall

Winter

Track Information

Title

Rain

Artist

Album

REPEAT TRACK Time : 00:00:14

Track : 5 / 14 (Total 41)

Cloudy.mp3

Fair.mp3

Fog.mp3

Hail.mp3

Indian summer.mp3

Rain.mp3

Shower.mp3

Snow.mp3

Thunder.mp3

Typhoon.mp3

Wind.mp3

Winter sky.mp3

6

7

8

9

0

-

5

1 Current group number/total group number

2 Current group (in blue)

3 Group list

4 Track information (ID3 Tag Version 1.0: only for

MP3/WMA)

5 Current track (in blue)

6 Repeat Play setting

7 Elapsed playing time of the current track

(only for MP3/WMA)

8 Operation mode icon

9 Current track number/total number of tracks in the current group (total number of tracks on the loaded disc)

0 Highlight (green) bar

Track list

27

OSDOperation.fm Page 28 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:51 PM

To move the highlight (green) bar between group list and track list:

Moves the bar to the track list.

To repeat slide-show for JPEG

While playing or before starting playback...

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

REP GRP REP ALL

REP OFF

(Canceled)

Moves the bar to the group list.

To select a group/track in the list:

Move the highlight bar to a desired item.

• If you move the highlight bar while playing back an MP3/

WMA disc, the selected track starts playback automatically.

REP GRP Repeats the current group.

REP ALL Repeats the disc.

• For Repeat Play of MP3/WMA, see page 23.

To zoom in the still picture

• You cannot zoom in the still picture during slide-show.

1

While playing back a still picture...

• During slide-show, press

8

to display the still picture, then...

To start playback

For MP3/WMA:

ZOOM

4

ENTER

Playback starts with the selected track.

• Pressing DVD/CD 3 also starts playback.

(at the same time)

For JPEG:

ZOOM

4

ZOOM 1

ZOOM OFF

ZOOM 2

ENTER

The selected track (still picture) is displayed until you change it.

2

Move the zoomed-in position.

DVD/CD

Slide-show playback starts.

Each track (still picture) is shown on the screen for about 3 seconds, then changes one after another.

• Once you start playing back a JPEG track, the CONTROL screen goes off.

• To cancel slide-show, and display the current still picture, press

8

.

To skip a track:

GROUP/TITLE

To stop playback:

To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly (while holding

SHIFT) until “ZOOM OFF” appears on the TV.

28

AdvancedTape.fm Page 29 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:50 PM

Remote control

REV. MODE

TAPE

2 3

DVD/CD

3

7

SHIFT

Advanced Tape Operations

IMPORTANT

It may be unlawful to record or play back copyrighted material without the consent of the copyright owner.

Recording on a Tape

You can use type I tapes for recording.

• To play a tape, see page 12.

1

Insert a recordable cassette.

Push Insert Close

FM/AM

AUX

With the tape side facing outside

2

Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode settings on the display.

Reverse mode indicator

Main unit

TAPE

2 3

DVD/CD

3

REC

PUSH OPEN 0

FM/AM

AUX

7

Tape direction indicator

To change the direction

Current source

3

(forward)

2

(reverse)

To change the Reverse mode if necessary

REV. MODE

7

(

(at the same time)

)

To record on both sides.

• When using Reverse Mode, start recording in the forward (

3

) direction.

To record on only one side.

29

AdvancedTape.fm Page 30 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:50 PM

3

Select and start playing the source—“FM,” “AM,”

“DVD/CD,” or “AUX.”

• When recording a disc, you can also use “Synchronized

Disc Recording” (see below).

4

Start recording.

REC

To record Program Play or Random Play

1 Select Program Play (and make a program) or Random

Play, but do not start playback.

2 Press REC to start recording.

• When disc play stops, recording continues. It is required that recording be stopped manually.

To stop recording:

On the main unit

To record only your favorite track

You can specify tracks to be recorded on the tape while listening to a disc (except for DVD Video).

1

Start playing a disc.

DVD/CD

Synchronized Disc Recording

You can start and stop both disc play and tape recording at the same time.

To record the entire disc

1

Load a disc and insert a recordable cassette.

• If the current playing source is not the disc player, press

DVD/CD

3

, then

7

.

2

Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode settings on the display.

• See step 2 of “Recording on a Tape” on page 29.

3

Start recording.

REC

The System automatically creates 4-second blanks between the tunes recorded on the tapes.

2

While a track you want to record on the tape is playing...

REC

On the main unit

The disc player returns to the beginning of that track and the track is recorded on the tape.

After recording the track, the disc player and cassette deck automatically stop.

3

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to record other tracks you want.

• You can exchange the discs if necessary.

To protect your recording

Cassettes have two small tabs on the back to protect from unexpected erasure or re-recording.

To protect your recording, remove these tabs.

On the main unit

• When either disc play* or recording ends, both disc player and the cassette deck stop at the same time.

• If you press REC soon after the recording is stopped, “NO

REC” may appear.

* For DVD Video: When a title is finished playing.

To record a “Live” disc

It will not be desirable to put 4-second blank portions between the tunes recorded on the tape.

To record the entire disc without any interruption recorded, pause the disc play (press DVD/CD

3

, then

8

) before pressing REC.

To re-record on a protected tape, cover the holes with adhesive tape.

30

Timer.fm Page 31 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:50 PM

Remote control

SET

,

Timer Operations

STANDBY/ON

CLOCK/

TIMER

CANCEL

Setting the Timer

Remote

ONLY

Using Daily Timer, you can wake up with your favorite song. On the other hand, with Recording Timer, you can make a tape of a radio broadcast automatically.

• You can store three Daily Timer settings and one

Recording Timer setting; however, you can activate only one of Daily Timers and Recording Timer at the same time.

• To exit from the timer setting, press CLOCK/TIMER as required.

• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL.

You can return to the previous step.

1

Select one of the timer setting modes you want to set—

Daily 1 ON time, Daily 2 ON time, Daily 3 ON time, or

Recording Timer ON time.

CLOCK/

TIMER

Daily 1 Timer

DAILY 1 * ON (Time)

Canceled

Daily 2 Timer

DAILY 2 * ON (Time)

Clock setting

(see page 17)

Daily 3 Timer

DAILY 3 * ON (Time)

ON (Time) REC TMR

Recording Timer

1

Ex. When Daily Timer 1 setting mode is selected

2

Make the timer setting as you want.

Repeat the following operations until you finish setting in the following order—

SET

* Daily Timer initial settings when shipped from the factory

• DAILY 1:ON Time (6:00)/OFF Time (8:00)/

Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)

• DAILY 2:ON Time (12:00)/OFF Time (14:00)/

Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)

• DAILY 3:ON Time (18:00)/OFF Time (20:00)/

Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)

For Daily Timers:

1 Set the hour then the minute for on-time.

2 Set the hour then the minute for off-time.

3 Select the playback source—“TUNER FM,”

“TUNER AM,” “TAPE,” “DISC,” or “AUX.”

1

4 For “TUNER FM” and “TUNER AM”: Select a preset channel.

For “DISC”: Select the title/group number, then the chapter/track number.

31

Timer.fm Page 32 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:50 PM

5 Select the volume level.

• You can select the volume level (“VOL 0” to

“VOL 50” and “VOL – –”).

If you select “VOL – –,” the volume is set to the last level when the unit has been turned off.

Once settings are complete, the Timer setting information appears in sequence.

For Recording Timer:

1 Set the hour then the minute for on-time.

2 Set the hour then the minute for off-time.

3 Select the playback source—“TUNER FM,”

4

“TUNER AM,” or “AUX.”

For “TUNER FM” and “TUNER AM”: Select a preset channel.

Once settings are complete, the Timer setting information appears in sequence.

3

Turn off the unit (on standby) if you have set the timer with the System turned on.

STANDBY/ON

How Recording Timer actually works

When Recording Timer has been set, Timer ( ) indicator and the REC indicator are lit on the display.

Recording Timer works only once.

When the on-time comes

The System turns on, tunes in to the specified station or changes the source to “AUX”, sets the volume level to the preset level, and starts recording.

When the off-time comes

The System stops recording, and turns off (stands by).

• The timer setting remains in memory until you change it.

To turn off the Timer after its setting is done

Since Daily Timer is activated at the same time everyday, you may need to cancel it on some particular days.

• Recording Timer can also be canceled temporarily.

1 Select the Timer you want to cancel.

CLOCK/

TIMER

Daily 1 Timer

DAILY 1 * ON (Time)

Daily 2 Timer

DAILY 2 * ON (Time)

Daily 3 Timer

DAILY 3 * ON (Time)

Canceled Clock setting

(see page 17)

ON (Time) REC TMR

Recording Timer

How Daily Timer actually works

Once the Daily Timer has been set, the timer ( ) indicator and timer number indicator (1/2/3) are lit on the display. Daily Timer is activated at the same time everyday until the timer is turned off manually (see the next column) or another timer is activated.

When the on-time comes

The System turns on, starts playing the specified source

(except “AUX”), and sets the volume level to the preset level.

• While Daily Timer is working, the timer ( ) indicator and timer number indicator (1/2/3) flash on the display.

When the off-time comes

The System stops playback, and turns off (stands by) automatically.

• The timer setting remains in memory until you change it.

1

2 Turn off the selected Timer.

Ex.To cancel Daily

Timer 1

CANCEL

RETURN

To turn on the Timer

1 Select the Timer (DAILY 1/2/3, and REC TMR) you want to activate.

CLOCK/

TIMER

Daily 1 Timer

DAILY 1 ON (Time)

Canceled

Daily 2 Timer

DAILY 2 ON (Time)

Clock setting

(see page 17)

Daily 3 Timer

DAILY 3 ON (Time)

ON (Time) REC TMR

Recording Timer

2 Activate the selected Timer.

SET

1

Ex. When Daily Timer 1 (DAILY 1) is activated

3 Wait until the indication goes off.

32

ChoiceMenu.fm Page 33 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:50 PM

Remote control

, , ,

SHIFT

Setup Menu Icons

The icon for the selected Setup Menu will be highlighted.

Ex.: LANGUAGE Setup Menu is selected.

1 2 3 4

LANGUAGE

MENU LANGUAGE

AUDIO LANGUAGE

SUBTITLE

ON SCREEN LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

Setup Menu Operations

10 keys

SET UP

ENTER

.

Operating Procedure

Remote

ONLY

You can use the Setup Menus only when a disc is selected as the source and its playback is not yet started.

Ex.: Selecting “STILL PICTURE” for “FILE TYPE”:

1

Display the Setup Menu.

SET UP

MENU

LANGUAGE

MENU LANGUAGE

AUDIO LANGUAGE

SUBTITLE

ON SCREEN LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

(at the same time)

2

Select one of the Setup Menus.

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

PICTURE

MONITOR TYPE

PICTURE SOURCE

SCREEN SAVER

FILE TYPE

4:3 LB

AUTO

ON

AUDIO

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

3

Select the item you want to adjust.

PICTURE

MONITOR TYPE

PICTURE SOURCE

SCREEN SAVER

FILE TYPE

4:3 LB

AUTO

ON

AUDIO

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

4

Display the pop-up window.

ENTER PICTURE

MONITOR TYPE

PICTURE SOURCE

SCREEN SAVER

FILE TYPE

4:3 LB

AUTO

ON

STILL PICTURE

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT . USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

5

Select the desired option in the pop-up window.

PICTURE

MONITOR TYPE

PICTURE SOURCE

SCREEN SAVER

FILE TYPE

4:3 LB

AUTO

ON

STILL PICTURE

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT . USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

1 LANGUAGE Setup Menu

2 PICTURE Setup Menu

3 AUDIO Setup Menu

4 OTHERS Setup Menu

33

ChoiceMenu.fm Page 34 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:50 PM

6

Finish the setting.

ENTER

7

Repeat steps 3 to 4 to set other items on the same

Setup Menu.

Repeat steps 2 to 4 to set other items on another Setup

Menu.

SUBTITLE

Some discs have multiple subtitle languages.

Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,

GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see

“Language Code List” on page 43) or “OFF (no subtitle).”

ON SCREEN LANGUAGE

Select one of the languages shown on the TV from—

ENGLISH, SPANISH and CHINESE.

To exit from the Setup Menu

SET UP

MENU

PICTURE Setup Menu

You can select the desired options concerning a picture or monitor screen.

(at the same time)

PICTURE

MONITOR TYPE

PICTURE SOURCE

SCREEN SAVER

FILE TYPE

4:3 LB

AUTO

ON

AUDIO

LANGUAGE Setup Menu

You can select the initial languages for disc playback. You can also select the language shown on the TV screen while operating this System.

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

LANGUAGE

MENU LANGUAGE

AUDIO LANGUAGE

SUBTITLE

ON SCREEN LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

MENU LANGUAGE

Some discs have multiple menu languages.

Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,

GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see

“Language Code List” on page 43).

AUDIO LANGUAGE

Some discs have multiple audio languages.

Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,

GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see

“Language Code List” on page 43).

MONITOR TYPE

Select the monitor type of your TV to play DVD Video recorded with aspect ratio of 16:9.

For the multi-color system TV

When you use a multi-color system TV, you can change the color system of the System automatically by selecting

“MULTI” options for the monitor type. In this case, the color system of the System is changed to match to that of the loaded disc regardless of the VIDEO OUT SELECT setting

(see page 6).

Select one of the following:

16:9 / 16:9 MULTI:

Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 16:9 (wide

TV).

4:3 LB (Letter Box) / 4:3 MULTI LB:

Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3

(conventional TV). While viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars appear on the top and the bottom of the screen.

4:3 PS (Pan Scan) / 4:3 MULTI PS:

Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3. While viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars do not appear; however, the left and right edges of the pictures will not be shown on the screen.

34

ChoiceMenu.fm Page 35 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:50 PM

Ex.: 16:9 Ex.: 4:3 LB Ex: 4:3 PS

AUDIO Setup Menu

You can adjust the sound settings of the System.

AUDIO

DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT

DOWN MIX

D. RANGE COMPRESSION

STREAM/PCM

DOLBY SURROUND

AUTO

PICTURE SOURCE

You can obtain optimal picture quality by selecting an appropriate option—picture source type (either video source or film source).

Select one of the following:

AUTO:

FILM:

Normally select this.

When playing back a disc containing both video and film sources, the System automatically changes the processing to match it to the picture type (film or video source) of the current chapter.

To play a film source disc.

VIDEO: To play a video source disc.

SCREEN SAVER

You can activate or deactivate screen saver while operating the built-in disc player.

Select one of the following:

ON: The pictures on the TV becomes dark when no operation is done for about 5 minutes.

OFF: To cancel the screen saver.

FILE TYPE

If both audio tracks (MP3 or WMA files) and still picture

(JPEG files) are recorded on a disc, you can select which to play.

Select one of the following:

AUDIO: To play MP3/WMA files.

STILL PICTURE: To play JPEG files.

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT

When using the digital output terminal on the rear, set this correctly according to the connected component.

Select one of the following:

PCM ONLY: To connect to a linear PCM digital equipment such as an MD recorder.

DOLBY DIGITAL

/PCM:

To connect to a Dolby Digital decoder or an amplifier with a built-in Dolby

Digital decoder.

STREAM/PCM: To connect to a DTS decoder or an amplifier with a built-in DTS decoder.

• See also “DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals” on page 45.

DOWN MIX

When playing a multi-channel DVD, the System converts the signals into 2 channels.

Downmix setting is effective for the speaker output (and digital audio output if “DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” is set to “PCM ONLY”) from this System.

Select one of the following:

DOLBY

SURROUND:

To connect an amplifier with the Dolby

Pro Logic decoder.

STEREO: To connect a conventional stereo amplifier, receiver, MD player, TV, etc.

35

ChoiceMenu.fm Page 36 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:50 PM

D. RANGE COMPRESSION

You can compress the dynamic range (the difference between the loudest sound and the softest sound) to enjoy a powerful sound even at a low volume level when listening to

Dolby Digital software. This is useful at night.

• The effectiveness varies depends on software.

Select one of the following:

AUTO: To enjoy powerful sounds with full dynamic range.

ON: Best for watching a movie at a low volume level.

ON SCREEN GUIDE

You can activate or deactivate the on-screen guide icons (see page 13).

• When recording the picture on a VCR, select “OFF” to avoid recording the guide icons on your video tape.

Select one of the following:

ON: To activate the on-screen guide icons.

OFF: To cancel the on-screen guide icons.

OTHERS Setup Menu

You can change some other convenient functions.

RESUME

O T H E R S

RESUME

ON SCREEN GUIDE

AV COMPULINK MODE

PARENTAL LOCK

ON

ON

DVD1

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

You can activate or deactivate Resume for disc playback

(see page 13).

Select one of the following:

ON: To activate Resume.

OFF: To cancel Resume.

AV COMPULINK MODE

When connecting the System to a JVC’s TV with the AV

COMPU LINK remote control system, select the proper setting.

Select one of the following:

DVD1: To connect to the VIDEO-3 Input jacks on the

TV.

DVD2:

DVD3:

To connect to the VIDEO-1 Input jacks on the

TV.

To connect to the VIDEO-2 Input jacks on the

TV.

• For details, see “AV COMPU LINK remote control system” on page 6.

PARENTAL LOCK

Select this to enter the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.

See the section that follows.

36

ChoiceMenu.fm Page 37 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:50 PM

Restricting the Review

—Parental Lock

Remote

ONLY

You can restrict playback of DVD Video containing violent scenes and those unsuitable for your family members. Once you have set the rating level, such violent scenes (for which a higher level than you set is assigned) may be skipped or changed to another scene (depending on how the disc is programmed).

To set Parental Lock

Set the rating level—Level 1 (most restrictive) to Level 8

(least restrictive).

1

Display the Setup Menu.

SET UP

MENU

LANGUAGE

MENU LANGUAGE

AUDIO LANGUAGE

SUBTITLE

ON SCREEN LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

5

Select “COUNTRY CODE,” then display the pop-up window.

ENTER

PA R E N TA L L O C K

COUNTRY CODE

SET LEVEL

PASSWORD

EXIT

NC

NE

NF

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

6

Select the country code of your area.

• See “Country/Area Codes List” on page 44 to find your country code.

ENTER

SELECT

ENTER

(at the same time)

2

Select the OTHERS Setup Menus.

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

O T H E R S

RESUME

ON SCREEN GUIDE

AV COMPULINK MODE

PARENTAL LOCK

ON

ON

DVD1

The System automatically enters “SET LEVEL” mode.

7

Make sure “SET LEVEL” is selected, then display the pop-up window.

ENTER

PA R E N TA L L O C K

COUNTRY CODE

SET LEVEL

PASSWORD

EXIT

5

4

3

8

7

8

Set the rating level (NONE, 8 – 1).

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

ENTER

3

Select “PARENTAL LOCK.”

O T H E R S

RESUME

ON SCREEN GUIDE

AV COMPULINK MODE

PARENTAL LOCK

ON

ON

DVD1

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

4

Enter the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.

ENTER

PA R E N TA L L O C K

COUNTRY CODE

SET LEVEL

PASSWORD

EXIT

MY

NONE

_ _ _ _

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

The System automatically enters “PASSWORD” entry mode.

9

Make sure “PASSWORD” is selected, then enter any

4-digit number for your password.

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

REV. MODE

7 8

PROGRESSIVE

0

FM MODE

9

ENTER

10

Finish the setting.

ENTER

37

ChoiceMenu.fm Page 38 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:50 PM

To change the setting

1

Display the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.

• Follow steps 1 to 4 of “To set Parental Lock.”

To release Parental Lock temporarily

When you set a strict rating level, some discs may not be played back at all. When you try to play such a disc, the following screen appears on the TV.

PA R E N TA L L O C K

COUNTRY CODE

SET LEVEL

PASSWORD

EXIT

MY

4

_ _ _ _

PA R E N TA L L O C K

TEMPORARY RELEASE

NOT RELEASE

PASSWORD _ _ _ _

SELECT

ENTER

PASSWORD? ••• PRESS 0 ~ 9 KEYS

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

“PASSWORD” is automatically selected.

• You cannot select any item other than “EXIT” until you enter the correct password.

2

Enter your password.

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

REV. MODE

7 8

PROGRESSIVE

0

FM MODE

9

ENTER

• If you enter a wrong password, “– – – –” appears again.

If you missed three times, “EXIT” is automatically selected. In this case, press ENTER to exit from the

PARENTAL LOCK submenu.

• If you forget your password, enter “8888.”

3

Change the settings.

• Follow steps 5 to 8 of “To set Parental Lock.”

4

Enter your password again (after selecting

“PASSWORD” manually if necessary).

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

REV. MODE

7 8

PROGRESSIVE

0

FM MODE

9

ENTER

• If you want to change a password, enter a new four digit number in this step.

SELECT

ENTER

USE 5∞ TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM.

1

Select “TEMPORARY RELEASE,” then ENTER.

“PASSWORD” is automatically selected.

ENTER

• If you do not play back such a disc, select “NOT

RELEASE,” then ENTER. Then eject the disc.

2

Enter your password.

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

REV. MODE

7 8

PROGRESSIVE

0

FM MODE

9

ENTER

• If you enter a wrong password three times, “NOT

RELEASE” is automatically selected. In this case, press

ENTER. Then eject the disc.

38

AdditonalInfo.fm Page 39 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:49 PM

Additional Information

Learning More about This System

Getting Started

(see pages 3 to 6)

Changing the Scanning Mode

• To enjoy the progressive video picture, connect a TV with the progressive video input using component video cord.

Before Operating the System

(see pages 7 to 9)

Playable Disc Types:

• If you play back an NTSC disc with this setting set to “PAL,” you can watch the playback pictures (the disc will be reproduced using “PAL 60” format), but the TV screen may roll over upward and downward rapidly.

• If you play back a PAL disc with this setting set to “NTSC,” you can watch the playback pictures, but the following symptoms may occur:

– The items on the disc menu will be blurred, and be shown slightly shifted when highlighted.

– The aspect ratio of the picture may differ from the original aspect ratio.

– The picture movement is not smooth.

Daily Operations—Playback

(see pages 10 to 14)

Listening to the Radio:

• If you store a new station into an occupied preset number, the previously stored station in that number will be erased.

• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure occurs, the preset stations will be erased in a few days. If this happens, preset the stations again.

Playing Back a Tape:

• It is not recommended to use the C-120 or longer tapes. These tapes easily jams in the pinch rollers and the capstans, and may cause characteristic deterioration.

Playing Back a Disc:

• For MP3/WMA playback...

– This System cannot play “packet write” discs.

– MP3/WMA discs are required a longer readout time than regular CDs. (It depends on the complexity of the group/file configuration.)

– Some MP3/WMA files cannot be played back and will be skipped. This result from their recording processes and conditions.

– When making MP3/WMA discs, use ISO 9660 Level 1 or

Level 2 for the disc format.

– This System can play back MP3/WMA files with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).

– It is recommended that you make each MP3 file at a sampling rate of 44.1 kHz and at bit rate of 128 kbps. This

System cannot play back files made at bit rate of less than 64 kbps.

– This System can recognize the total of 1000 tracks and of 99 groups (each group can contain up to 150 tracks). Those exceeding the maximum number cannot be recognized.

– Playback order of MP3/WMA tracks may be different from the one you have intended while recording (see page 40). If a folder does not include MP3/WMA tracks, they are ignored.

• When using an 8 cm disc, place it on the inner circle of the disc tray.

• On some DVD, SVCD, or VCD discs, the actual operations may be different from what is explained in this manual, due to the programming and disc structure; such differences are not a malfunction of this System.

• Some DVD Audio discs prohibit downmixed output. When you play back such a disc, “LR ONLY” appears on the display and the System plays back the left front and right front signals.

• 3D Phonic setting is also applied to the optical digital output signals through the DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT terminal.

• When using Resume on SVCD or VCD with PBC, the playback might start on a position slightly different from where you have stopped.

• You can use Resume only for the DVD/SVCD/VCD except for some discs—depending how the disc is programmed.

Daily Operations—Sound & Other Adjustments

(see pages 15 to 17)

Adjusting the Volume:

• Be sure to turn down the volume before connecting or putting the headphones.

Adjusting the Sound:

• This function also affects the sound through the headphones.

Setting the Clock:

• “0:00” will flash on the display until you set the clock.

• The clock may gain or lose 1 to 2 minutes per month. If this happens, reset the clock.

Unique DVD/VCD Operations

(see pages 18 to 20)

• During slow-motion playback, no sound will be reproduced.

• While zoomed in, the picture may look coarse.

Advanced Disc Operations

(see pages 21 to 23)

Programming the Playing Order—Program Play:

• If you try to program a 100th track, “MEM FULL” appears on the display.

• While programming steps...

Your entry will be ignored if you have tried to program an item number that does not exist on the disc (for example, selecting track 14 on a disc that only has 12 tracks).

Playing at Random—Random Play:

• The 4 button does not work for skipping chapters or tracks, but only work for going back to the beginning of the current chapter or track.

39

AdditonalInfo.fm Page 40 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:49 PM

On-Screen Disc Operations

(see pages 24 to 28)

• For JPEG files playback...

– It is recommended that you record a file at 640 x 480 resolution. (If a file has been recorded at a resolution of more than 640 x 480, it will take a long time to be shown.)

– This System can play only baseline JPEG files. Progressive

JPEG files or lossless JPEG files cannot be played.

Baseline JPEG format: Used for digital cameras, web, etc.

Progressive JPEG format: Used for web.

Lossless JPEG format: An old type and rarely used now.

– This System may not play back JPEG files properly which are recorded by the devices other than digital still camera.

– If progressive or lossless JPEG files are played back, a black screen appears. In this case, stop playback and select a baseline JPEG file. Note that it may take a long time to select another file.

Advanced Tape Operations

(see pages 29 to 30)

Recording on a Tape:

• The recording level is automatically set correctly. Thus, you can adjust the sound you are actually listening to without affecting the recording level.

• There is leader tape which cannot be recorded onto at the start and end of cassette tapes. Thus, when recording CDs or radio broadcasts, wind the leader tape first to ensure that the recording will be made without any music part lost.

• If you start recording with no cassette inserted, “NO TAPE” appears on the display. If a protected tape has been inserted,

“NO REC” appears.

• When using Reverse Mode for recording, start recording in the forward (

3

) direction first; otherwise, recording will stop when only one side (reverse) of the tape is recorded.

• You can also change Reverse Mode setting ( after starting recording.

and

• You cannot open or close the disc tray while recording.

)

Synchronized Disc Recording:

• When the tape reaches its end in the forward direction ( during recording with Reverse Mode set to

3

)

, the last tune will be re-recorded at the beginning of the reverse side.

Timer Operations

(see pages 31 to 32)

• When using an external component—“AUX” for the playback source, set the timer built in the component at the same time.

• Before turning off the power, do not forget to prepare the required materials—a disc or tape for playback and a recordable tape for recording.

• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure occurs, the timer will be canceled. You need to set the clock first, then the timer again.

• Without stopping the recording, you cannot change the source after Recording Timer start recording.

• If you set the Sleep Timer after Daily Timer starts playing the selected source, Daily Timer is canceled.

• If you set the Sleep Timer after Recording Timer starts recording, Recording Timer is canceled, but recording continues until Sleep Timer shuts off the power.

Setup Menu Operations

(see pages 33 to 38)

LANGUAGE:

• When the language you have selected for “MENU

LANGUAGE,” “AUDIO LANGUAGE,” or “SUBTITLE” is not recorded on a disc, the original language is used as the initial language.

PICTURE—MONITOR TYPE:

• Even if “4:3 PS” is selected, the screen size may become 4:3 letter box with some DVD Video discs. This depends on how the discs are recorded.

• When you select “16:9” for a picture whose aspect ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly changes due to the process for converting the picture width.

AUDIO—DOWN MIX:

• This setting is not effective when DTS multi-channel software is played back.

OTHERS—ON SCREEN GUIDE:

• Setup Menus and on-screen bar will be displayed (and recorded) even though this function is set to “OFF.”

Subtitles and the information for zooming in always appear on the display regardless of this setting.

MP3/WMA/JPEG groups/tracks configuration

This System plays back the tracks as follows.

Level 1

ROOT

Level 2

Hierarchy

Level 3 Level 4

01 03 04

02

1

2

3

4

5

6

05

7

8

Level 5

9

10

11

12

01

Group with its play order

1

Track with its play order

40

AdditonalInfo.fm Page 41 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:49 PM

Maintenance

To get the best performance of the System, keep your discs, tapes, and mechanism clean.

Handling discs

• When removing the disc from its case, hold it at the edge while pressing the center hole lightly.

• Do not touch the shiny surface of the disc, or bend the disc.

• Put the disc back in its case after use to prevent warping.

• Be careful not to scratch the surface of the disc.

• Avoid exposure to direct sunlight, temperature extremes, and moisture.

To clean the disc:

Wipe the disc with a soft cloth in a straight line from center to edge.

Cleaning the System

• Stains should be wiped off with a soft cloth. If the System is heavily stained, wipe it with a cloth soaked in water-diluted neutral detergent and wrung well, then wipe clean with a dry cloth.

• Since the System may deteriorate in quality, become damaged or get its paint peeled off, be careful about the following:

– DO NOT wipe it with a hard cloth.

– DO NOT wipe it strongly.

– DO NOT wipe it with thinner or benzine.

– DO NOT apply any volatile substance such as insecticides to it.

• DO NOT allow any rubber or plastic to remain in contact for a long time.

Handling cassette tapes

• If the tape is loose in its cassette, take up the slack by inserting a pencil in one of the reels and rotate it.

– If the tape is loose, it may get stretched, cut, or caught in the cassette.

• Be careful not to touch the tape surface.

• Avoid the following places to store the tape—in dusty places, in direct sunlight or heat, in moist areas, on a TV or speaker, or near a magnet.

To keep the best recording and playback sound quality

• Use a cotton swab moistened with alcohol to clean the heads, capstans, and pinch rollers.

• Use a head demagnetizer (available at electronics and audio shops) to demagnetize the heads (when the System turned off).

41

AdditonalInfo.fm Page 42 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:49 PM

Troubleshooting

If you are having a problem with your System, check this list for a possible solution before calling for service.

General:

Adjustments or settings are suddenly canceled before you finish.

]

There is a time limit. Repeat the procedure again.

Operations are disabled.

]

The built-in microprocessor may malfunction due to external electrical interference.

Unplug the AC power cord and then plug it back in.

Unable to operate the System from the remote control.

]

The path between the remote control and the remote sensor on the System is blocked.

]

The batteries are exhausted.

No sound is heard.

]

Speaker connections are incorrect or loose.

]

Headphones are connected.

No picture appears on the screen.

]

The video cord connections are incorrect or loose.

No picture is displayed on the TV, the picture is blurred, or the picture is divided into two parts.

]

The System is connected to a TV which does not support progressive scanning.

The left and right edges of the picture are missing on the screen.

]

Select “4:3 LB” for “MONITOR TYPE” (see page 34).

Radio Operations:

Hard to listen to broadcasts because of noise.

]

Antennas connections are incorrect or loose.

]

]

The AM loop antenna is too close to the System.

The FM antenna is not properly extended and positioned.

Disc Operations:

The disc does not play.

]

The disc is placed upside down. Place the disc with the label side up.

ID3 Tag on an MP3/WMA disc cannot be shown.

]

There are two types of ID3 Tag—Version 1 and Version 2.

This System can only show ID3 Tag Version 1.

MP3/WMA/JPEG groups and tracks are not played back as you expect.

]

The playing order is determined when the disc was recorded. It depends on the writing application.

MP3/WMA or JPEG tracks are not played back.

]

The inserted disc may include both type of tracks (MP3/

WMA files and JPEG files). In this case, you can only play

] back the files selected by the “FILE TYPE” setting (see page 35).

You have changed the “FILE TYPE” setting after you inserted a disc. In this case, reload the disc.

“NO AUDIO” appears.

]

This System cannot play back illegally produced DVD

Audio discs.

“LR ONLY” appears.

]

Some DVD Audio discs prohibit downmixed output. When you play back such a disc, this System plays back the left front and right front signals only.

The disc sound is discontinuous.

]

The disc is scratched or dirty.

The disc tray does not open or close.

]

The AC power cord is not plugged in.

]

Child Lock is in use (see page 23).

Tape Operations:

The cassette holder cannot be opened.

]

Power supply from the AC power cord has been cut off while the tape was running. Turn on the System.

Recordings:

Impossible to record.

]

Small tabs on the back of the cassette are removed. Cover the holes with adhesive tape.

Timer Operations:

Daily Timer and Recording Timer do not work.

]

The System has been turned on when the on-time comes.

Timer starts working only when the System is turned off.

Daily Timer does not start playback.

]

The disc loaded is a DVD video. Change the disc.

]

Title/group number and chapter/track number are not entered while setting the Daily Timer. Do not skip these steps when you want to play a disc using Daily Timer.

Setup Menu Operations:

No subtitle appears on the display though you have selected the initial subtitle language.

]

Some DVDs are programmed to always display no subtitle initially. If this happens, select the subtitle after starting play

(see page 18).

Audio language is different from the one you have selected as the initial audio language.

]

Some DVDs are programmed to always use the original language initially. If this happens, select the audio language after starting play (see page 19).

42

AdditionlList.fm Page 43 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:49 PM

Language Code List

EL

EO

ET

EU

FA

FI

FJ

FO

BO

BR

CA

CO

CS

CY

DA

DZ

AY

AZ

BA

BE

BG

BH

BI

BN

AA

AB

AF

AM

AR

AS

IK

IN

IS

IW

JI

HR

HU

HY

IA

IE

FY

GA

GD

GL

GN

GU

HA

HI

Tibetan

Breton

Catalan

Corsican

Czech

Welsh

Danish

Bhutani

Greek

Esperanto

Estonian

Basque

Persian

Finnish

Fiji

Faroese

Afar

Abkhazian

Afrikaans

Ameharic

Arabic

Assamese

Aymara

Azerbaijani

Bashkir

Byelorussian

Bulgarian

Bihari

Bislama

Bengali, Bangla

Frisian

Irish

Scots Gaelic

Galician

Guarani

Gujarati

Hausa

Hindi

Croatian

Hungarian

Armenian

Interlingua

Interlingue

Inupiak

Indonesian

Icelandic

Hebrew

Yiddish

Maori

Macedonian

Malayalam

Mongolian

Moldavian

Marathi

Malay (MAY)

Maltese

Burmese

Nauru

Nepali

Dutch

Norwegian

Occitan

(Afan) Oromo

Oriya

Javanese

Georgian

Kazakh

Greenlandic

Cambodian

Kannada

Korean (KOR)

Kashmiri

Kurdish

Kirghiz

Latin

Lingala

Laothian

Lithuanian

Latvian, Lettish

Malagasy

Panjabi

Polish

Pashto, Pushto

Portuguese

Quechua

Rhaeto-Romance

Kirundi

Rumanian

Russian

Kinyarwanda

Sanskrit

Sindhi

Sangho

Serbo-Croatian

Singhalese

Slovak

MY

NA

NE

NL

NO

OC

OM

OR

MI

MK

ML

MN

MO

MR

MS

MT

KU

KY

LA

LN

LO

LT

LV

MG

JW

KA

KK

KL

KM

KN

KO

KS

SA

SD

SG

SH

SI

SK

RM

RN

RO

RU

RW

PA

PL

PS

PT

QU

Turkmen

Tagalog

Setswana

Tonga

Turkish

Tsonga

Tatar

Twi

Ukrainian

Urdu

Uzbek

Vietnamese

Volapuk

Wolof

Xhosa

Yoruba

Zulu

Slovenian

Samoan

Shona

Somali

Albanian

Serbian

Siswati

Sesotho

Sundanese

Swedish

Swahili

Tamil

Telugu

Tajik

Thai

Tigrinya

UK

UR

UZ

VI

VO

WO

XH

YO

ZU

TK

TL

TN

TO

TR

TS

TT

TW

SU

SV

SW

TA

TE

TG

TH

TI

SL

SM

SN

SO

SQ

SR

SS

ST

43

AdditionlList.fm Page 44 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:49 PM

Country/Area Codes List

AZ

BA

BB

BD

BE

BF

AD

AE

AF

AG

AI

AL

AM

AN

AO

Andorra

United Arab Emirates

Afghanistan

Antigua and Barbuda

Anguilla

Albania

AQ

AR

AS

Armenia

Netherlands Antilles

Angola

Antarctica

Argentina

American Samoa

AT

AU

Austria

Australia

AW Aruba

Azerbaijan

Bosnia and Herzegovina

Barbados

Bangladesh

Belgium

Burkina Faso

BG

BH

BI

Bulgaria

Bahrain

Burundi

BJ Benin

BM Bermuda

BN Brunei Darussalam

BO

BR

BS

Bolivia

Brazil

Bahamas

BT

BV

Bhutan

Bouvet Island

BW Botswana

BY

BZ

CA

Belarus

Belize

Canada

CC

CF

Cocos (Keeling) Islands

Central African Republic

CG Congo

CH Switzerland

CI Côte d’Ivoire

CK Cook Islands

CL Chile

CM Cameroon

CN China

CO Colombia

CR Costa Rica

CU Cuba

CV

CX

CY

Cape Verde

Christmas Island

Cyprus

CZ

DE

DJ

Czech Republic

Germany

Djibouti

44

EG

EH

ER

ES

ET

FI

DK Denmark

DM Dominica

DO Dominican Republic

DZ

EC

EE

Algeria

Ecuador

Estonia

Egypt

Western Sahara

Eritrea

Spain

Ethiopia

Finland

FJ

FK

Fiji

Falkland Islands (Malvinas)

FM Micronesia (Federated States of)

FO Faroe Islands

FR

FX

France

France, Metropolitan

GA Gabon

GB United Kingdom

GD Grenada

GE Georgia

GF French Guiana

GH Ghana

GI Gibraltar

GL Greenland

GM Gambia

GN Guinea

GP Guadeloupe

GQ Equatorial Guinea

GR Greece

GS

GT

South Georgia and the South

Sandwich

Guatemala

GU Guam

GW Guinea-Bissau

GY Guyana

HK Hong Kong

HM Heard Island and McDonald

Islands

IL

IN

IO

IQ

IR

IS

IT

JM

HN Honduras

HR Croatia

HT Haiti

HU Hungary

ID Indonesia

IE Ireland

Israel

India

British Indian Ocean Territory

Iraq

Iran (Islamic Republic of)

Iceland

Italy

Jamaica

JO

JP

Jordan

Japan

KE Kenya

KG Kyrgyzstan

KH Cambodia

KI Kiribati

KM Comoros

KN Saint Kitts and Nevis

KP Korea, Democratic People’s

Republic of

KR Korea, Republic of

KW Kuwait

KY Cayman Islands

KZ Kazakhstan

LA Lao People’s Democratic

Republic

LB

LC

Lebanon

Saint Lucia

LI Liechtenstein

LK Sri Lanka

LR Liberia

LS

LT

LU

Lesotho

Lithuania

Luxembourg

LV

LY

Latvia

Libyan Arab Jamahiriya

MA Morocco

MC Monaco

MD Moldova, Republic of

MG Madagascar

MH Marshall Islands

ML Mali

MM Myanmar

MN Mongolia

MO Macau

MP Northern Mariana Islands

MQ Martinique

MR Mauritania

MS Montserrat

MT Malta

MU Mauritius

MV Maldives

MW Malawi

MX Mexico

MY Malaysia

MZ Mozambique

NA Namibia

NC New Caledonia

NE Niger

NF Norfolk Island

NG Nigeria

NI Nicaragua

NL Netherlands

NO Norway

AdditionlList.fm Page 45 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:49 PM

PE

PF

PG

PH

PK

PL

NP Nepal

NR Nauru

NU Niue

NZ New Zealand

OM Oman

PA Panama

Peru

French Polynesia

Papua New Guinea

Philippines

Pakistan

Poland

PM Saint Pierre and Miquelon

PN Pitcairn

PR Puerto Rico

PT Portugal

PW Palau

PY Paraguay

QA Qatar

RE Réunion

RO Romania

RU Russian Federation

RW Rwanda

SA Saudi Arabia

SB

SC

SD

Solomon Islands

Seychelles

Sudan

SE

SG

SH

SI

SJ

SK

Sweden

Singapore

Saint Helena

Slovenia

Svalbard and Jan Mayen

Slovakia

SL Sierra Leone

SM San Marino

SN Senegal

SO

SR

ST

Somalia

Suriname

Sao Tome and Principe

SV

SY

SZ

TC

TD

TF

El Salvador

Syrian Arab Republic

Swaziland

Turks and Caicos Islands

Chad

French Southern Territories

TG

TH

TJ

Togo

Thailand

Tajikistan

TK Tokelau

TM Turkmenistan

TN Tunisia

TO

TP

TR

Tonga

East Timor

Turkey

TT

TV

Trinidad and Tobago

Tuvalu

TW Taiwan

TZ Tanzania, United Republic of

UA Ukraine

UG Uganda

UM United States Minor Outlying

Islands

US United States

UY Uruguay

UZ Uzbekistan

VA Vatican City State (Holy See)

VC Saint Vincent and the Grenadines

VE Venezuela

VG Virgin Islands (British)

VI Virgin Islands (U.S.)

VN Vietnam

VU Vanuatu

WF Wallis and Futuna Islands

WS Samoa

YE Yemen

YT Mayotte

YU Yugoslavia

ZA South Africa

ZM Zambia

ZR Zaire

ZW Zimbabwe

DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals

DIGITAL AUDIO

OUTPUT

Playback disc

DVD Video with 48 kHz, 16/20/24 bit

Linear PCM with 96 kHz, Linear PCM with Dolby Digital with DTS

DVD Audio with 48/96/192 kHz,

16/20/24 bit Linear PCM with 44.1/88.2/176.4 kHz,

16/20/24 bit Linear PCM with Dolby Digital with DTS

SVCD, VCD, CD

CD with DTS

MP3/WMA disc

STREAM/PCM

DTS bitstream

Output Signals

DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM

48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM*

48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

Dolby Digital bitstream 48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

PCM ONLY

Dolby Digital bitstream

DTS bitstream

48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

DTS bitstream 44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

* While playing some DVDs, digital signals may be emitted at 20 bits or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the DVD

OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT terminal if the discs are not copy-protected.

45

Spec&Index.fm Page 46 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:49 PM

Specifications

Amplifier section

Output Power:

Audio Input

Digital output:

40 W (20 W + 20 W) at 4

AUX:

(10% THD)

400 mV/50 k

DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT:

–21 dBm to –15 dBm (660 nm ±30 nm)

Video output:

Color system:

VIDEO (composite):

S-VIDEO: Y (luminance)

C (chrominance, burst)

COMPONENT: (Y)

(P

B

/P

R

)

Speakers/Impedance:

NTSC/PAL selectable

1 V(p-p)/75

1 V(p-p)/75

0.286 V(p-p)/75

1 V(p-p)/75 Ω

0.7 V(p-p)/75

4

– 16

Tuner section

FM tuning range: 87.50 MHz – 108.00 MHz

AM (MW) tuning range:

531 kHz – 1 710 kHz (at 9 kHz intervals)

530 kHz – 1 710 kHz (at 10 kHz intervals)

Tape section

Frequency response:

Wow and flutter:

60 Hz – 14 000 Hz

0.15% (WRMS)

Disc player section

Playable disc: DVD Video/DVD Audio

CD/VCD/SVCD

CD-R/CD-RW (CD/SVCD/VCD/MP3/

WMA/JPEG format)

DVD-R/DVD-RW (Video format)

Dynamic range: 90 dB

Horizontal resolution:

Wow and flutter:

500 lines

Immeasurable

Speakers

Speaker units:

Impedance:

Dimensions (approx.):

Mass (approx.):

Full-range: 10 cm cone x 1

4 Ω

145 mm x 230 mm x 191 mm

(W/H/D)

2.2 kg each

Supplied Accessories

See page 3.

General

Power requirement:AC 110 V/AC 127 V/AC 220 V/

AC 230 V – AC 240 V (adjustable with the voltage selector), 50 Hz/60 Hz

Power consumption: 65 W (at operation)

Dimensions (approx.):

4.1 W (on standby)

170 mm x 230 mm x 311 mm

Mass (approx.):

(W/H/D)

4.8 kg

Parts Index

Refer to the pages to see how to use the buttons and controls.

Remote control

11, 12, 14,

16, 18–21,

26, 37

10, 13, 22, 28

9, 17

14

11, 16–20,

23

Main unit

8

Remote sensor

10, 11

10–13,

22, 28

30

11, 13

20

STANDBY/ON

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

REV. MODE

7

10

8

PROGRESSIVE

0

FM MODE

9

10

SLEEP

A.STANDBY

CLOCK/

TIMER

SET

TOP MENU

SET UP

MENU

ENTER

ON SCREEN CANCEL

RETURN

DVD/CD TAPE

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

PLAY

MODE

GROUP/TITLE SLOW – SLOW +

DISPLAY

3D

PHONIC

BASS/

TREBLE RHYTHM AX

DIMMER

FADE

MUTING

VOLUME

RM-SUXP450U REMOTE CONTROL

STANDBY/ON

3D

PHONIC

RHYTHM AX

DVD/CD TAPE FM/AM AUX

REC DOWN UP

VOLUME

PHONES

10

17

17, 31

14, 20,

25–31, 33

11, 13,

20–23, 28

15

15

10, 15

16

15

12

14

15

10, 11,

15

13, 23

10

46

UX-P450US.book Page 2 Friday, May 21, 2004 11:24 AM

Mains (AC) Line Instruction (not applicable for Europe, U.S.A., Canada,

Australia, and U.K.)

主 (

AC

) 電源線路 ( 不適用于歐洲、美國、加拿大、澳洲及英國型號 )

PUSH OPEN

SE

ER

EV

TO

AU

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

VIDE

SELE

O

CT

PAL

NTSC

Y

P

B

S-VIDEO

P

R

CAUTION for mains (AC) line

BEFORE PLUGGING IN, do check that your mains (AC) line voltage corresponds with the position of the voltage selector switch provided on the outside of this equipment and, if different, reset the voltage selector switch, to prevent from a damage or risk of fire/electric shock.

有關主 ( AC ) 電源線路的重要事項

接插電源以前,務請檢查當地的主 ( AC ) 電

源線路電壓是否和位于本机外面的電壓選擇

開關設定的位置一致。如果不一致,即重新

設定電壓選擇開關使符合當地電壓,以免損

坏机器或引起火災 / 触電的危險。

EN, CS

© 2004 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED

VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED

0504AIMMDWJEM

Cover[UX].fm Page 1 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 11:00 AM

MICRO COMPONENT SYSTEM

UX-P450

—Consists of CA-UXP450 and SP-UXP450

SUPER VIDEO

INSTRUCTIONS

GVT0129-009A

[UX]

Safty[UX].fm Page 1 Thursday, June 3, 2004 3:30 PM

Warnings, Cautions and Others

Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off completely (all lamps and indications go off).

The STANDBY/ON button in any position does not disconnect the mains line.

• When the unit is on standby, the STANDBY/ON lamp lights in red.

• When the unit is turned on, the STANDBY/ON lamp lights in green.

The power can be remote controlled.

G-1

Safty[UX].fm Page 2 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 11:10 AM

CAUTION

To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.:

1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet.

2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.

CAUTION

• Do not block the ventilation openings or holes.

(If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a newspaper or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.)

• Do not place any naked flame sources, such as lighted candles, on the apparatus.

• When discarding batteries, environmental problems must be considered and local rules or laws governing the disposal of these batteries must be followed strictly.

• Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.

G-2

Safty[UX].fm Page 3 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 11:10 AM

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS

1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

2.

CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified service

3.

personnel.

CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam.

4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED INSIDE THE UNIT.

Caution: Proper Ventilation

To avoid risk of electric shock and fire, and to prevent damage, locate the apparatus as follows:

1. Front: No obstructions and open spacing.

2. Sides/Top/Back: No obstructions should be placed in the areas shown by the dimensions below.

3. Bottom: Place on the level surface. Maintain an adequate air path for ventilation by placing on a stand with a height of 10 cm or more.

G-3

SP-UXP450 CA-UXP450 SP-UXP450 CA-UXP450

UX-P450UXTOC.fm Page 1 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:45 AM

Contents

Introduction ..................................................... 2

Precautions ......................................................................2

How to Read This Manual...............................................2

On-Screen Disc Operations .......................... 24

On-screen Bar Information............................................ 24

Operations Using the On-screen Bar ............................. 25

Selecting Browsable Still Pictures................................. 27

Operations on the CONTROL Screen ........................... 27

Getting Started................................................. 3

Step 1: Unpack ................................................................3

Step 2: Prepare the Remote Control ................................3

Step 3: Hook Up ..............................................................4

Setting the Video Output Selector ...................................6

Changing the Scanning Mode .........................................6

Advanced Tape Operations .......................... 29

Recording on a Tape...................................................... 29

Synchronized Disc Recording ....................................... 30

Before Operating the System.......................... 7

Playable Disc Types ........................................................7

Display Indicators............................................................8

Timer Operations .......................................... 31

Setting the Timer ........................................................... 31

Setup Menu Operations ................................ 33

Operating Procedure ...................................................... 33

Restricting the Review—Parental Lock ........................ 37

Daily Operations—Playback ........................ 10

Listening to the Radio ...................................................11

Playing Back a Tape ......................................................12

Playing Back a Disc.......................................................12

Daily Operations—Sound & Other

Adjustments ................................................... 15

Adjusting the Volume....................................................15

Adjusting the Sound ......................................................15

Presetting Automatic DVD Video Sound

Increase Level ............................................................16

Changing the Display Brightness ..................................16

Changing the Picture Tone ............................................16

Setting the Clock ...........................................................17

Turning Off the Power Automatically...........................17

Additional Information................................. 39

Learning More about This System ................................ 39

Maintenance .................................................................. 41

Troubleshooting............................................................. 42

Language Code List....................................................... 43

Country/Area Codes List............................................... 44

DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals ..................... 45

Specifications ................................................................ 46

Parts Index ..................................................................... 46

Unique DVD/VCD Operations ..................... 18

Selecting the View Angle ..............................................18

Selecting the Subtitle Language ....................................18

Selecting the Audio Track .............................................19

Playing Back a Bonus Group ........................................19

Special Effect Playback .................................................20

Advanced Disc Operations............................ 21

Programming the Playing Order—Program Play..........21

Playing at Random—Random Play...............................22

Playing Repeatedly ........................................................23

Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock ........................23

1

Introduction.fm Page 2 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:45 AM

2

Introduction

Precautions

Installation

• Install in a place which is level, dry and neither too hot nor too cold—between 5°C and 35°C.

• Install the System in a location with adequate ventilation to prevent internal heat buildup inside the System.

DO NOT install the System in a location near heat sources, or in a place subject to direct sunlight, excessive dust or vibration.

How to Read This Manual

To make this manual as simple and easy-to-understand as possible, we have adapted the following methods:

• Button and control operations are explained as listed in the table below.

• Some related tips and notes are explained later in the sections “Additional Information” and

“Troubleshooting,” but not in the same section explaining the operations.

If you want to know more about the functions, or if you have a doubt about the functions, go to these sections and you will find the answers.

• Leave sufficient distance between the System and the TV.

• Keep the speakers away from the TV to avoid interference with TV.

Power sources

• When unplugging the System from the wall outlet, always pull on the plug, not the AC power cord.

Indicates that you press the button briefly .

Indicates that you press the button briefly and repeatedly until an option you want is selected.

DO NOT handle the AC power cord with wet hands.

Indicates that you press one of the buttons.

Moisture condensation

Moisture may condense on the lenses inside the System in the following cases:

• After starting to heat the room

• In a damp room

• If the System is brought directly from a cold to a warm place

Should this occur, the System may malfunction. In this case, leave the System turned on for a few hours until the moisture evaporates, unplug the AC power cord, then plug it in again.

Others

• Should any metallic object or liquid fall into the System, unplug the AC power cord and consult your dealer before operating any further.

2 sec.

Indicates that you press and hold the button for specified seconds.

• The number inside the arrow indicates the period of press (in this example, 2 seconds).

• If no number is inside the arrow, press and hold until the entire procedure is complete or until you get a result you want.

Indicates that you turn the control toward the specified direction(s).

DO NOT disassemble the System since there are no user serviceable parts inside.

• If you are not going to operate the System for an extended period of time, unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet.

If anything goes wrong, unplug the AC power cord and consult your dealer.

Remote

ONLY

Main Unit

ONLY

Indicates that this operation is only possible using the remote control.

Indicates that this operation is only possible using the buttons and controls on the main unit.

Introduction.fm Page 3 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:45 AM

Getting Started

Step 1

:Unpack the package and check the accessories.

Step 2

: Prepare the remote control.

Step

1

: Unpack

After unpacking, check to be sure that you have all the following items. The number in parentheses indicates the quantity of each piece supplied.

• FM antenna (1)

• AM loop antenna (1)

• Composite video cord (1)

• Remote control (1)

• Batteries (2)

• AC plug adaptor (1)

If any item is missing, consult your dealer immediately.

Step

2

: Prepare the Remote Control

Insert the batteries into the remote control by matching the polarity (+ and –) correctly.

1

2

Step 3

: Hook up the components such as AM/FM antennas, speakers, etc. (see pages 4 to 6).

3

R6(SUM-3)/AA(15F)

Finally plug the AC power cord.

• If the wall outlet does not match the AC plug, use the supplied AC plug adaptor.

Now you can operate the System.

• DO NOT use an old battery together with a new one.

• DO NOT use different types of batteries together.

• DO NOT expose batteries to heat or flame.

• DO NOT leave the batteries in the battery compartment when you are not going to use the remote control for an extended period of time. Otherwise, the remote control will be damaged from battery leakage.

3

Connection.fm Page 4 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:44 AM

Step

3

: Hook Up

If you need more detailed information, see page 6.

Illustrations of the input/output terminals below are typical examples.

When you connect other components, refer also to their manuals since the terminal names actually printed on the rear may vary.

Turn the power off to all components before connections.

For better FM/AM reception

AM loop antenna

Keep it connected.

Outdoor FM antenna

(not supplied)

Before connecting optical digital cord

Remove the protective cap from the DVD

OPTICAL DIGITAL

OUT terminal.

Vinyl-covered wire (not supplied)

Extend it horizontally.

TV

DECODER

AUX

VCR, etc.

VIDEO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

Y

P

B

P

R

AV

COMPU LINK

Disconnect the supplied FM antenna, and connect to an outdoor FM antenna using a 75

wire with coaxial type connector.

Yellow

Composite video cord (supplied)

OR

S-video cord (not supplied)

OR

Green

Blue

Red

Component video cord (not supplied)

AV COMPU LINK cord (not supplied)

(cord with monaural mini plug)

• For details, see “AV COMPU LINK remote control system” on page 6.

OPTICAL

DIGITAL IN

Optical digital cord (not supplied)

AUDIO OUT

LEFT

RIGHT

White

Red

Audio cord (not supplied)

4

Connection.fm Page 5 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:44 AM

AM loop antenna (supplied)

Turn it until the best reception is obtained.

FM antenna (supplied)

Extend it so that you can obtain the best reception.

Before plugging in the System

Set the correct voltage for your area with the voltage selector on the rear.

Use a screwdriver to rotate the voltage selector so that the voltage marker is pointing at the same voltage as where you are plugging in the unit. (See also the back cover page.)

Voltage marker

PUSH OPEN

O REVERSE

AUT

VIDEO

OUT

SELECT

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

PAL

NTSC

Y

S-VIDEO

P

R

DO NOT plug in before setting the voltage selector and all connection procedures are complete.

To a wall outlet

Plug the AC power cord only after all connections and selector settings on the rear are complete.

5

Connection.fm Page 6 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:44 AM

To connect the AM loop antenna

1 Hold

2 Insert

3 Release

IMPORTANT

The speakers are magnetically shielded to avoid color distortions on TVs. However, if not installed properly, it may cause color distortions. So, pay attention to the following when installing the speakers.

• When placing the speakers near a TV set, turn off the

TV’s main power switch or unplug it before installing the speakers. Then wait at least 30 minutes before turning on the TV’s main power switch again.

Some TVs may still be affected even though you have followed the above. If this happens, move the speakers away from the TV.

• If the AM loop antenna wire or speaker cords are covered with vinyl, remove the vinyl to expose the tip of the antenna by twisting the vinyl.

• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch any other terminals, connecting cords and power cord. Also, keep the antennas away from metallic parts of the System, connecting cords, and the AC power cord. This could cause poor reception.

To connect the speaker cords

Connect the right speaker to the RIGHT terminals, and the left speaker to the LEFT terminals.

AV COMPU LINK remote control system

This system allows you to use JVC’s TV with simple operations; by starting playing back a disc, the TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture.

• To use AV COMPU LINK, you need to connect the

System and the TV by using a cord with monaural miniplugs (not supplied) in addition to the video input/output connection through the COMPONENT jacks, S-VIDEO jack or VIDEO (composite) jack on the rear.

1 Hold

2 Insert

3 Release

• When connecting the speaker cords, match the polarity of the speaker terminals: Red cord to (+) and black cord to (–).

Setting the Video Output Selector

You can select the video output to match it to the color system of your TV.

NTSC: For an NTSC TV.

PAL: For a PAL TV.

VIDEO

OUT

SELECT

PAL

NTSC

• When using a multi-color system

TV, either position will work.

• DO NOT connect more than one speaker to each terminal.

• DO NOT allow the conductor of the speaker cords to be in touch with the metallic parts of the System.

Changing the Scanning Mode

Remote

ONLY

This System supports progressive scanning.

If you connect a progressive TV through the COMPONENT jacks, you can enjoy a high quality picture from the built-in

DVD player by selecting “PROGRE.”

PROGRESSIVE

0

PROGRE

INTER

PROGRE

INTER

(at the same time)

Progressive scanning. For a progressive TV.

Interlaced scanning. For a conventional TV.

6

Connection.fm Page 7 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:44 AM

Before Operating the System

Playable Disc Types

This unit has been designed to play back the following discs:

Disc Type Mark (Logo)

Video

Format

Region

Code*

Number

DVD Video

2 or

ALL

DVD Audio

Video CD

(VCD)

Super Video

CD (SVCD)

DIGITAL VIDEO

SUPER VIDEO

NTSC or

PAL

DVD Video—digital audio formats

The System can play back the following digital audio formats.

• Linear PCM: Uncompressed digital audio, the same format used for CDs and most studio masters.

• Dolby Digital: Compressed digital audio, developed by

Dolby Laboratories, which enables multi-channel encode to create the realistic surround sound.

• DTS (Digital Theater Systems): Compressed digital audio, developed by Digital Theater Systems, Inc., which enables multi-channel like Dolby Digital. As the compression ratio is lower than for Dolby Digital, it provides wider dynamic range and better separation.

When playing a multi-channel encoded DVD, the System properly converts these multi-channel signals into 2 channels, and emits the downmixed sound from the speakers.

• To enjoy the powerful sound of these multi-channel encoded DVDs, connect a proper decoder or an amplifier with a proper built-in decoder to the digital output terminal on the rear.

Audio CD

CD-R

CD-RW

DVD-R

DVD-RW

COMPACT

DIGITAL AUDIO

The System can play back CD-R or CD-RW recorded in the Audio CD, Video CD, SVCD,

MP3, WMA, and JPEG formats.

The System can play back DVD-R or DVD-

RW recorded in the video format.

In addition to the above discs, this System can play back audio data recorded on CD Text, CD-G (CD Graphics), and CD-Extra.

• The following discs cannot be played back:

DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, DVD+R, DVD+RW, CD-I (CD-I

Ready), CD-ROM, Photo CD, etc.

Playing back these discs will generate noise and damage the speakers.

• In this manual, “file” and “track” are interchangeably used for MP3/WMA/JPEG operations.

* Note on Region Code

DVD players and DVDs have their own Region Code numbers.

This System can play back only DVDs recorded with the NTSC or PAL color system whose Region Code numbers including

“2.”

EX.:

If a DVD with the improper Region Code numbers is loaded,

“RGN ERR (Region Code Error)” appears on the display and playback will not start.

• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “MLP Lossless”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

• “DTS” and “DTS2.0

+DIGITAL OUT ” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

• This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by

Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by

Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT ALL HIGH

DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE FULLY

COMPATIBLE WITH THIS PRODUCT AND MAY

CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE

PICTURE. IN CASE OF 525 OR 625 PROGRESSIVE

SCAN PICTURE PROBLEMS, IT IS RECOMMENDED

THAT THE USER SWITCH THE CONNECTION TO

THE ‘STANDARD DEFINITION’ OUTPUT. IF THERE

ARE QUESTIONS REGARDING OUR TV SET

COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS MODEL 525p AND

625p DVD PLAYER, PLEASE CONTACT OUR

CUSTOMER SERVICE CENTER.

7

Connection.fm Page 8 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:44 AM

Display Indicators

The indications on the display teach you a lot of things while you are operating the System.

Before operating the System, be familiar with when and how the indicator illuminates on the display.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8

SLEEP MONO ST MP3 WMA 3DPHONIC REC

123 REC

RANDOM

PRGM ALL BONUS B.S.P.

A.STANDBY

9 p q w e

1 Rhythm Ax indicator

• Lights when Rhythm Ax is activated.

2 Daily Timer indicators

• : lights when Daily Timer stands by or is being preset.

• 1/2/3: lights when a Daily Timer (1, 2, or 3) stands by; flashes while setting or working.

• REC: lights when the Recording Timer stands by; flashes while setting or working.

3 SLEEP indicator

• Lights when the Sleep Timer is activated.

4 FM reception indicators

• MONO: lights while receiving an FM stereo station in monaural.

• ST (stereo): lights while an FM stereo station with sufficient signal strength is tuned in.

5 MP3/WMA indicators

• MP3: lights when an MP3 track is detected.

• WMA: lights when a WMA track is detected.

6 3D PHONIC indicator

• Lights when 3D Phonic is activated.

7 REC indicator

• Lights while recording.

8 Tape operation indicators

2 3

(tape direction):

– Lights to indicate the current tape running direction.

– Flashes slowly during playback and recording.

– Flashes quickly while rewinding a tape.

(reverse mode):

: tape play continues endlessly.

: tape automatically reverses once.

: tape play stops at the end of one side.

9 Disc operation indicators

• RANDOM: lights when Random Play is activated.

• PRGM (program): lights when Program Play is activated.

• (repeat)/ALL:

– ALL : lights when Disc Repeat is activated.

– : lights when any Repeat other than the above is activated.

p BONUS indicator

• Lights when a DVD Audio with a bonus group is detected.

q B.S.P. (Browsable Still Picture) indicator

• Lights when Browsable Still Pictures are detected while playing a DVD Audio.

w Main display

• While listening to radio: Band (or preset number) and station frequency appear.

• While selecting “AUX”: “AUX” appears.

• While playing a tape: “TAPE” appears.

• While playing a disc: See “Indications on the main display while operating a disc” on page 9.

e A(auto). STANDBY indicator

• Lights when Auto Standby is activated.

• Flashes when disc playback stops with Auto Standby activated.

8

Connection.fm Page 9 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:44 AM

Indications on the main display while operating a disc

While playing back a disc:

• DVD Video:

While disc play is stopped:

• DVD Video:

Current chapter no.

Elapsed playing time

• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current title and chapter numbers for a few seconds.

• DVD Audio: • DVD Audio:

Total title no.

Track no.

Current track no.

Elapsed playing time

• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current group and track numbers for a few seconds.

• Audio CD: • Audio CD:

Total group no.

Group no.

Current track no.

Elapsed playing time

• SVCD/VCD:

Total track no.

• SVCD/VCD:

Total playing time

Current track no.

Elapsed playing time *

* “PBC” appears while playing a disc with PBC.

• MP3/WMA:

Total track no.

Total playing time *

* Changes to “PBC” when stopping PBC playback.

• MP3/WMA:

Current track no.

Current track no.

Elapsed playing time

• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current group and track numbers for a few seconds.

• JPEG: • JPEG:

Current group no.

Current group no.

Current file no.

Current group no.

• If Resume is turned “ON” (see page 36), “RESUME” appears when you stop playback.

Current file no.

9

Basic.fm Page 10 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:43 AM

10 keys

ENTER

TOP MENU

2

8

GROUP/TITLE

4 / ¢

SHIFT

1

2

DVD/CD

3

4

VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

Daily Operations

—Playback

1

SET

MENU

, , ,

RETURN

7

1 / ¡

3D PHONIC

3

In this manual, the operation using the remote control is mainly explained; however, you can use the buttons and controls on the main unit if they have the same (or similar) name and marks.

1

Turn on the power.

The STANDBY/ON lamp on the main unit lights in green.

• Without pressing STANDBY/ON , the System turns on by pressing one of the source selecting buttons in the next step.

2

Select the source.

Playback automatically starts if the selected source is ready to start.

• If you press AUX, start playback source on the external component.

3

Adjust the volume.

4

Operate the target source as explained later.

To turn off (stand by) the unit

STANDBY/ON

The STANDBY/ON lamp on the main unit lights in red.

• A small amount of power is always consumed even while on standby.

For private listening

Connect a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack on the main unit. The sound will no longer come out of the speakers. Be sure to turn down the volume before connecting or putting the headphones.

• Disconnecting the headphones will activate the speakers again.

DO NOT turn off (stand by) the System with the volume set to an extremely high level;

Otherwise, the sudden blast of sound can damage your hearing, speakers and/or headphones when you turn on the System or start playback.

10

Basic.fm Page 11 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:43 AM

Listening to the Radio

Main Unit

ONLY

To set the AM tuner interval spacing

Before operating the tuner, it is required to select the appropriate AM space interval used for your area.

1 Select the AM band.

To tune in to a station

While FM or AM is selected...

Remote control: Main unit:

2 sec.

GROUP/TITLE

DOWN

2 sec.

UP

FM AM

2 Turn off the power.

STANDBY/ON

3 Select the appropriate AM space interval for your area.

• You can only use the button and the control on the front panel.

Frequency starts changing on the display.

When a station (frequency) with sufficient signal strength is tuned in, the frequency stops changing.

• When you repeatedly press the button, the frequency changes step by step.

To stop searching manually, press either button.

Remote

ONLY

If the received FM station is hard to listen

FM MODE

9

DOWN

While holding...

UP

While holding...

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY/ON

AM 9KHZ

(9 kHz interval)

AM 10KHZ

(10 kHz interval)

(at the same time)

The MONO indicator lights on the display. Reception will improve though stereo effect is lost—Monaural reception mode.

To restore the stereo effect, press the button again (the

MONO indicator goes off).

Remote

ONLY

To preset the stations

You can preset 30 FM and 15 AM stations.

1

2

Tune in to a station you want to preset.

• You can also store the monaural reception mode for FM preset stations if selected.

Activate the preset number entry mode.

SET

• Finish the following process while the indication on the display is flashing.

To select the band (FM or AM)

FM AM

11

Basic.fm Page 12 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:43 AM

3 Select a preset number for the station you store.

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

REV. MODE

7

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

8

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

FM MODE

9

10 10

Examples:

To select preset number 5, press

5.

To select preset number 15, press +10, then 5.

To select preset number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.

• You can also use the ¡ or 1 buttons.

4

Store the station.

SET

To start: To stop:

To rewind tape:

Before or after play...

GROUP/TITLE

Rewind the tape to the right.

Rewind the tape to the left.

To tune in to a preset station

1 Select the band (FM or AM).

FM

Remote

ONLY

AM

To change the tape running direction

3

(forward play)

2

(reverse play)

To reverse the tape automatically

REV. MODE

7

2 Select a preset number for the station you store.

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

REV. MODE

7

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

8

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

FM MODE

9

• You can also use the

¡

or

1

buttons.

10 10

Playing Back a Tape

To insert a tape

You can play back tapes of types I, II, and IV.

Push Insert Close

With the tape side facing outside

(at the same time)

Tape is played from the forward side to the reverse side. When the reverse side is played back, playback stops.

Tape is automatically reversed, and playback repeats until you stop it.

Tape will not be reversed. When the current side of the tape reaches its end, playback stops.

Playing Back a Disc

IMPORTANT: Before playing a disc, make sure of the following...

• Turn on the TV and select an appropriate input mode on the TV to view the pictures or on-screen displays on the

TV screen.

• For disc playback, you can change the initial setting to your preference. See “Setup Menu Operations” on page 33.

If “ ” appears on the TV screen when you press a button, the disc cannot accept the operation you have tried to do, or data required for that operation is not recorded on the disc.

12

Basic.fm Page 13 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:43 AM

Before operating a disc, be familiar how a disc is recorded.

• DVD Video comprises of “ Titles ” which includes

“ Chapters ,” DVD Audio/MP3/WMA/JPEG comprise of

“ Groups ” which includes “ Tracks ,” and CD/SVCD/VCD comprise of only “ Tracks .”

• For JPEG playback, see “Operations on the CONTROL

Screen” on page 27.

To insert a disc

You can insert a disc while playing another source.

On-screen guide icons

• During DVD Video playback, the following icons may appear on the TV:

At the beginning of a scene containing multiangle views.

At the beginning of a scene containing multiaudio sounds.

At the beginning of a scene containing multisubtitles.

• The following icons will be also shown on the TV to indicate your current operation.

, , , , ,

To close the disc tray, press

0

again.

• If you press DVD/CD

3

, disc tray closes automatically and playback starts (depending on how the disc is programmed internally).

To start: To pause: To stop:

DVD/CD

To select a title/group

While playing...

Remote

ONLY

GROUP/TITLE

To release, press

DVD/CD

3

.

• While playing DVD/SVCD/VCD: This System can store the stop point, and when you start playback again by pressing DVD/CD

3

(even while on standby), it starts from the position where you have stopped—Resume Play.

(“RESUME” appears on the display when you stop playback.)

To stop completely while Resume is activated, press

7 twice. (To cancel Resume, see “RESUME” on page 36.)

• When operating the System, the on-screen guide icon (see the following table) appears on the TV.

To deactivate the on-screen guide icons, see “ON

SCREEN GUIDE” on page 36.

(at the same time)

• Group name appears for MP3/WMA discs.

To select a chapter/track

While playing...

GROUP/TITLE

• First time you press

4

, you can go back to the beginning of the current chapter/track.

Remote

ONLY

To locate a particular portion

While playing a disc except MP3/WMA...

SLOW – SLOW

+ x2 x5 x10 x20 x60 x2 x5 x10 x20

• No sound comes out while searching on DVD Video/

SVCD/VCD.

To return to normal playback, press DVD/CD

3

.

x60

13

Basic.fm Page 14 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:43 AM

Remote

ONLY

To locate an item directly

You can select a title/chapter/track directly and start playback.

• For DVD Video, you can select a title before starting playback , while you can select a chapter after starting playback .

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

REV. MODE

7

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

8

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

FM MODE

9

Examples:

To select number 5, press 5.

To select number 15, press +10, then 5.

To select number 30, press +10,

+10, then 10.

10 10

7

For SVCD/VCD with PBC:

While playing a disc with PBC, “PBC” appears on the display.

When disc menu appears on the TV, select an item on the menu. Playback of the selected item starts.

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

REV. MODE

7

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

8

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

FM MODE

9

Examples:

To select number 5, press 5.

To select number 15, press +10, then 5.

To select number 30, press +10,

+10, then 10.

10 10

To move to the next or previous page of the current menu:

GROUP/TITLE

Moves to the next page.

To use 3D Phonic

While playing...

3D

PHONIC

3D PHONIC ACTION

3D PHONIC OFF

(Canceled)

3D PHONIC

3D PHONIC

DRAMA

THEATER

• The selected mode can only be shown on the TV.

ACTION Suitable for action movies and sports programs.

DRAMA Creates natural and warm sound. Enjoy movies in a relaxed mood.

THEATER Enjoy sound effects like in a major theater.

To play back using the disc menu

7 For DVD Video/DVD Audio:

1 Show the disc menu.

TOP MENU

SET UP

MENU

Remote

ONLY

2 Select an item on the disc menu.

ENTER

Moves to the previous page.

To return to the previous menu:

CANCEL

RETURN

(at the same time)

To cancel PBC

AUDIO

1

SUB TITLE

2

ANGLE

3

ZOOM

4

REV. MODE

7

DVD LEVEL

5

8

VFP

6

FM MODE

9

10 10

Select a track.

Stop playback.

Playback starts with the selected track.

To reactivate PBC, press

7

(twice if Resume is turned

“ON”), then press DVD/CD

3

.

• With some discs, you can also select items by entering the number using the 10 keys.

14

Basic.fm Page 15 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:43 AM

Daily Operations

—Sound & Other Adjustments

Remote control

Adjusting the Volume

You can adjust the volume level from level 0 (VOL MIN) to level 40 (VOL MAX).

Remote control: Main unit:

VOLUME DVD LEVEL

CLOCK/

TIMER

ENTER

VFP

SLEEP

A.STANDBY

SET

, , ,

VOLUME

FADE

MUTING

Remote

ONLY

To drop the volume in a moment

To restore the volume, press again, or adjust the volume level.

BASS/TREBLE

DISPLAY

DIMMER

SHIFT

RHYTHM AX

VOLUME

+/–

FADE

MUTING

Adjusting the Sound

To emphasize rhythm feeling—RHYTHM AX

This function emphasizes bass attack feeling, and also changes the subwoofer level.

RHYTHM AX

RHYTHMAX OFF

(Canceled)

Main unit

RHYTHM AX

VOLUME +/–

To adjust the tone

You can adjust the bass and treble level from –5 to +5.

To adjust the bass

BASS/

TREBLE

BASS TRE

Canceled

VOLUME

To adjust the treble

BASS/

TREBLE

BASS TRE

Canceled

VOLUME

15

Basic.fm Page 16 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:43 AM

Presetting Automatic DVD Video Sound

Increase Level

Remote

ONLY

The DVD Video sound is sometimes recorded at a lower level than for other discs and sources. You can set the increase level for the currently loaded DVD Video, so you do not have to adjust the volume every time you change the source.

DVD LEVEL

5

NORMAL MIDDLE

HIGH

(at the same time)

NORMAL Original recording level.

MIDDLE Output level is increased (less than “HIGH”).

HIGH Output level is increased (more than

“MIDDLE”).

• Once the current DVD is ejected, this setting is canceled and set automatically to “NORMAL.”

Changing the Picture Tone

Remote

ONLY

While showing a playback picture on the TV, you can select the preset picture tone, or adjust it and store your own taste.

To select a preset picture tone

1 While playing, display VFP setting screen.

NORMAL

VFP

GAMMA

BRIGHTNESS

6

CONTRAST

SATURATION

TINT

SHARPNESS

(at the same time) On the TV

0

0

0

0

0

0

2 Select a preset picture tone.

NORMAL

USER2

CINEMA

USER1

Changing the Display Brightness

You can dim the display window.

Remote

ONLY

DIMMER

DIM1

DIM OFF

(Canceled)

DIM2

AUTO DIM

DIM1

DIM2

Dims the display.

Erases the display illumination.

AUTO DIM Erases the display illumination when disc playback starts.*

• The display illuminates when playback stops.

* “AUTO DIM” does not work for CD/MP3/WMA.

NORMAL

CINEMA

Normally select this.

Suitable for a movie source.

USER1/USER2 You can adjust parameters and can store the settings (see below).

To erase the screen, press VFP again while holding SHIFT.

To adjust the picture tone

1 Select “USER1” or “USER2.”

• Follow steps 1 and 2 explained above.

2 Select a parameter you want to adjust.

ENTER

GAMMA Adjust if the neutral color is bright or dark (–3 to +3).

BRIGHTNESS Adjust if the entire picture is bright or dark (–8 to +8).

CONTRAST Adjust if the far and near positions are unnatural (–7 to +7).

SATURATION Adjust if the picture is whitish or blackish (–7 to +7).

TINT Adjust if the human skin color is unnatural (–7 to +7).

SHARPNESS Adjust if the picture is indistinct

(–8 to +8).

16

Basic.fm Page 17 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:43 AM

3 Adjust the parameter.

ENTER

Turning Off the Power

Automatically

Remote

ONLY

To turn off the unit after playback is over—Auto

Standby

4 Repeat steps 2 to 3 to adjust other parameters.

To erase the screen, press VFP again while holding SHIFT.

SLEEP

A.STANDBY

On

Canceled

Setting the Clock

Remote

ONLY

Without setting the built-in clock, you cannot use Daily

Timers, Recording Timer (see page 31) and Sleep Timer.

• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL or CLOCK/TIMER. You can return to the previous step.

1 Activate the clock setting mode.

CLOCK/

TIMER

• If you have already adjusted the clock before, press the button repeatedly until the clock setting mode is selected.

2

Adjust the hour.

SET

(at the same time)

When Auto Standby is in use, the A.STANDBY indicator lights on the display.

When disc play stops, the A.STANDBY indicator starts flashing. If no operation is done for about 3 minutes while the indicator is flashing, the System turns off (stands by) automatically.

• Auto Standby does not work while you are listening to radio (FM/AM) and the external component (AUX).

To turn off the unit after a certain period of time

—Sleep Timer

1 Specify the time (in minutes).

SLEEP

A.STANDBY

10 20 30 60 90 120

Canceled

150

3 Adjust the minute.

SET

2 Wait until the set time goes off.

To check the time remaining until the shut-off time

SLEEP

A.STANDBY

SLEEP

Now the built-in clock starts working.

To check the current clock time during play

DISPLAY

Clock

Source information

• While playing a DVD and MP3/WMA, you cannot check the current clock time (see page 9) .

• If you press the button repeatedly, you can change the shutoff time.

17

UniqueDVD.fm Page 18 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:43 AM

Remote control

SUB TITLE

AUDIO

ZOOM

, , ,

DVD/CD

3

8

SHIFT

Unique DVD/VCD Operations

ANGLE

10 keys

Selecting the View Angle

Remote

ONLY

While playing back a chapter (of DVD Video) containing multi-view angles, you can view the same scene from different angles.

• You can also select the multi-view angles using the onscreen bar (see page 24).

While playing...

ANGLE

3

ENTER

7

SLOW –/+

Ex.:

1/3

1

1/3

1

(at the same time)

2/3

2

2/3

2

3/3

3

3/3

3

Selecting the Subtitle Language

Remote

ONLY

For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter (of DVD

Video) containing subtitles in different languages, you can select the subtitle language to display on the TV.

For SVCD: While playing, you can select the subtitles even if no subtitles are recorded on the disc.

• You can also select the subtitle language using the onscreen bar (see page 24).

While playing a DVD Video...

1

Display the subtitle selection window.

1/3

ENGLISH

SUB TITLE

2

1/3

ENGLISH

(at the same time)

18

UniqueDVD.fm Page 19 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:43 AM

2

Select the subtitle language.

While playing a DVD Video...

Ex.:

1/3

ENGLISH

2/3

FRENCH

3/3

JAPANESE

Ex.:

1/3

ENGLISH

1/3

ENGLISH

2/3

FRENCH

2/3

FRENCH

3/3

JAPANESE

3/3

JAPANESE

1/3

ENGLISH

2/3

FRENCH

3/3

JAPANESE

While playing a DVD Audio...

Ex.:

1/3 2/3

1 2

3/3

3

While playing an SVCD video...

SUB TITLE

2

–/4

OFF

(at the same time)

1/4

1

4/4

4

3/4

3

AUDIO

1

(at the same time)

2/4

2

Selecting the Audio Track

Remote

ONLY

For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter containing audio languages, you can select the language to listen to.

For DVD Audio: While playing back a track containing audio channels, you can select the audio channel to listen to.

For Karaoke SVCD/VCD: When playing back a track, you can select the audio channel to play.

• You can also select the audio track using the on-screen bar

(see page 24).

While playing a Karaoke SVCD or VCD...

AUDIO

1

SVCD

ST1

R2

VCD

ST

ST2

L2

L

(at the same time)

L1

R1

R

ST1/ST2

ST

L1/L2/L

R1/R2/R

To listen to normal stereo (2 channel) playback.

To listen to the left audio channel.

To listen to the right audio channel.

• SVCD can have 4 audio channels. Karaoke SVCD usually uses these 4 channels to record two 2-channel recordings

(ST1/ST2).

Playing Back a Bonus Group

Remote

ONLY

Some DVD Audios have a special group called “bonus group” whose contents are not open to the public.

• To play back a bonus group, you have to enter the specific

“key number” (a kind of password) for the bonus group.

The way of getting the key number depends on the disc.

1

Select the bonus group.

• The bonus group is usually recorded as the last group

(for example, if a disc contains 4 groups including a bonus group, “group 4” is the bonus group).

• For how to select the group, see “To select a title/group” on page 13.

19

UniqueDVD.fm Page 20 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:43 AM

2

Enter the key number.

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

REV. MODE

7 8

PROGRESSIVE

0

FM MODE

9

ENTER

3

Follow the interactive instructions shown on the screen.

To cancel the key number entry, press

7

.

Special Effect Playback

Still picture playback

Remote

ONLY

To start still picture playback:

While playing...

To resume normal playback:

DVD/CD

Frame-by-frame playback

1

2

While playing...

Still picture playback starts.

Advance the still picture frame by frame.

To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD

3

.

Slow-motion playback

1

While playing...

Still picture playback starts.

2

Select slow motion speed.

SLOW – SLOW +

Forward slow motion starts.

Reverse slow motion* starts.

SLOW

+

1/32 1/16 1/8 1/4 1/2

SLOW –

1/32 1/16 1/8 1/4 1/2

*Not available for SVCD/VCD.

To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3 .

To replay the previous scenes

(One-Touch Replay)

• This function is only used while playing DVD Video.

While playing back...

The playback position moves back about 10 seconds before the current position (only within the same title).

Zoom

1

Remote

ONLY

While playing back...

ZOOM

4

(at the same time)

ZOOM

4

ZOOM 1

ZOOM OFF

ZOOM 2

ZOOM 6

ZOOM 3 ZOOM 4

ZOOM 5

2

Move the zoomed-in position.

To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly (while holding

SHIFT) until “ZOOM OFF” appears on the TV.

20

AdvancedDisc.fm Page 21 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:42 AM

Remote control

10 keys

,

DVD/CD

3

8

4

/

¢

SHIFT

Main unit

DVD/CD

3

4 , 7 , ¢

Advanced Disc Operations

Programming the Playing Order—

Program Play

Remote

ONLY

You can arrange the playing order of the chapters or tracks

(up to 99) before you start playback.

1

Before starting playback, activate Program Play.

PLAY

MODE

PROGRAM

Canceled

RANDOM

ENTER

CANCEL

7

PLAY

MODE

REPEAT

REPEAT A-B

PRGM

On the display

PROGRAM

No

1

8

9

6

7

10

2

3

4

5

Group/Title Track/Chapter

USE NUMERIC KEYS TO PROGRAM TRACKS.

USE CANCEL TO DELETE THE PROGRAM.

On the TV

2

Select chapters or tracks you want for Program Play.

• For DVD/MP3/WMA:

1 Select a title or group number.

2

3

Select a chapter or track number.

Repeat the above steps 1 and 2 .

• For SVCD/VCD/CD:

1 Select tracks.

To enter the numbers directly:

AUDIO

1

SUB TITLE

2

ANGLE

3

ZOOM

4

REV. MODE

7

DVD LEVEL

5

8

VFP

6

FM MODE

9

Examples:

To enter number 5, press 5.

To enter number 15, press +10, then 5.

To enter number 30, press +10,

+10, then 10.

10 10

0

21

AdvancedDisc.fm Page 22 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:42 AM

3

Start playback.

DVD/CD

Playback starts in the order you have programmed.

Playing at Random—Random Play

Remote

ONLY

You can play all chapters or tracks at random.

• Random Play cannot be used for some DVDs.

1

Before starting playback, activate Random Play.

PLAY

MODE PROGRAM

Canceled

RANDOM

To skip a step:

GROUP/TITLE

To pause:

To release, press

DVD/CD

3

.

To check the programmed contents

Before or after playback...

In the reverse order.

To stop:

RANDOM

2

Start playback.

DVD/CD

Playback starts in random order.

Random Play ends when the entire disc has been played.

In the programmed order.

• You can also use

4

or

¢

to check the programmed contents.

To modify the program

Before or after playback...

To erase the last step: To erase the entire program:

CANCEL

RETURN

To skip a chapter/ track:

To pause: To stop:

To release, press

DVD/CD

3

.

To exit from Random Play

Before or after playback...

PLAY

MODE PROGRAM

Canceled

RANDOM

To add steps in the program:

Repeat step 2 .

To exit from Program Play

Before or after playback...

PLAY

MODE PROGRAM

Canceled

RANDOM

22

AdvancedDisc.fm Page 23 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:42 AM

Playing Repeatedly

Remote

ONLY

• You can also select the repeat mode using the on-screen bar (see page 25).

Repeat Play

You can repeat playback.

• For DVD Video:

While playing...

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

REP CHAP

*

REP OFF

(Canceled)

REP TTL

• For DVD Audio:

While playing or before playback...

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

REP TRK

*

REP GRP

REP OFF

(Canceled)

• For MP3/WMA:

While playing or before playback...

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

REP TRK

*

REP OFF

(Canceled)

REP GRP

REP ALL

• For CD/SVCD/VCD:

While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD) or before playback...

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

REP TRK

*

REP OFF

(Canceled)

REP ALL

REP CHAP * Repeats the current chapter.

REP TTL Repeats the current title.

REP TRK * Repeats the current track.

REP GRP Repeats the current group.

REP ALL Repeats the disc or program.

*During Program Play and Random Play, “REP STEP” appears instead of these indications, and repeat modes change as follows for all the discs.

REP STEP REP ALL

REP OFF

(Canceled)

A-B Repeat

You can repeat playback of a desired portion by specifying the beginning (point A) and the ending (point B).

• A-B Repeat cannot be used for MP3/WMA and for some

DVDs.

• A-B Repeat can be used within the same title while playing a DVD Video, and within the same track for the other discs.

1

While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), select the start point (A).

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

starts flashing on the display.

• A appears on the TV if the TV is turned on.

(at the same time)

2

Select the end point (B).

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

stops flashing.

TV.

A-B appears on the

• You can search for the end point using the

¡

button.

(at the same time)

To cancel A-B Repeat, press REPEAT A-B again while holding SHIFT.

• A-B Repeat will also be canceled when you stop play or skip the chapter or track.

Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock

Main Unit

ONLY

You can lock the disc tray so that no one can eject the loaded disc.

• This is possible while the System is on standby.

While the disc tray is closed...

(at the same time)

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.

“UNLOCKED” appears on the display.

23

OSDOperation.fm Page 24 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:42 AM

24

On-Screen Disc Operations

Remote control

ZOOM

, , ,

ON SCREEN

DVD/CD

3

8

4

/

¢

SHIFT

On-screen bars

DVD Video

1

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

DVD Audio

1

2 3

CHAP.

TITLE 14

1 /

CHAP

1/3

23

1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

4

2 3

DVD-AUDIO

TIME OFF

SVCD

1

SVCD

TRACK

GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58

1 / 3 PAGE 1 / 3

4

2 3

TITLE 14

/ 1/3

CHAP 23

1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1/3

4

VCD

1

VCD

2

TITLE 14 CHAP 23

1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1/3

3

4

CD

1 2 3

CD TITLE 14 CHAP

1/3

23

1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1/3

4

10 keys

ENTER

CANCEL

7

REPEAT

¡

On-screen Bar Information

You can check the disc information (except for MP3/WMA/

JPEG disc) and use some functions through the on-screen bar.

1 Disc type

2 Playback information

Indication Meanings

Mbps Current transfer rate

(Megabits per second)

TITLE 2 Current title

CHAP 3

GROUP 1

TRACK 14

Current chapter

Current group

Current track

TOTAL 1:25:58 Time indications

3 Operation modes

Indication Meanings

Playback

/

/ Forward/Reverse search

Forward/Reverse slow-motion

Pause

Stop

4 Function icons (on the pull-down menu)

Indication Meanings

TIME

Select to change the time indication.

OFF

CHAP.

TRACK

Select to repeat playback.

Select for time search.

Select for chapter search.

Select for track search.

1/3

1/3

1/3

PAGE 1 / 5

Select to change the audio language or channel (see also page 19).

Select to change subtitle language

(see also page 18).

Select to change the view angle (see also page 18).

Select to change the page.

OSDOperation.fm Page 25 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:42 AM

Operations Using the On-screen Bar

Remote

ONLY

Ex.: Selecting a subtitle (French) for DVD Video

While a disc is selected as the source...

1

Display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.

ON SCREEN

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

TITLE 2 CHAP 3 TIME 0:00:58

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

CHAP.

14

1 / 1/3

23 TOTAL 1:25:58

1 / 1/3 1 1/3

Goes off

2

Select (highlight) the item you want.

For detailed operations of the following functions, see also “Operations Using the On-screen Bar” on the left.

To change the time information

You can change the time information in the on-screen bar and the display window on the main unit.

1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pulldown menu.

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

CHAP.

TITLE 14 CHAP 23

1 / 1/3 1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

2 Make sure TIME is selected (highlighted).

3 Change the time indication.

ENTER

TIME 0:00:58

T.REM 0:35:24

REM 0:11:23

TOTAL 1:01:58

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

CHAP.

TITLE 14 CHAP 23

1 / 1/3 1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

3

Display the pop-up window.

ENTER

TITLE 14

1

CHAP

1/3

23

1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

ENGLISH

4

Select the desired option in the pop-up window.

TITLE 14 CHAP

1 1/3

23

2 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

FRENCH

5

Finish the setting.

ENTER

Pop-up window goes off.

To erase the on-screen bar

ON SCREEN

TIME

REM

TOTAL

T.REM

Elapsed playing time of the current chapter/track.

Remaining time of the current chapter/ track.

Elapsed disc time.

Remaining disc time.

To erase the on-screen bar

ON SCREEN

Repeat Play

• See also page 23.

1 While playing a disc (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.

• Except for DVD Video: Repeat Play can be selected before starting playback.

3 Display the pop-up window.

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

CHAP.

TITLE 14

1 /

CHAP

1/3

23

1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

OFF

25

OSDOperation.fm Page 26 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:42 AM

4 Select the repeat mode you want.

A-B

TITLE

TRACK *

OFF

Repeats a desired portion (see below).

Repeats the current title.

GROUP

ALL

Repeats the current group.

Repeats the disc (except for DVD) or program.

CHAPTER * Repeats the current chapter.

Repeats the current track.

Cancels Repeat Play.

* During Program Play and Random Play, “STEP” appears.

5 Finish the setting.

ENTER

A-B Repeat

• See also page 23.

1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pulldown menu.

3 Display the pop-up window.

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

CHAP.

TITLE 14 CHAP 23 TOTAL 1:25:58

1 / 1/3 1 / 1/3 1 1/3

OFF

Time Search

You can move to a particular point by specifying the elapsed playing time from the beginning.

1 While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.

• Except for DVD: Time Search can be used before starting playback.

2 Select .

3 Display the pop-up window.

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

TITLE 14

CHAP.

TIME _ : _ _ : _ _

1 /

CHAP

1/3

23

1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

4 Enter the time.

You can specify the time in hours/minutes/seconds.

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

REV. MODE

7 8

PROGRESSIVE

0

FM MODE

9

Examples:

To move to a point of 1

(hours): 02 (minutes): 00

(seconds), press 1, 0, 2, 0, then

0.

To move to a point of 54

(minutes): 00 (seconds), press

0, 5, 4, 0, then 0.

• It is always required to enter the hour digit (even “0” hour), but it is not required to enter trailing zeros (the

• last two digits in the examples above).

To correct a misentry, press Cursor < to erase the last entry.

5 Finish the setting.

ENTER

The System starts playing the disc from the selected playing time.

4 Select “A-B.”

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

CHAP.

TITLE 14 CHAP

1 / 1/3

23

1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

A–B

5 Select the start point (A).

ENTER

DVD-VIDEO

A-

8.5Mbps

CHAP.

TITLE 14 CH

1 / 1/3

6 Select the end point (B).

ENTER

A-B Repeat starts. The selected portion plays repeatedly.

• Before pressing ENTER, you can search for the end point using the

¡

button.

To cancel A-B Repeat, repeat steps 1 to 3 , and select “OFF” in step 4 .

Chapter/Track Search

You can search for the chapter (DVD Video) or track (DVD

Audio) number to play.

1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pulldown menu.

2 Select CHAP.

or TRACK .

3 Display the pop-up window.

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

TITLE 14 CHAP 23

CHAP.

CHAPTER _

1 1/3 1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

26

OSDOperation.fm Page 27 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:42 AM

4 Enter the desired chapter/track number.

AUDIO

1

SUB TITLE

2

ANGLE

3

ZOOM

4

REV. MODE

7

DVD LEVEL

5

8

VFP

6

FM MODE

9

PROGRESSIVE

0

Examples:

To select chapter/track 5, press

5.

To select chapter/track 15, press 1, then 5.

To select chapter/track 30, press 3, then 0.

• To correct a misentry, press the 10 keys until the desired number shown in the pop-up window.

5 Finish the setting.

ENTER

The System starts playing the searched chapter or track.

Selecting Browsable Still Pictures

Remote

ONLY

While playing back a track (of DVD Audio) linked to browsable still pictures (BSP), you can select the still picture

(turn the page) to be shown on the TV.

• If a track is linked to browsable still pictures (BSP), they are usually shown in turn automatically during playback.

1 While playing a DVD Audio, display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.

3 Display the pop-up window.

DVD-AUDIO

TIME OFF TRACK

GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58

1 / 3 PAGE 1 / 5

1

4 Select a still picture you want.

DVD-AUDIO

TIME OFF TRACK

GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58

1 / 3 PAGE 3 / 5

3

5 Finish the setting.

ENTER

Operations on t he CONTROL Screen

Remote

ONLY

The CONTROL screen automatically appears on the TV when you load an MP3, WMA, or JPEG disc.

You can search for and play the desired tracks through the

CONTROL screen.

• If both types of files (MP3/WMA files and JPEG files) are recorded on a disc, select the file type to play (see page 35).

CONTROL screen

Ex.: When the MP3 disc is loaded.

1

2

3

4

Group : 2 / 3

Spring

Summer

Fall

Winter

Track Information

Title

Rain

Artist

Album

REPEAT TRACK Time : 00:00:14

Track : 5 / 14 (Total 41)

Cloudy.mp3

Fair.mp3

Fog.mp3

Hail.mp3

Indian summer.mp3

Rain.mp3

Shower.mp3

Snow.mp3

Thunder.mp3

Typhoon.mp3

Wind.mp3

Winter sky.mp3

6

7

8

9

0

-

5

1 Current group number/total group number

2 Current group (in blue)

3 Group list

4 Track information (ID3 Tag Version 1.0: only for

MP3/WMA)

5 Current track (in blue)

6 Repeat Play setting

7 Elapsed playing time of the current track

(only for MP3/WMA)

8 Operation mode icon

9 Current track number/total number of tracks in the current group (total number of tracks on the loaded disc)

0 Highlight (green) bar

Track list

27

OSDOperation.fm Page 28 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:42 AM

To move the highlight (green) bar between group list and track list:

Moves the bar to the track list.

To repeat slide-show for JPEG

While playing or before starting playback...

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

REP GRP REP ALL

REP OFF

(Canceled)

Moves the bar to the group list.

To select a group/track in the list:

Move the highlight bar to a desired item.

• If you move the highlight bar while playing back an MP3/

WMA disc, the selected track starts playback automatically.

REP GRP Repeats the current group.

REP ALL Repeats the disc.

• For Repeat Play of MP3/WMA, see page 23.

To zoom in the still picture

• You cannot zoom in the still picture during slide-show.

1

While playing back a still picture...

• During slide-show, press

8

to display the still picture, then...

To start playback

For MP3/WMA:

ZOOM

4

ENTER

Playback starts with the selected track.

• Pressing DVD/CD 3 also starts playback.

(at the same time)

For JPEG:

ZOOM

4

ZOOM 1

ZOOM OFF

ZOOM 2

ENTER

The selected track (still picture) is displayed until you change it.

2

Move the zoomed-in position.

DVD/CD

Slide-show playback starts.

Each track (still picture) is shown on the screen for about 3 seconds, then changes one after another.

• Once you start playing back a JPEG track, the CONTROL screen goes off.

• To cancel slide-show, and display the current still picture, press

8

.

To skip a track:

GROUP/TITLE

To stop playback:

To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly (while holding

SHIFT) until “ZOOM OFF” appears on the TV.

28

AdvancedTape.fm Page 29 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:41 AM

Remote control

REV. MODE

TAPE

2 3

DVD/CD

3

7

SHIFT

Advanced Tape Operations

IMPORTANT

It may be unlawful to record or play back copyrighted material without the consent of the copyright owner.

Recording on a Tape

You can use type I tapes for recording.

• To play a tape, see page 12.

1

Insert a recordable cassette.

Push Insert Close

FM/AM

AUX

With the tape side facing outside

2

Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode settings on the display.

Reverse mode indicator

Main unit

TAPE

2 3

DVD/CD

3

REC

PUSH OPEN 0

FM/AM

AUX

7

Tape direction indicator

To change the direction

Current source

3

(forward)

2

(reverse)

To change the Reverse mode if necessary

REV. MODE

7

(

(at the same time)

)

To record on both sides.

• When using Reverse Mode, start recording in the forward (

3

) direction.

To record on only one side.

29

AdvancedTape.fm Page 30 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:41 AM

3

Select and start playing the source—“FM,” “AM,”

“DVD/CD,” or “AUX.”

• When recording a disc, you can also use “Synchronized

Disc Recording” (see below).

4

Start recording.

REC

To record Program Play or Random Play

1 Select Program Play (and make a program) or Random

Play, but do not start playback.

2 Press REC to start recording.

• When disc play stops, recording continues. It is required that recording be stopped manually.

To stop recording:

On the main unit

To record only your favorite track

You can specify tracks to be recorded on the tape while listening to a disc (except for DVD Video).

1

Start playing a disc.

DVD/CD

Synchronized Disc Recording

You can start and stop both disc play and tape recording at the same time.

To record the entire disc

1

Load a disc and insert a recordable cassette.

• If the current playing source is not the disc player, press

DVD/CD

3

, then

7

.

2

Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode settings on the display.

• See step 2 of “Recording on a Tape” on page 29.

3

Start recording.

REC

The System automatically creates 4-second blanks between the tunes recorded on the tapes.

2

While a track you want to record on the tape is playing...

REC

On the main unit

The disc player returns to the beginning of that track and the track is recorded on the tape.

After recording the track, the disc player and cassette deck automatically stop.

3

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to record other tracks you want.

• You can exchange the discs if necessary.

To protect your recording

Cassettes have two small tabs on the back to protect from unexpected erasure or re-recording.

To protect your recording, remove these tabs.

On the main unit

• When either disc play* or recording ends, both disc player and the cassette deck stop at the same time.

• If you press REC soon after the recording is stopped, “NO

REC” may appear.

* For DVD Video: When a title is finished playing.

To record a “Live” disc

It will not be desirable to put 4-second blank portions between the tunes recorded on the tape.

To record the entire disc without any interruption recorded, pause the disc play (press DVD/CD

3

, then

8

) before pressing REC.

To re-record on a protected tape, cover the holes with adhesive tape.

30

Timer.fm Page 31 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:41 AM

Remote control

SET

,

Timer Operations

STANDBY/ON

CLOCK/

TIMER

CANCEL

Setting the Timer

Remote

ONLY

Using Daily Timer, you can wake up with your favorite song. On the other hand, with Recording Timer, you can make a tape of a radio broadcast automatically.

• You can store three Daily Timer settings and one

Recording Timer setting; however, you can activate only one of Daily Timers and Recording Timer at the same time.

• To exit from the timer setting, press CLOCK/TIMER as required.

• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL.

You can return to the previous step.

1

Select one of the timer setting modes you want to set—

Daily 1 ON time, Daily 2 ON time, Daily 3 ON time, or

Recording Timer ON time.

CLOCK/

TIMER

Daily 1 Timer

DAILY 1 * ON (Time)

Canceled

Daily 2 Timer

DAILY 2 * ON (Time)

Clock setting

(see page 17)

Daily 3 Timer

DAILY 3 * ON (Time)

ON (Time) REC TMR

Recording Timer

1

Ex. When Daily Timer 1 setting mode is selected

2

Make the timer setting as you want.

Repeat the following operations until you finish setting in the following order—

SET

* Daily Timer initial settings when shipped from the factory

• DAILY 1:ON Time (6:00)/OFF Time (8:00)/

Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)

• DAILY 2:ON Time (12:00)/OFF Time (14:00)/

Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)

• DAILY 3:ON Time (18:00)/OFF Time (20:00)/

Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)

For Daily Timers:

1 Set the hour then the minute for on-time.

2 Set the hour then the minute for off-time.

3 Select the playback source—“TUNER FM,”

“TUNER AM,” “TAPE,” “DISC,” or “AUX.”

1

4 For “TUNER FM” and “TUNER AM”: Select a preset channel.

For “DISC”: Select the title/group number, then the chapter/track number.

31

Timer.fm Page 32 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:41 AM

5 Select the volume level.

• You can select the volume level (“VOL 0” to

“VOL 50” and “VOL – –”).

If you select “VOL – –,” the volume is set to the last level when the unit has been turned off.

Once settings are complete, the Timer setting information appears in sequence.

For Recording Timer:

1 Set the hour then the minute for on-time.

2 Set the hour then the minute for off-time.

3 Select the playback source—“TUNER FM,”

4

“TUNER AM,” or “AUX.”

For “TUNER FM” and “TUNER AM”: Select a preset channel.

Once settings are complete, the Timer setting information appears in sequence.

3

Turn off the unit (on standby) if you have set the timer with the System turned on.

STANDBY/ON

How Recording Timer actually works

When Recording Timer has been set, Timer ( ) indicator and the REC indicator are lit on the display.

Recording Timer works only once.

When the on-time comes

The System turns on, tunes in to the specified station or changes the source to “AUX”, sets the volume level to the preset level, and starts recording.

When the off-time comes

The System stops recording, and turns off (stands by).

• The timer setting remains in memory until you change it.

To turn off the Timer after its setting is done

Since Daily Timer is activated at the same time everyday, you may need to cancel it on some particular days.

• Recording Timer can also be canceled temporarily.

1 Select the Timer you want to cancel.

CLOCK/

TIMER

Daily 1 Timer

DAILY 1 * ON (Time)

Daily 2 Timer

DAILY 2 * ON (Time)

Daily 3 Timer

DAILY 3 * ON (Time)

Canceled Clock setting

(see page 17)

ON (Time) REC TMR

Recording Timer

How Daily Timer actually works

Once the Daily Timer has been set, the timer ( ) indicator and timer number indicator (1/2/3) are lit on the display. Daily Timer is activated at the same time everyday until the timer is turned off manually (see the next column) or another timer is activated.

When the on-time comes

The System turns on, starts playing the specified source

(except “AUX”), and sets the volume level to the preset level.

• While Daily Timer is working, the timer ( ) indicator and timer number indicator (1/2/3) flash on the display.

When the off-time comes

The System stops playback, and turns off (stands by) automatically.

• The timer setting remains in memory until you change it.

1

2 Turn off the selected Timer.

Ex.To cancel Daily

Timer 1

CANCEL

RETURN

To turn on the Timer

1 Select the Timer (DAILY 1/2/3, and REC TMR) you want to activate.

CLOCK/

TIMER

Daily 1 Timer

DAILY 1 ON (Time)

Canceled

Daily 2 Timer

DAILY 2 ON (Time)

Clock setting

(see page 17)

Daily 3 Timer

DAILY 3 ON (Time)

ON (Time) REC TMR

Recording Timer

2 Activate the selected Timer.

SET

1

Ex. When Daily Timer 1 (DAILY 1) is activated

3 Wait until the indication goes off.

32

ChoiceMenu.fm Page 33 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:40 AM

Remote control

, , ,

SHIFT

Setup Menu Icons

The icon for the selected Setup Menu will be highlighted.

Ex.: LANGUAGE Setup Menu is selected.

1 2 3 4

LANGUAGE

MENU LANGUAGE

AUDIO LANGUAGE

SUBTITLE

ON SCREEN LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

Setup Menu Operations

10 keys

SET UP

ENTER

.

Operating Procedure

Remote

ONLY

You can use the Setup Menus only when a disc is selected as the source and its playback is not yet started.

Ex.: Selecting “STILL PICTURE” for “FILE TYPE”:

1

Display the Setup Menu.

SET UP

MENU

LANGUAGE

MENU LANGUAGE

AUDIO LANGUAGE

SUBTITLE

ON SCREEN LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

(at the same time)

2

Select one of the Setup Menus.

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

PICTURE

MONITOR TYPE

PICTURE SOURCE

SCREEN SAVER

FILE TYPE

4:3 LB

AUTO

ON

AUDIO

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

3

Select the item you want to adjust.

PICTURE

MONITOR TYPE

PICTURE SOURCE

SCREEN SAVER

FILE TYPE

4:3 LB

AUTO

ON

AUDIO

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

4

Display the pop-up window.

ENTER PICTURE

MONITOR TYPE

PICTURE SOURCE

SCREEN SAVER

FILE TYPE

4:3 LB

AUTO

ON

STILL PICTURE

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT . USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

5

Select the desired option in the pop-up window.

PICTURE

MONITOR TYPE

PICTURE SOURCE

SCREEN SAVER

FILE TYPE

4:3 LB

AUTO

ON

STILL PICTURE

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT . USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

1 LANGUAGE Setup Menu

2 PICTURE Setup Menu

3 AUDIO Setup Menu

4 OTHERS Setup Menu

33

ChoiceMenu.fm Page 34 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:40 AM

6

Finish the setting.

ENTER

7

Repeat steps 3 to 4 to set other items on the same

Setup Menu.

Repeat steps 2 to 4 to set other items on another Setup

Menu.

SUBTITLE

Some discs have multiple subtitle languages.

Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,

GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see

“Language Code List” on page 43) or “OFF (no subtitle).”

ON SCREEN LANGUAGE

Select one of the languages shown on the TV from—

ENGLISH, SPANISH and CHINESE.

To exit from the Setup Menu

SET UP

MENU

PICTURE Setup Menu

You can select the desired options concerning a picture or monitor screen.

(at the same time)

PICTURE

MONITOR TYPE

PICTURE SOURCE

SCREEN SAVER

FILE TYPE

4:3 LB

AUTO

ON

AUDIO

LANGUAGE Setup Menu

You can select the initial languages for disc playback. You can also select the language shown on the TV screen while operating this System.

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

LANGUAGE

MENU LANGUAGE

AUDIO LANGUAGE

SUBTITLE

ON SCREEN LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

MENU LANGUAGE

Some discs have multiple menu languages.

Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,

GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see

“Language Code List” on page 43).

AUDIO LANGUAGE

Some discs have multiple audio languages.

Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,

GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see

“Language Code List” on page 43).

MONITOR TYPE

Select the monitor type of your TV to play DVD Video recorded with aspect ratio of 16:9.

For the multi-color system TV

When you use a multi-color system TV, you can change the color system of the System automatically by selecting

“MULTI” options for the monitor type. In this case, the color system of the System is changed to match to that of the loaded disc regardless of the VIDEO OUT SELECT setting

(see page 6).

Select one of the following:

16:9 / 16:9 MULTI:

Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 16:9 (wide

TV).

4:3 LB (Letter Box) / 4:3 MULTI LB:

Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3

(conventional TV). While viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars appear on the top and the bottom of the screen.

4:3 PS (Pan Scan) / 4:3 MULTI PS:

Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3. While viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars do not appear; however, the left and right edges of the pictures will not be shown on the screen.

34

ChoiceMenu.fm Page 35 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:40 AM

Ex.: 16:9 Ex.: 4:3 LB Ex: 4:3 PS

AUDIO Setup Menu

You can adjust the sound settings of the System.

AUDIO

DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT

DOWN MIX

D. RANGE COMPRESSION

STREAM/PCM

DOLBY SURROUND

AUTO

PICTURE SOURCE

You can obtain optimal picture quality by selecting an appropriate option—picture source type (either video source or film source).

Select one of the following:

AUTO:

FILM:

Normally select this.

When playing back a disc containing both video and film sources, the System automatically changes the processing to match it to the picture type (film or video source) of the current chapter.

To play a film source disc.

VIDEO: To play a video source disc.

SCREEN SAVER

You can activate or deactivate screen saver while operating the built-in disc player.

Select one of the following:

ON: The pictures on the TV becomes dark when no operation is done for about 5 minutes.

OFF: To cancel the screen saver.

FILE TYPE

If both audio tracks (MP3 or WMA files) and still picture

(JPEG files) are recorded on a disc, you can select which to play.

Select one of the following:

AUDIO: To play MP3/WMA files.

STILL PICTURE: To play JPEG files.

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT

When using the digital output terminal on the rear, set this correctly according to the connected component.

Select one of the following:

PCM ONLY: To connect to a linear PCM digital equipment such as an MD recorder.

DOLBY DIGITAL

/PCM:

To connect to a Dolby Digital decoder or an amplifier with a built-in Dolby

Digital decoder.

STREAM/PCM: To connect to a DTS decoder or an amplifier with a built-in DTS decoder.

• See also “DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals” on page 45.

DOWN MIX

When playing a multi-channel DVD, the System converts the signals into 2 channels.

Downmix setting is effective for the speaker output (and digital audio output if “DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” is set to “PCM ONLY”) from this System.

Select one of the following:

DOLBY

SURROUND:

To connect an amplifier with the Dolby

Pro Logic decoder.

STEREO: To connect a conventional stereo amplifier, receiver, MD player, TV, etc.

35

ChoiceMenu.fm Page 36 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:40 AM

D. RANGE COMPRESSION

You can compress the dynamic range (the difference between the loudest sound and the softest sound) to enjoy a powerful sound even at a low volume level when listening to

Dolby Digital software. This is useful at night.

• The effectiveness varies depends on software.

Select one of the following:

AUTO: To enjoy powerful sounds with full dynamic range.

ON: Best for watching a movie at a low volume level.

ON SCREEN GUIDE

You can activate or deactivate the on-screen guide icons (see page 13).

• When recording the picture on a VCR, select “OFF” to avoid recording the guide icons on your video tape.

Select one of the following:

ON: To activate the on-screen guide icons.

OFF: To cancel the on-screen guide icons.

OTHERS Setup Menu

You can change some other convenient functions.

RESUME

O T H E R S

RESUME

ON SCREEN GUIDE

AV COMPULINK MODE

PARENTAL LOCK

ON

ON

DVD1

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

You can activate or deactivate Resume for disc playback

(see page 13).

Select one of the following:

ON: To activate Resume.

OFF: To cancel Resume.

AV COMPULINK MODE

When connecting the System to a JVC’s TV with the AV

COMPU LINK remote control system, select the proper setting.

Select one of the following:

DVD1: To connect to the VIDEO-3 Input jacks on the

TV.

DVD2:

DVD3:

To connect to the VIDEO-1 Input jacks on the

TV.

To connect to the VIDEO-2 Input jacks on the

TV.

• For details, see “AV COMPU LINK remote control system” on page 6.

PARENTAL LOCK

Select this to enter the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.

See the section that follows.

36

ChoiceMenu.fm Page 37 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:40 AM

Restricting the Review

—Parental Lock

Remote

ONLY

You can restrict playback of DVD Video containing violent scenes and those unsuitable for your family members. Once you have set the rating level, such violent scenes (for which a higher level than you set is assigned) may be skipped or changed to another scene (depending on how the disc is programmed).

To set Parental Lock

Set the rating level—Level 1 (most restrictive) to Level 8

(least restrictive).

1

Display the Setup Menu.

SET UP

MENU

LANGUAGE

MENU LANGUAGE

AUDIO LANGUAGE

SUBTITLE

ON SCREEN LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

5

Select “COUNTRY CODE,” then display the pop-up window.

ENTER

PA R E N TA L L O C K

COUNTRY CODE

SET LEVEL

PASSWORD

EXIT

RU

RW

SA

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

6

Select the country code of your area.

• See “Country/Area Codes List” on page 44 to find your country code.

ENTER

SELECT

ENTER

(at the same time)

2

Select the OTHERS Setup Menus.

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

O T H E R S

RESUME

ON SCREEN GUIDE

AV COMPULINK MODE

PARENTAL LOCK

ON

ON

DVD1

The System automatically enters “SET LEVEL” mode.

7

Make sure “SET LEVEL” is selected, then display the pop-up window.

ENTER

PA R E N TA L L O C K

COUNTRY CODE

SET LEVEL

PASSWORD

EXIT

5

4

3

8

7

8

Set the rating level (NONE, 8 – 1).

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

ENTER

3

Select “PARENTAL LOCK.”

O T H E R S

RESUME

ON SCREEN GUIDE

AV COMPULINK MODE

PARENTAL LOCK

ON

ON

DVD1

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

4

Enter the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.

ENTER

PA R E N TA L L O C K

COUNTRY CODE

SET LEVEL

PASSWORD

EXIT

SA

NONE

_ _ _ _

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

The System automatically enters “PASSWORD” entry mode.

9

Make sure “PASSWORD” is selected, then enter any

4-digit number for your password.

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

REV. MODE

7 8

PROGRESSIVE

0

FM MODE

9

ENTER

10

Finish the setting.

ENTER

37

ChoiceMenu.fm Page 38 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:40 AM

To change the setting

1

Display the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.

• Follow steps 1 to 4 of “To set Parental Lock.”

To release Parental Lock temporarily

When you set a strict rating level, some discs may not be played back at all. When you try to play such a disc, the following screen appears on the TV.

PA R E N TA L L O C K

COUNTRY CODE

SET LEVEL

PASSWORD

EXIT

SA

4

_ _ _ _

PA R E N TA L L O C K

TEMPORARY RELEASE

NOT RELEASE

PASSWORD _ _ _ _

SELECT

ENTER

PASSWORD? ••• PRESS 0 ~ 9 KEYS

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

“PASSWORD” is automatically selected.

• You cannot select any item other than “EXIT” until you enter the correct password.

2

Enter your password.

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

REV. MODE

7 8

PROGRESSIVE

0

FM MODE

9

ENTER

• If you enter a wrong password, “– – – –” appears again.

If you missed three times, “EXIT” is automatically selected. In this case, press ENTER to exit from the

PARENTAL LOCK submenu.

• If you forget your password, enter “8888.”

3

Change the settings.

• Follow steps 5 to 8 of “To set Parental Lock.”

4

Enter your password again (after selecting

“PASSWORD” manually if necessary).

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

REV. MODE

7 8

PROGRESSIVE

0

FM MODE

9

ENTER

• If you want to change a password, enter a new four digit number in this step.

SELECT

ENTER

USE 5∞ TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM.

1

Select “TEMPORARY RELEASE,” then ENTER.

“PASSWORD” is automatically selected.

ENTER

• If you do not play back such a disc, select “NOT

RELEASE,” then ENTER. Then eject the disc.

2

Enter your password.

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

REV. MODE

7 8

PROGRESSIVE

0

FM MODE

9

ENTER

• If you enter a wrong password three times, “NOT

RELEASE” is automatically selected. In this case, press

ENTER. Then eject the disc.

38

AdditonalInfo.fm Page 39 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:40 AM

Additional Information

Learning More about This System

Getting Started

(see pages 3 to 6)

Changing the Scanning Mode

• To enjoy the progressive video picture, connect a TV with the progressive video input using component video cord.

Before Operating the System

(see pages 7 to 9)

Playable Disc Types:

• If you play back an NTSC disc with this setting set to “PAL,” you can watch the playback pictures (the disc will be reproduced using “PAL 60” format), but the TV screen may roll over upward and downward rapidly.

• If you play back a PAL disc with this setting set to “NTSC,” you can watch the playback pictures, but the following symptoms may occur:

– The items on the disc menu will be blurred, and be shown slightly shifted when highlighted.

– The aspect ratio of the picture may differ from the original aspect ratio.

– The picture movement is not smooth.

Daily Operations—Playback

(see pages 10 to 14)

Listening to the Radio:

• If you store a new station into an occupied preset number, the previously stored station in that number will be erased.

• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure occurs, the preset stations will be erased in a few days. If this happens, preset the stations again.

Playing Back a Tape:

• It is not recommended to use the C-120 or longer tapes. These tapes easily jams in the pinch rollers and the capstans, and may cause characteristic deterioration.

Playing Back a Disc:

• For MP3/WMA playback...

– This System cannot play “packet write” discs.

– MP3/WMA discs are required a longer readout time than regular CDs. (It depends on the complexity of the group/file configuration.)

– Some MP3/WMA files cannot be played back and will be skipped. This result from their recording processes and conditions.

– When making MP3/WMA discs, use ISO 9660 Level 1 or

Level 2 for the disc format.

– This System can play back MP3/WMA files with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).

– It is recommended that you make each MP3 file at a sampling rate of 44.1 kHz and at bit rate of 128 kbps. This

System cannot play back files made at bit rate of less than 64 kbps.

– This System can recognize the total of 1000 tracks and of 99 groups (each group can contain up to 150 tracks). Those exceeding the maximum number cannot be recognized.

– Playback order of MP3/WMA tracks may be different from the one you have intended while recording (see page 40). If a folder does not include MP3/WMA tracks, they are ignored.

• When using an 8 cm disc, place it on the inner circle of the disc tray.

• On some DVD, SVCD, or VCD discs, the actual operations may be different from what is explained in this manual, due to the programming and disc structure; such differences are not a malfunction of this System.

• Some DVD Audio discs prohibit downmixed output. When you play back such a disc, “LR ONLY” appears on the display and the System plays back the left front and right front signals.

• 3D Phonic setting is also applied to the optical digital output signals through the DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT terminal.

• When using Resume on SVCD or VCD with PBC, the playback might start on a position slightly different from where you have stopped.

• You can use Resume only for the DVD/SVCD/VCD except for some discs—depending how the disc is programmed.

Daily Operations—Sound & Other Adjustments

(see pages 15 to 17)

Adjusting the Volume:

• Be sure to turn down the volume before connecting or putting the headphones.

Adjusting the Sound:

• This function also affects the sound through the headphones.

Setting the Clock:

• “0:00” will flash on the display until you set the clock.

• The clock may gain or lose 1 to 2 minutes per month. If this happens, reset the clock.

Unique DVD/VCD Operations

(see pages 18 to 20)

• During slow-motion playback, no sound will be reproduced.

• While zoomed in, the picture may look coarse.

Advanced Disc Operations

(see pages 21 to 23)

Programming the Playing Order—Program Play:

• If you try to program a 100th track, “MEM FULL” appears on the display.

• While programming steps...

Your entry will be ignored if you have tried to program an item number that does not exist on the disc (for example, selecting track 14 on a disc that only has 12 tracks).

Playing at Random—Random Play:

• The 4 button does not work for skipping chapters or tracks, but only work for going back to the beginning of the current chapter or track.

39

AdditonalInfo.fm Page 40 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:40 AM

On-Screen Disc Operations

(see pages 24 to 28)

• For JPEG files playback...

– It is recommended that you record a file at 640 x 480 resolution. (If a file has been recorded at a resolution of more than 640 x 480, it will take a long time to be shown.)

– This System can play only baseline JPEG files. Progressive

JPEG files or lossless JPEG files cannot be played.

Baseline JPEG format: Used for digital cameras, web, etc.

Progressive JPEG format: Used for web.

Lossless JPEG format: An old type and rarely used now.

– This System may not play back JPEG files properly which are recorded by the devices other than digital still camera.

– If progressive or lossless JPEG files are played back, a black screen appears. In this case, stop playback and select a baseline JPEG file. Note that it may take a long time to select another file.

Advanced Tape Operations

(see pages 29 to 30)

Recording on a Tape:

• The recording level is automatically set correctly. Thus, you can adjust the sound you are actually listening to without affecting the recording level.

• There is leader tape which cannot be recorded onto at the start and end of cassette tapes. Thus, when recording CDs or radio broadcasts, wind the leader tape first to ensure that the recording will be made without any music part lost.

• If you start recording with no cassette inserted, “NO TAPE” appears on the display. If a protected tape has been inserted,

“NO REC” appears.

• When using Reverse Mode for recording, start recording in the forward (

3

) direction first; otherwise, recording will stop when only one side (reverse) of the tape is recorded.

• You can also change Reverse Mode setting ( after starting recording.

and

• You cannot open or close the disc tray while recording.

)

Synchronized Disc Recording:

• When the tape reaches its end in the forward direction ( during recording with Reverse Mode set to

3

)

, the last tune will be re-recorded at the beginning of the reverse side.

Timer Operations

(see pages 31 to 32)

• When using an external component—“AUX” for the playback source, set the timer built in the component at the same time.

• Before turning off the power, do not forget to prepare the required materials—a disc or tape for playback and a recordable tape for recording.

• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure occurs, the timer will be canceled. You need to set the clock first, then the timer again.

• Without stopping the recording, you cannot change the source after Recording Timer start recording.

• If you set the Sleep Timer after Daily Timer starts playing the selected source, Daily Timer is canceled.

• If you set the Sleep Timer after Recording Timer starts recording, Recording Timer is canceled, but recording continues until Sleep Timer shuts off the power.

Setup Menu Operations

(see pages 33 to 38)

LANGUAGE:

• When the language you have selected for “MENU

LANGUAGE,” “AUDIO LANGUAGE,” or “SUBTITLE” is not recorded on a disc, the original language is used as the initial language.

PICTURE—MONITOR TYPE:

• Even if “4:3 PS” is selected, the screen size may become 4:3 letter box with some DVD Video discs. This depends on how the discs are recorded.

• When you select “16:9” for a picture whose aspect ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly changes due to the process for converting the picture width.

AUDIO—DOWN MIX:

• This setting is not effective when DTS multi-channel software is played back.

OTHERS—ON SCREEN GUIDE:

• Setup Menus and on-screen bar will be displayed (and recorded) even though this function is set to “OFF.”

Subtitles and the information for zooming in always appear on the display regardless of this setting.

MP3/WMA/JPEG groups/tracks configuration

This System plays back the tracks as follows.

Level 1

ROOT

Level 2

Hierarchy

Level 3 Level 4

01 03 04

02

1

2

3

4

5

6

05

7

8

Level 5

9

10

11

12

01

Group with its play order

1

Track with its play order

40

AdditonalInfo.fm Page 41 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:40 AM

Maintenance

To get the best performance of the System, keep your discs, tapes, and mechanism clean.

Handling discs

• When removing the disc from its case, hold it at the edge while pressing the center hole lightly.

• Do not touch the shiny surface of the disc, or bend the disc.

• Put the disc back in its case after use to prevent warping.

• Be careful not to scratch the surface of the disc.

• Avoid exposure to direct sunlight, temperature extremes, and moisture.

To clean the disc:

Wipe the disc with a soft cloth in a straight line from center to edge.

Cleaning the System

• Stains should be wiped off with a soft cloth. If the System is heavily stained, wipe it with a cloth soaked in water-diluted neutral detergent and wrung well, then wipe clean with a dry cloth.

• Since the System may deteriorate in quality, become damaged or get its paint peeled off, be careful about the following:

– DO NOT wipe it with a hard cloth.

– DO NOT wipe it strongly.

– DO NOT wipe it with thinner or benzine.

– DO NOT apply any volatile substance such as insecticides to it.

• DO NOT allow any rubber or plastic to remain in contact for a long time.

Handling cassette tapes

• If the tape is loose in its cassette, take up the slack by inserting a pencil in one of the reels and rotate it.

– If the tape is loose, it may get stretched, cut, or caught in the cassette.

• Be careful not to touch the tape surface.

• Avoid the following places to store the tape—in dusty places, in direct sunlight or heat, in moist areas, on a TV or speaker, or near a magnet.

To keep the best recording and playback sound quality

• Use a cotton swab moistened with alcohol to clean the heads, capstans, and pinch rollers.

• Use a head demagnetizer (available at electronics and audio shops) to demagnetize the heads (when the System turned off).

41

AdditonalInfo.fm Page 42 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:40 AM

Troubleshooting

If you are having a problem with your System, check this list for a possible solution before calling for service.

General:

Adjustments or settings are suddenly canceled before you finish.

]

There is a time limit. Repeat the procedure again.

Operations are disabled.

]

The built-in microprocessor may malfunction due to external electrical interference.

Unplug the AC power cord and then plug it back in.

Unable to operate the System from the remote control.

]

The path between the remote control and the remote sensor on the System is blocked.

]

The batteries are exhausted.

No sound is heard.

]

Speaker connections are incorrect or loose.

]

Headphones are connected.

No picture appears on the screen.

]

The video cord connections are incorrect or loose.

No picture is displayed on the TV, the picture is blurred, or the picture is divided into two parts.

]

The System is connected to a TV which does not support progressive scanning.

The left and right edges of the picture are missing on the screen.

]

Select “4:3 LB” for “MONITOR TYPE” (see page 34).

Radio Operations:

Hard to listen to broadcasts because of noise.

]

Antennas connections are incorrect or loose.

]

]

The AM loop antenna is too close to the System.

The FM antenna is not properly extended and positioned.

Disc Operations:

The disc does not play.

]

The disc is placed upside down. Place the disc with the label side up.

ID3 Tag on an MP3/WMA disc cannot be shown.

]

There are two types of ID3 Tag—Version 1 and Version 2.

This System can only show ID3 Tag Version 1.

MP3/WMA/JPEG groups and tracks are not played back as you expect.

]

The playing order is determined when the disc was recorded. It depends on the writing application.

MP3/WMA or JPEG tracks are not played back.

]

The inserted disc may include both type of tracks (MP3/

WMA files and JPEG files). In this case, you can only play

] back the files selected by the “FILE TYPE” setting (see page 35).

You have changed the “FILE TYPE” setting after you inserted a disc. In this case, reload the disc.

“NO AUDIO” appears.

]

This System cannot play back illegally produced DVD

Audio discs.

“LR ONLY” appears.

]

Some DVD Audio discs prohibit downmixed output. When you play back such a disc, this System plays back the left front and right front signals only.

The disc sound is discontinuous.

]

The disc is scratched or dirty.

The disc tray does not open or close.

]

The AC power cord is not plugged in.

]

Child Lock is in use (see page 23).

Tape Operations:

The cassette holder cannot be opened.

]

Power supply from the AC power cord has been cut off while the tape was running. Turn on the System.

Recordings:

Impossible to record.

]

Small tabs on the back of the cassette are removed. Cover the holes with adhesive tape.

Timer Operations:

Daily Timer and Recording Timer do not work.

]

The System has been turned on when the on-time comes.

Timer starts working only when the System is turned off.

Daily Timer does not start playback.

]

The disc loaded is a DVD video. Change the disc.

]

Title/group number and chapter/track number are not entered while setting the Daily Timer. Do not skip these steps when you want to play a disc using Daily Timer.

Setup Menu Operations:

No subtitle appears on the display though you have selected the initial subtitle language.

]

Some DVDs are programmed to always display no subtitle initially. If this happens, select the subtitle after starting play

(see page 18).

Audio language is different from the one you have selected as the initial audio language.

]

Some DVDs are programmed to always use the original language initially. If this happens, select the audio language after starting play (see page 19).

42

AdditionlList.fm Page 43 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:40 AM

Language Code List

EL

EO

ET

EU

FA

FI

FJ

FO

BO

BR

CA

CO

CS

CY

DA

DZ

AY

AZ

BA

BE

BG

BH

BI

BN

AA

AB

AF

AM

AR

AS

IK

IN

IS

IW

JI

HR

HU

HY

IA

IE

FY

GA

GD

GL

GN

GU

HA

HI

Tibetan

Breton

Catalan

Corsican

Czech

Welsh

Danish

Bhutani

Greek

Esperanto

Estonian

Basque

Persian

Finnish

Fiji

Faroese

Afar

Abkhazian

Afrikaans

Ameharic

Arabic

Assamese

Aymara

Azerbaijani

Bashkir

Byelorussian

Bulgarian

Bihari

Bislama

Bengali, Bangla

Frisian

Irish

Scots Gaelic

Galician

Guarani

Gujarati

Hausa

Hindi

Croatian

Hungarian

Armenian

Interlingua

Interlingue

Inupiak

Indonesian

Icelandic

Hebrew

Yiddish

Maori

Macedonian

Malayalam

Mongolian

Moldavian

Marathi

Malay (MAY)

Maltese

Burmese

Nauru

Nepali

Dutch

Norwegian

Occitan

(Afan) Oromo

Oriya

Javanese

Georgian

Kazakh

Greenlandic

Cambodian

Kannada

Korean (KOR)

Kashmiri

Kurdish

Kirghiz

Latin

Lingala

Laothian

Lithuanian

Latvian, Lettish

Malagasy

Panjabi

Polish

Pashto, Pushto

Portuguese

Quechua

Rhaeto-Romance

Kirundi

Rumanian

Russian

Kinyarwanda

Sanskrit

Sindhi

Sangho

Serbo-Croatian

Singhalese

Slovak

MY

NA

NE

NL

NO

OC

OM

OR

MI

MK

ML

MN

MO

MR

MS

MT

KU

KY

LA

LN

LO

LT

LV

MG

JW

KA

KK

KL

KM

KN

KO

KS

SA

SD

SG

SH

SI

SK

RM

RN

RO

RU

RW

PA

PL

PS

PT

QU

Turkmen

Tagalog

Setswana

Tonga

Turkish

Tsonga

Tatar

Twi

Ukrainian

Urdu

Uzbek

Vietnamese

Volapuk

Wolof

Xhosa

Yoruba

Zulu

Slovenian

Samoan

Shona

Somali

Albanian

Serbian

Siswati

Sesotho

Sundanese

Swedish

Swahili

Tamil

Telugu

Tajik

Thai

Tigrinya

UK

UR

UZ

VI

VO

WO

XH

YO

ZU

TK

TL

TN

TO

TR

TS

TT

TW

SU

SV

SW

TA

TE

TG

TH

TI

SL

SM

SN

SO

SQ

SR

SS

ST

43

AdditionlList.fm Page 44 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:40 AM

Country/Area Codes List

AZ

BA

BB

BD

BE

BF

AD

AE

AF

AG

AI

AL

AM

AN

AO

Andorra

United Arab Emirates

Afghanistan

Antigua and Barbuda

Anguilla

Albania

AQ

AR

AS

Armenia

Netherlands Antilles

Angola

Antarctica

Argentina

American Samoa

AT

AU

Austria

Australia

AW Aruba

Azerbaijan

Bosnia and Herzegovina

Barbados

Bangladesh

Belgium

Burkina Faso

BG

BH

BI

Bulgaria

Bahrain

Burundi

BJ Benin

BM Bermuda

BN Brunei Darussalam

BO

BR

BS

Bolivia

Brazil

Bahamas

BT

BV

Bhutan

Bouvet Island

BW Botswana

BY

BZ

CA

Belarus

Belize

Canada

CC

CF

Cocos (Keeling) Islands

Central African Republic

CG Congo

CH Switzerland

CI Côte d’Ivoire

CK Cook Islands

CL Chile

CM Cameroon

CN China

CO Colombia

CR Costa Rica

CU Cuba

CV

CX

CY

Cape Verde

Christmas Island

Cyprus

CZ

DE

DJ

Czech Republic

Germany

Djibouti

44

EG

EH

ER

ES

ET

FI

DK Denmark

DM Dominica

DO Dominican Republic

DZ

EC

EE

Algeria

Ecuador

Estonia

Egypt

Western Sahara

Eritrea

Spain

Ethiopia

Finland

FJ

FK

Fiji

Falkland Islands (Malvinas)

FM Micronesia (Federated States of)

FO Faroe Islands

FR

FX

France

France, Metropolitan

GA Gabon

GB United Kingdom

GD Grenada

GE Georgia

GF French Guiana

GH Ghana

GI Gibraltar

GL Greenland

GM Gambia

GN Guinea

GP Guadeloupe

GQ Equatorial Guinea

GR Greece

GS

GT

South Georgia and the South

Sandwich

Guatemala

GU Guam

GW Guinea-Bissau

GY Guyana

HK Hong Kong

HM Heard Island and McDonald

Islands

IL

IN

IO

IQ

IR

IS

IT

JM

HN Honduras

HR Croatia

HT Haiti

HU Hungary

ID Indonesia

IE Ireland

Israel

India

British Indian Ocean Territory

Iraq

Iran (Islamic Republic of)

Iceland

Italy

Jamaica

JO

JP

Jordan

Japan

KE Kenya

KG Kyrgyzstan

KH Cambodia

KI Kiribati

KM Comoros

KN Saint Kitts and Nevis

KP Korea, Democratic People’s

Republic of

KR Korea, Republic of

KW Kuwait

KY Cayman Islands

KZ Kazakhstan

LA Lao People’s Democratic

Republic

LB

LC

Lebanon

Saint Lucia

LI Liechtenstein

LK Sri Lanka

LR Liberia

LS

LT

LU

Lesotho

Lithuania

Luxembourg

LV

LY

Latvia

Libyan Arab Jamahiriya

MA Morocco

MC Monaco

MD Moldova, Republic of

MG Madagascar

MH Marshall Islands

ML Mali

MM Myanmar

MN Mongolia

MO Macau

MP Northern Mariana Islands

MQ Martinique

MR Mauritania

MS Montserrat

MT Malta

MU Mauritius

MV Maldives

MW Malawi

MX Mexico

MY Malaysia

MZ Mozambique

NA Namibia

NC New Caledonia

NE Niger

NF Norfolk Island

NG Nigeria

NI Nicaragua

NL Netherlands

NO Norway

AdditionlList.fm Page 45 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:40 AM

PE

PF

PG

PH

PK

PL

NP Nepal

NR Nauru

NU Niue

NZ New Zealand

OM Oman

PA Panama

Peru

French Polynesia

Papua New Guinea

Philippines

Pakistan

Poland

PM Saint Pierre and Miquelon

PN Pitcairn

PR Puerto Rico

PT Portugal

PW Palau

PY Paraguay

QA Qatar

RE Réunion

RO Romania

RU Russian Federation

RW Rwanda

SA Saudi Arabia

SB

SC

SD

Solomon Islands

Seychelles

Sudan

SE

SG

SH

SI

SJ

SK

Sweden

Singapore

Saint Helena

Slovenia

Svalbard and Jan Mayen

Slovakia

SL Sierra Leone

SM San Marino

SN Senegal

SO

SR

ST

Somalia

Suriname

Sao Tome and Principe

SV

SY

SZ

TC

TD

TF

El Salvador

Syrian Arab Republic

Swaziland

Turks and Caicos Islands

Chad

French Southern Territories

TG

TH

TJ

Togo

Thailand

Tajikistan

TK Tokelau

TM Turkmenistan

TN Tunisia

TO

TP

TR

Tonga

East Timor

Turkey

TT

TV

Trinidad and Tobago

Tuvalu

TW Taiwan

TZ Tanzania, United Republic of

UA Ukraine

UG Uganda

UM United States Minor Outlying

Islands

US United States

UY Uruguay

UZ Uzbekistan

VA Vatican City State (Holy See)

VC Saint Vincent and the Grenadines

VE Venezuela

VG Virgin Islands (British)

VI Virgin Islands (U.S.)

VN Vietnam

VU Vanuatu

WF Wallis and Futuna Islands

WS Samoa

YE Yemen

YT Mayotte

YU Yugoslavia

ZA South Africa

ZM Zambia

ZR Zaire

ZW Zimbabwe

DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals

DIGITAL AUDIO

OUTPUT

Playback disc

DVD Video with 48 kHz, 16/20/24 bit

Linear PCM with 96 kHz, Linear PCM with Dolby Digital with DTS

DVD Audio with 48/96/192 kHz,

16/20/24 bit Linear PCM with 44.1/88.2/176.4 kHz,

16/20/24 bit Linear PCM with Dolby Digital with DTS

SVCD, VCD, CD

CD with DTS

MP3/WMA disc

STREAM/PCM

DTS bitstream

Output Signals

DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM

48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM*

48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

Dolby Digital bitstream 48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

PCM ONLY

Dolby Digital bitstream

DTS bitstream

48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

DTS bitstream 44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

* While playing some DVDs, digital signals may be emitted at 20 bits or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the DVD

OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT terminal if the discs are not copy-protected.

45

Spec&Index.fm Page 46 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:39 AM

Specifications

Amplifier section

Output Power:

Audio Input

Digital output:

40 W (20 W + 20 W) at 4

AUX:

(10% THD)

400 mV/50 k

DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT:

–21 dBm to –15 dBm (660 nm ±30 nm)

Video output:

Color system:

VIDEO (composite):

S-VIDEO: Y (luminance)

C (chrominance, burst)

COMPONENT: (Y)

(P

B

/P

R

)

Speakers/Impedance:

NTSC/PAL selectable

1 V(p-p)/75

1 V(p-p)/75

0.286 V(p-p)/75

1 V(p-p)/75 Ω

0.7 V(p-p)/75

4

– 16

Tuner section

FM tuning range: 87.50 MHz – 108.00 MHz

AM (MW) tuning range:

531 kHz – 1 602 kHz (at 9 kHz intervals)

530 kHz – 1 600 kHz (at 10 kHz intervals)

Tape section

Frequency response:

Wow and flutter:

60 Hz – 14 000 Hz

0.15% (WRMS)

Disc player section

Playable disc: DVD Video/DVD Audio

CD/VCD/SVCD

CD-R/CD-RW (CD/SVCD/VCD/MP3/

WMA/JPEG format)

DVD-R/DVD-RW (Video format)

Dynamic range: 90 dB

Horizontal resolution:

Wow and flutter:

500 lines

Immeasurable

Speakers

Speaker units:

Impedance:

Dimensions (approx.):

Mass (approx.):

Full-range: 10 cm cone x 1

4 Ω

145 mm x 230 mm x 191 mm

(W/H/D)

1.8 kg each

Supplied Accessories

See page 3.

General

Power requirement:AC 110 V/AC 127 V/AC 220 V/

AC 230 V – AC 240 V (adjustable with the voltage selector), 50 Hz/60 Hz

Power consumption: 65 W (at operation)

Dimensions (approx.):

4.1 W (on standby)

170 mm x 230 mm x 311 mm

Mass (approx.):

(W/H/D)

4.8 kg

Parts Index

Refer to the pages to see how to use the buttons and controls.

Remote control

11, 12, 14,

16, 18–21,

26, 37

10, 13, 22, 28

9, 17

14

11, 16–20,

23

Main unit

8

Remote sensor

10, 11

10–13,

22, 28

30

11, 13

20

STANDBY/ON

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

REV. MODE

7

10

8

PROGRESSIVE

0

FM MODE

9

10

SLEEP

A.STANDBY

CLOCK/

TIMER

SET

TOP MENU

SET UP

MENU

ENTER

ON SCREEN CANCEL

RETURN

DVD/CD TAPE

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

PLAY

MODE

GROUP/TITLE SLOW – SLOW +

DISPLAY

3D

PHONIC

BASS/

TREBLE RHYTHM AX

DIMMER

FADE

MUTING

VOLUME

RM-SUXP450U REMOTE CONTROL

STANDBY/ON

3D

PHONIC

RHYTHM AX

DVD/CD TAPE FM/AM AUX

REC DOWN UP

VOLUME

PHONES

10

17

17, 31

14, 20,

25–31, 33

11, 13,

20–23, 28

15

15

10, 15

16

15

12

14

15

10, 15

13, 23

10

46

Cover[UX].fm Page 2 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 11:00 AM

Mains (AC) Line Instruction (not applicable for Europe, U.S.A., Canada,

Australia, and U.K.)

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

VIDEO

OUT

SELECT

PAL

NTSC

Y

P

B

S-VIDEO

PUSH OPEN

E

RS

VE

RE

TO

AU

CAUTION for mains (AC) line

BEFORE PLUGGING IN, do check that your mains (AC) line voltage corresponds with the position of the voltage selector switch provided on the outside of this equipment and, if different, reset the voltage selector switch, to prevent from a damage or risk of fire/electric shock.

EN, AR, PE

© 2004 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED

VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED

0604AIMMDWJEM

UX-P450UB.book Page 1 Thursday, May 27, 2004 8:19 PM

®

MICRO COMPONENT SYSTEM

微型組合音響

UX-P450

—Consists of CA-UXP450 and SP-UXP450

CA-UXP450

SP-UXP450

組成

SUPER VIDEO

INSTRUCTIONS

使用說明書

GVT0129-013A

[UB]

UX-P450UB.book Page 1 Thursday, May 27, 2004 8:19 PM

Warnings, Cautions and Others/ 警告,注意及其他須知事項

Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off completely

(all lamps and indications go off). The STANDBY/ON button in any position does not disconnect the mains line.

• When the unit is on standby, the STANDBY/ON lamp lights

• in red.

When the unit is turned on, the STANDBY/ON lamp lights in green.

The power can be remote controlled.

CAUTION

To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.:

1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet.

2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.

注意 — STANDBY/ON

無論 STANDBY/ON

開關 !

開關在任何位置,電源線的電源還是

沒 有被切 斷,若要將 電源完 全關閉,應 把電 源插頭 拔离插 座

(所有的燈和信息均熄滅)。

• 當主機正處于備用狀態, STANDBY/ON 燈為紅色。

• 當主機開啟后, STANDBY/ON 燈為綠色。

電源開關可用遙控器控制。

注意

為了減少触電,火災等危險:

1.

切勿擅自卸下螺絲釘,蓋子或機殼。

2.

切勿讓本機受雨淋或置潮濕環境中。

CAUTION

• Do not block the ventilation openings or holes.

(If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a

• newspaper or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.)

Do not place any naked flame sources, such as lighted candles, on the apparatus.

When discarding batteries, environmental problems must be considered and local rules or laws governing the disposal of these batteries must be followed strictly.

Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS

1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

2.

CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified service personnel.

3.

CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam.

4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED

INSIDE THE UNIT.

注意

• 切勿堵塞通風口或通風孔。

( 如果通風口或通風孔被報紙或布等堵塞,熱量將無法散

出。)

• 切勿在本設備上放置任何裸露的火源,如點燃的蜡燭。

• 處理廢棄電池時,必須考慮環境問題 ,并嚴格遵守當地關

于處理廢棄電池的有關法律或規定。

• 切勿將本裝置暴露于雨水所及,潮濕 ,滴水或濺起水花的

地方,亦不要將任何裝滿液体的物件 ( 如花瓶 ) 放置在本

裝置上。

鐳射產品的重要說明

1.

一級鐳射產品。

2.

注意: 切勿打開頂蓋板。本机內部沒有用戶可自行維修的部

件;所有維修工作應由有資格的人員完成。

3.

注意: 當內部鎖定裝置失效或者損坏后,打開蓋板可能會產

生可見或不可見的鐳射輻射。應避免受到鐳射光束的直接照

射。

4.

標簽的復制標示:注意標簽位于機內。

Caution: Proper Ventilation

To avoid risk of electric shock and fire, and to prevent damage, locate the apparatus as follows:

1. Front: No obstructions and open spacing.

2. Sides/ Top/ Back: No obstructions should be placed in the areas shown by the dimensions below.

3. Bottom: Place on the level surface. Maintain an adequate air path for ventilation by placing on a stand with a height of

10 cm or more.

15 cm

15

1 cm

1

15 cm

15

1 cm

1

15 cm

15

注意 : 正确通風

為免發生触電和火警的危險,及防止本機受損,請將本機如下

放置:

1.

前面:沒有障礙物及地方開闊。

2.

側面 / 頂面 / 背面:在圖中所示范圍中,不應放置任何障礙

物。

3.

底部:放置在水平面上。放置在一個高 10 厘米或以上的臺

上,以保証足夠的通風道。

15 cm

15

15 cm

15

SP-UXP450 CA-UXP450 SP-UXP450

10 cm

10

CA-UXP450

G-1

UX-P450UBTOC.fm Page 1 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:27 PM

Contents

Introduction ..................................................... 2

Precautions ......................................................................2

How to Read This Manual...............................................2

On-Screen Disc Operations .......................... 24

On-screen Bar Information............................................ 24

Operations Using the On-screen Bar ............................. 25

Selecting Browsable Still Pictures................................. 27

Operations on the CONTROL Screen ........................... 27

Getting Started................................................. 3

Step 1: Unpack ................................................................3

Step 2: Prepare the Remote Control ................................3

Step 3: Hook Up ..............................................................4

Setting the Video Output Selector ...................................6

Changing the Scanning Mode .........................................6

Advanced Tape Operations .......................... 29

Recording on a Tape...................................................... 29

Synchronized Disc Recording ....................................... 30

Before Operating the System.......................... 7

Playable Disc Types ........................................................7

Display Indicators............................................................8

Timer Operations .......................................... 31

Setting the Timer ........................................................... 31

Setup Menu Operations ................................ 33

Operating Procedure ...................................................... 33

Restricting the Review—Parental Lock ........................ 37

Daily Operations—Playback ........................ 10

Listening to the Radio ...................................................11

Playing Back a Tape ......................................................12

Playing Back a Disc.......................................................12

Daily Operations—Sound & Other

Adjustments ................................................... 15

Adjusting the Volume....................................................15

Adjusting the Sound ......................................................15

Presetting Automatic DVD Video Sound

Increase Level ............................................................16

Changing the Display Brightness ..................................16

Changing the Picture Tone ............................................16

Setting the Clock ...........................................................17

Turning Off the Power Automatically...........................17

Additional Information................................. 39

Learning More about This System ................................ 39

Maintenance .................................................................. 41

Troubleshooting............................................................. 42

Language Code List....................................................... 43

Country/Area Codes List............................................... 44

DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals ..................... 45

Specifications ................................................................ 46

Parts Index ..................................................................... 46

Unique DVD/VCD Operations ..................... 18

Selecting the View Angle ..............................................18

Selecting the Subtitle Language ....................................18

Selecting the Audio Track .............................................19

Playing Back a Bonus Group ........................................19

Special Effect Playback .................................................20

Advanced Disc Operations............................ 21

Programming the Playing Order—Program Play..........21

Playing at Random—Random Play...............................22

Playing Repeatedly ........................................................23

Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock ........................23

1

Introduction.fm Page 2 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:28 PM

2

Introduction

Precautions

Installation

• Install in a place which is level, dry and neither too hot nor too cold—between 5°C and 35°C.

• Install the System in a location with adequate ventilation to prevent internal heat buildup inside the System.

DO NOT install the System in a location near heat sources, or in a place subject to direct sunlight, excessive dust or vibration.

How to Read This Manual

To make this manual as simple and easy-to-understand as possible, we have adapted the following methods:

• Button and control operations are explained as listed in the table below.

• Some related tips and notes are explained later in the sections “Additional Information” and

“Troubleshooting,” but not in the same section explaining the operations.

If you want to know more about the functions, or if you have a doubt about the functions, go to these sections and you will find the answers.

• Leave sufficient distance between the System and the TV.

• Keep the speakers away from the TV to avoid interference with TV.

Power sources

• When unplugging the System from the wall outlet, always pull on the plug, not the AC power cord.

Indicates that you press the button briefly .

Indicates that you press the button briefly and repeatedly until an option you want is selected.

DO NOT handle the AC power cord with wet hands.

Indicates that you press one of the buttons.

Moisture condensation

Moisture may condense on the lenses inside the System in the following cases:

• After starting to heat the room

• In a damp room

• If the System is brought directly from a cold to a warm place

Should this occur, the System may malfunction. In this case, leave the System turned on for a few hours until the moisture evaporates, unplug the AC power cord, then plug it in again.

Others

• Should any metallic object or liquid fall into the System, unplug the AC power cord and consult your dealer before operating any further.

2 sec.

Indicates that you press and hold the button for specified seconds.

• The number inside the arrow indicates the period of press (in this example, 2 seconds).

• If no number is inside the arrow, press and hold until the entire procedure is complete or until you get a result you want.

Indicates that you turn the control toward the specified direction(s).

DO NOT disassemble the System since there are no user serviceable parts inside.

• If you are not going to operate the System for an extended period of time, unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet.

If anything goes wrong, unplug the AC power cord and consult your dealer.

Remote

ONLY

Main Unit

ONLY

Indicates that this operation is only possible using the remote control.

Indicates that this operation is only possible using the buttons and controls on the main unit.

Introduction.fm Page 3 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:28 PM

Getting Started

Step 1

:Unpack the package and check the accessories.

Step

1

: Unpack

After unpacking, check to be sure that you have all the following items. The number in parentheses indicates the quantity of each piece supplied.

• FM antenna (1)

• AM loop antenna (1)

• Composite video cord (1)

• Remote control (1)

• Batteries (2))

If any item is missing, consult your dealer immediately.

Step

2

: Prepare the Remote Control

Insert the batteries into the remote control by matching the polarity (+ and –) correctly.

1

Step 2

: Prepare the remote control.

2

Step 3

: Hook up the components such as AM/FM antennas, speakers, etc. (see pages 4 to 6).

3

R6(SUM-3)/AA(15F)

Finally plug the AC power cord.

Now you can operate the System.

• DO NOT use an old battery together with a new one.

• DO NOT use different types of batteries together.

• DO NOT expose batteries to heat or flame.

• DO NOT leave the batteries in the battery compartment when you are not going to use the remote control for an extended period of time. Otherwise, the remote control will be damaged from battery leakage.

3

Connection.fm Page 4 Tuesday, May 25, 2004 12:36 PM

Step

3

: Hook Up

If you need more detailed information, see page 6.

Illustrations of the input/output terminals below are typical examples.

When you connect other components, refer also to their manuals since the terminal names actually printed on the rear may vary.

Turn the power off to all components before connections.

For better FM/AM reception

Before connecting optical digital cord

Remove the protective cap from the DVD

OPTICAL DIGITAL

OUT terminal.

Outdoor FM antenna

(not supplied)

AM loop antenna

Keep it connected.

Vinyl-covered wire (not supplied)

Extend it horizontally.

TV

DECODER

AUX

VCR, etc.

VIDEO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

Y

P

B

P

R

AV

COMPU LINK

OPTICAL

DIGITAL IN

AUDIO OUT

LEFT

RIGHT

Disconnect the supplied FM antenna, and connect to an outdoor FM antenna using a 75

wire with coaxial type connector.

Yellow

Composite video cord (supplied)

OR

S-video cord (not supplied)

OR

Green

Blue

Red

Component video cord (not supplied)

AV COMPU LINK cord (not supplied)

(cord with monaural mini plug)

• For details, see “AV COMPU LINK remote control system” on page 6.

Optical digital cord (not supplied)

White

Red

Audio cord (not supplied)

4

Connection.fm Page 5 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:28 PM

AM loop antenna (supplied)

Turn it until the best reception is obtained.

FM antenna (supplied)

Extend it so that you can obtain the best reception.

VIDEO

SELECT

PAL

NTSC

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

Y

P

B

S-VIDEO

P

R

PUSH OPEN

REVERSE

To a wall outlet

Plug the AC power cord only after all connections and selector settings on the rear are complete.

5

Connection.fm Page 6 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:28 PM

To connect the AM loop antenna

1 Hold

2 Insert

3 Release

IMPORTANT

The speakers are magnetically shielded to avoid color distortions on TVs. However, if not installed properly, it may cause color distortions. So, pay attention to the following when installing the speakers.

• When placing the speakers near a TV set, turn off the

TV’s main power switch or unplug it before installing the speakers. Then wait at least 30 minutes before turning on the TV’s main power switch again.

Some TVs may still be affected even though you have followed the above. If this happens, move the speakers away from the TV.

• If the AM loop antenna wire or speaker cords are covered with vinyl, remove the vinyl to expose the tip of the antenna by twisting the vinyl.

• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch any other terminals, connecting cords and power cord. Also, keep the antennas away from metallic parts of the System, connecting cords, and the AC power cord. This could cause poor reception.

To connect the speaker cords

Connect the right speaker to the RIGHT terminals, and the left speaker to the LEFT terminals.

AV COMPU LINK remote control system

This system allows you to use JVC’s TV with simple operations; by starting playing back a disc, the TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture.

• To use AV COMPU LINK, you need to connect the

System and the TV by using a cord with monaural miniplugs (not supplied) in addition to the video input/output connection through the COMPONENT jacks, S-VIDEO jack or VIDEO (composite) jack on the rear.

1 Hold

2 Insert

3 Release

• When connecting the speaker cords, match the polarity of the speaker terminals: Red cord to (+) and black cord to (–).

Setting the Video Output Selector

You can select the video output to match it to the color system of your TV.

NTSC: For an NTSC TV.

PAL: For a PAL TV.

VIDEO

OUT

SELECT

PAL

NTSC

• When using a multi-color system

TV, either position will work.

• DO NOT connect more than one speaker to each terminal.

• DO NOT allow the conductor of the speaker cords to be in touch with the metallic parts of the System.

Changing the Scanning Mode

Remote

ONLY

This System supports progressive scanning.

If you connect a progressive TV through the COMPONENT jacks, you can enjoy a high quality picture from the built-in

DVD player by selecting “PROGRE.”

PROGRESSIVE

0

PROGRE

INTER

PROGRE

INTER

(at the same time)

Progressive scanning. For a progressive TV.

Interlaced scanning. For a conventional TV.

6

Connection.fm Page 7 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:28 PM

Before Operating the System

Playable Disc Types

This unit has been designed to play back the following discs:

Disc Type Mark (Logo)

Video

Format

Region

Code*

Number

DVD Video

3 or

ALL

DVD Audio

Video CD

(VCD)

Super Video

CD (SVCD)

DIGITAL VIDEO

SUPER VIDEO

NTSC or

PAL

DVD Video—digital audio formats

The System can play back the following digital audio formats.

• Linear PCM: Uncompressed digital audio, the same format used for CDs and most studio masters.

• Dolby Digital: Compressed digital audio, developed by

Dolby Laboratories, which enables multi-channel encode to create the realistic surround sound.

• DTS (Digital Theater Systems): Compressed digital audio, developed by Digital Theater Systems, Inc., which enables multi-channel like Dolby Digital. As the compression ratio is lower than for Dolby Digital, it provides wider dynamic range and better separation.

When playing a multi-channel encoded DVD, the System properly converts these multi-channel signals into 2 channels, and emits the downmixed sound from the speakers.

• To enjoy the powerful sound of these multi-channel encoded DVDs, connect a proper decoder or an amplifier with a proper built-in decoder to the digital output terminal on the rear.

Audio CD

CD-R

CD-RW

DVD-R

DVD-RW

COMPACT

DIGITAL AUDIO

The System can play back CD-R or CD-RW recorded in the Audio CD, Video CD, SVCD,

MP3, WMA, and JPEG formats.

The System can play back DVD-R or DVD-

RW recorded in the video format.

In addition to the above discs, this System can play back audio data recorded on CD Text, CD-G (CD Graphics), and CD-Extra.

• The following discs cannot be played back:

DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, DVD+R, DVD+RW, CD-I (CD-I

Ready), CD-ROM, Photo CD, etc.

Playing back these discs will generate noise and damage the speakers.

• In this manual, “file” and “track” are interchangeably used for MP3/WMA/JPEG operations.

* Note on Region Code

DVD players and DVDs have their own Region Code numbers.

This System can play back only DVDs recorded with the NTSC or PAL color system whose Region Code numbers including

“3.”

EX.:

If a DVD with the improper Region Code numbers is loaded,

“RGN ERR (Region Code Error)” appears on the display and playback will not start.

• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “MLP Lossless”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

• “DTS” and “DTS2.0

+DIGITAL OUT ” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

• This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by

Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by

Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT ALL HIGH

DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE FULLY

COMPATIBLE WITH THIS PRODUCT AND MAY

CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE

PICTURE. IN CASE OF 525 OR 625 PROGRESSIVE

SCAN PICTURE PROBLEMS, IT IS RECOMMENDED

THAT THE USER SWITCH THE CONNECTION TO

THE ‘STANDARD DEFINITION’ OUTPUT. IF THERE

ARE QUESTIONS REGARDING OUR TV SET

COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS MODEL 525p AND

625p DVD PLAYER, PLEASE CONTACT OUR

CUSTOMER SERVICE CENTER.

7

Connection.fm Page 8 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:28 PM

Display Indicators

The indications on the display teach you a lot of things while you are operating the System.

Before operating the System, be familiar with when and how the indicator illuminates on the display.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8

SLEEP MONO ST MP3 WMA 3DPHONIC REC

123 REC

RANDOM

PRGM ALL BONUS B.S.P.

A.STANDBY

9 p q w e

1 Rhythm Ax indicator

• Lights when Rhythm Ax is activated.

2 Daily Timer indicators

• : lights when Daily Timer stands by or is being preset.

• 1/2/3: lights when a Daily Timer (1, 2, or 3) stands by; flashes while setting or working.

• REC: lights when the Recording Timer stands by; flashes while setting or working.

3 SLEEP indicator

• Lights when the Sleep Timer is activated.

4 FM reception indicators

• MONO: lights while receiving an FM stereo station in monaural.

• ST (stereo): lights while an FM stereo station with sufficient signal strength is tuned in.

5 MP3/WMA indicators

• MP3: lights when an MP3 track is detected.

• WMA: lights when a WMA track is detected.

6 3D PHONIC indicator

• Lights when 3D Phonic is activated.

7 REC indicator

• Lights while recording.

8 Tape operation indicators

2 3

(tape direction):

– Lights to indicate the current tape running direction.

– Flashes slowly during playback and recording.

– Flashes quickly while rewinding a tape.

(reverse mode):

: tape play continues endlessly.

: tape automatically reverses once.

: tape play stops at the end of one side.

9 Disc operation indicators

• RANDOM: lights when Random Play is activated.

• PRGM (program): lights when Program Play is activated.

• (repeat)/ALL:

– ALL : lights when Disc Repeat is activated.

– : lights when any Repeat other than the above is activated.

p BONUS indicator

• Lights when a DVD Audio with a bonus group is detected.

q B.S.P. (Browsable Still Picture) indicator

• Lights when Browsable Still Pictures are detected while playing a DVD Audio.

w Main display

• While listening to radio: Band (or preset number) and station frequency appear.

• While selecting “AUX”: “AUX” appears.

• While playing a tape: “TAPE” appears.

• While playing a disc: See “Indications on the main display while operating a disc” on page 9.

e A(auto). STANDBY indicator

• Lights when Auto Standby is activated.

• Flashes when disc playback stops with Auto Standby activated.

8

Connection.fm Page 9 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:28 PM

Indications on the main display while operating a disc

While playing back a disc:

• DVD Video:

While disc play is stopped:

• DVD Video:

Current chapter no.

Elapsed playing time

• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current title and chapter numbers for a few seconds.

• DVD Audio: • DVD Audio:

Total title no.

Track no.

Current track no.

Elapsed playing time

• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current group and track numbers for a few seconds.

• Audio CD: • Audio CD:

Total group no.

Group no.

Current track no.

Elapsed playing time

• SVCD/VCD:

Total track no.

• SVCD/VCD:

Total playing time

Current track no.

Elapsed playing time *

* “PBC” appears while playing a disc with PBC.

• MP3/WMA:

Total track no.

Total playing time *

* Changes to “PBC” when stopping PBC playback.

• MP3/WMA:

Current track no.

Current track no.

Elapsed playing time

• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current group and track numbers for a few seconds.

• JPEG: • JPEG:

Current group no.

Current group no.

Current file no.

Current group no.

• If Resume is turned “ON” (see page 36), “RESUME” appears when you stop playback.

Current file no.

9

Basic.fm Page 10 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:29 PM

10 keys

ENTER

TOP MENU

2

8

GROUP/TITLE

4 / ¢

SHIFT

1

2

DVD/CD

3

4

VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

Daily Operations

—Playback

1

SET

MENU

, , ,

RETURN

7

1 / ¡

3D PHONIC

3

In this manual, the operation using the remote control is mainly explained; however, you can use the buttons and controls on the main unit if they have the same (or similar) name and marks.

1

Turn on the power.

The STANDBY/ON lamp on the main unit lights in green.

• Without pressing STANDBY/ON , the System turns on by pressing one of the source selecting buttons in the next step.

2

Select the source.

Playback automatically starts if the selected source is ready to start.

• If you press AUX, start playback source on the external component.

3

Adjust the volume.

4

Operate the target source as explained later.

To turn off (stand by) the unit

STANDBY/ON

The STANDBY/ON lamp on the main unit lights in red.

• A small amount of power is always consumed even while on standby.

For private listening

Connect a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack on the main unit. The sound will no longer come out of the speakers. Be sure to turn down the volume before connecting or putting the headphones.

• Disconnecting the headphones will activate the speakers again.

DO NOT turn off (stand by) the System with the volume set to an extremely high level;

Otherwise, the sudden blast of sound can damage your hearing, speakers and/or headphones when you turn on the System or start playback.

10

Basic.fm Page 11 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:29 PM

Listening to the Radio

Main Unit

ONLY

To set the AM tuner interval spacing

Before operating the tuner, it is required to select the appropriate AM space interval used for your area.

1 Select the AM band.

To tune in to a station

While FM or AM is selected...

Remote control: Main unit:

2 sec.

GROUP/TITLE

DOWN

2 sec.

UP

FM AM

2 Turn off the power.

STANDBY/ON

3 Select the appropriate AM space interval for your area.

• You can only use the button and the control on the front panel.

Frequency starts changing on the display.

When a station (frequency) with sufficient signal strength is tuned in, the frequency stops changing.

• When you repeatedly press the button, the frequency changes step by step.

To stop searching manually, press either button.

Remote

ONLY

If the received FM station is hard to listen

FM MODE

9

DOWN

While holding...

UP

While holding...

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY/ON

AM 9KHZ

(9 kHz interval)

AM 10KHZ

(10 kHz interval)

(at the same time)

The MONO indicator lights on the display. Reception will improve though stereo effect is lost—Monaural reception mode.

To restore the stereo effect, press the button again (the

MONO indicator goes off).

Remote

ONLY

To preset the stations

You can preset 30 FM and 15 AM stations.

1

2

Tune in to a station you want to preset.

• You can also store the monaural reception mode for FM preset stations if selected.

Activate the preset number entry mode.

SET

• Finish the following process while the indication on the display is flashing.

To select the band (FM or AM)

FM AM

11

Basic.fm Page 12 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:29 PM

3 Select a preset number for the station you store.

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

REV. MODE

7

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

8

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

FM MODE

9

10 10

Examples:

To select preset number 5, press

5.

To select preset number 15, press +10, then 5.

To select preset number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.

• You can also use the ¡ or 1 buttons.

4

Store the station.

SET

To start: To stop:

To rewind tape:

Before or after play...

GROUP/TITLE

Rewind the tape to the right.

Rewind the tape to the left.

To tune in to a preset station

1 Select the band (FM or AM).

FM

Remote

ONLY

AM

To change the tape running direction

3

(forward play)

2

(reverse play)

To reverse the tape automatically

REV. MODE

7

2 Select a preset number for the station you store.

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

REV. MODE

7

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

8

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

FM MODE

9

• You can also use the

¡

or

1

buttons.

10 10

Playing Back a Tape

To insert a tape

You can play back tapes of types I, II, and IV.

Push Insert Close

With the tape side facing outside

(at the same time)

Tape is played from the forward side to the reverse side. When the reverse side is played back, playback stops.

Tape is automatically reversed, and playback repeats until you stop it.

Tape will not be reversed. When the current side of the tape reaches its end, playback stops.

Playing Back a Disc

IMPORTANT: Before playing a disc, make sure of the following...

• Turn on the TV and select an appropriate input mode on the TV to view the pictures or on-screen displays on the

TV screen.

• For disc playback, you can change the initial setting to your preference. See “Setup Menu Operations” on page 33.

If “ ” appears on the TV screen when you press a button, the disc cannot accept the operation you have tried to do, or data required for that operation is not recorded on the disc.

12

Basic.fm Page 13 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:29 PM

Before operating a disc, be familiar how a disc is recorded.

• DVD Video comprises of “ Titles ” which includes

“ Chapters ,” DVD Audio/MP3/WMA/JPEG comprise of

“ Groups ” which includes “ Tracks ,” and CD/SVCD/VCD comprise of only “ Tracks .”

• For JPEG playback, see “Operations on the CONTROL

Screen” on page 27.

To insert a disc

You can insert a disc while playing another source.

On-screen guide icons

• During DVD Video playback, the following icons may appear on the TV:

At the beginning of a scene containing multiangle views.

At the beginning of a scene containing multiaudio sounds.

At the beginning of a scene containing multisubtitles.

• The following icons will be also shown on the TV to indicate your current operation.

, , , , ,

To close the disc tray, press

0

again.

• If you press DVD/CD

3

, disc tray closes automatically and playback starts (depending on how the disc is programmed internally).

To start: To pause: To stop:

DVD/CD

To select a title/group

While playing...

Remote

ONLY

GROUP/TITLE

To release, press

DVD/CD

3

.

• While playing DVD/SVCD/VCD: This System can store the stop point, and when you start playback again by pressing DVD/CD

3

(even while on standby), it starts from the position where you have stopped—Resume Play.

(“RESUME” appears on the display when you stop playback.)

To stop completely while Resume is activated, press

7 twice. (To cancel Resume, see “RESUME” on page 36.)

• When operating the System, the on-screen guide icon (see the following table) appears on the TV.

To deactivate the on-screen guide icons, see “ON

SCREEN GUIDE” on page 36.

(at the same time)

• Group name appears for MP3/WMA discs.

To select a chapter/track

While playing...

GROUP/TITLE

• First time you press

4

, you can go back to the beginning of the current chapter/track.

Remote

ONLY

To locate a particular portion

While playing a disc except MP3/WMA...

SLOW – SLOW

+ x2 x5 x10 x20 x60 x2 x5 x10 x20

• No sound comes out while searching on DVD Video/

SVCD/VCD.

To return to normal playback, press DVD/CD

3

.

x60

13

Basic.fm Page 14 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:29 PM

Remote

ONLY

To locate an item directly

You can select a title/chapter/track directly and start playback.

• For DVD Video, you can select a title before starting playback , while you can select a chapter after starting playback .

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

REV. MODE

7

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

8

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

FM MODE

9

Examples:

To select number 5, press 5.

To select number 15, press +10, then 5.

To select number 30, press +10,

+10, then 10.

10 10

7

For SVCD/VCD with PBC:

While playing a disc with PBC, “PBC” appears on the display.

When disc menu appears on the TV, select an item on the menu. Playback of the selected item starts.

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

REV. MODE

7

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

8

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

FM MODE

9

Examples:

To select number 5, press 5.

To select number 15, press +10, then 5.

To select number 30, press +10,

+10, then 10.

10 10

To move to the next or previous page of the current menu:

GROUP/TITLE

Moves to the next page.

To use 3D Phonic

While playing...

3D

PHONIC

3D PHONIC ACTION

3D PHONIC OFF

(Canceled)

3D PHONIC

3D PHONIC

DRAMA

THEATER

• The selected mode can only be shown on the TV.

ACTION Suitable for action movies and sports programs.

DRAMA Creates natural and warm sound. Enjoy movies in a relaxed mood.

THEATER Enjoy sound effects like in a major theater.

To play back using the disc menu

7 For DVD Video/DVD Audio:

1 Show the disc menu.

TOP MENU

SET UP

MENU

Remote

ONLY

2 Select an item on the disc menu.

ENTER

Moves to the previous page.

To return to the previous menu:

CANCEL

RETURN

(at the same time)

To cancel PBC

AUDIO

1

SUB TITLE

2

ANGLE

3

ZOOM

4

REV. MODE

7

DVD LEVEL

5

8

VFP

6

FM MODE

9

10 10

Select a track.

Stop playback.

Playback starts with the selected track.

To reactivate PBC, press

7

(twice if Resume is turned

“ON”), then press DVD/CD

3

.

• With some discs, you can also select items by entering the number using the 10 keys.

14

Basic.fm Page 15 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:29 PM

Daily Operations

—Sound & Other Adjustments

Remote control

Adjusting the Volume

You can adjust the volume level from level 0 (VOL MIN) to level 40 (VOL MAX).

Remote control: Main unit:

VOLUME DVD LEVEL

CLOCK/

TIMER

ENTER

VFP

SLEEP

A.STANDBY

SET

, , ,

VOLUME

FADE

MUTING

Remote

ONLY

To drop the volume in a moment

To restore the volume, press again, or adjust the volume level.

BASS/TREBLE

DISPLAY

DIMMER

SHIFT

RHYTHM AX

VOLUME

+/–

FADE

MUTING

Adjusting the Sound

To emphasize rhythm feeling—RHYTHM AX

This function emphasizes bass attack feeling, and also changes the subwoofer level.

RHYTHM AX

RHYTHMAX OFF

(Canceled)

Main unit

RHYTHM AX

VOLUME +/–

To adjust the tone

You can adjust the bass and treble level from –5 to +5.

To adjust the bass

BASS/

TREBLE

BASS TRE

Canceled

VOLUME

To adjust the treble

BASS/

TREBLE

BASS TRE

Canceled

VOLUME

15

Basic.fm Page 16 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:29 PM

Presetting Automatic DVD Video Sound

Increase Level

Remote

ONLY

The DVD Video sound is sometimes recorded at a lower level than for other discs and sources. You can set the increase level for the currently loaded DVD Video, so you do not have to adjust the volume every time you change the source.

DVD LEVEL

5

NORMAL MIDDLE

HIGH

(at the same time)

NORMAL Original recording level.

MIDDLE Output level is increased (less than “HIGH”).

HIGH Output level is increased (more than

“MIDDLE”).

• Once the current DVD is ejected, this setting is canceled and set automatically to “NORMAL.”

Changing the Picture Tone

Remote

ONLY

While showing a playback picture on the TV, you can select the preset picture tone, or adjust it and store your own taste.

To select a preset picture tone

1 While playing, display VFP setting screen.

NORMAL

VFP

GAMMA

BRIGHTNESS

6

CONTRAST

SATURATION

TINT

SHARPNESS

(at the same time) On the TV

0

0

0

0

0

0

2 Select a preset picture tone.

NORMAL

USER2

CINEMA

USER1

Changing the Display Brightness

You can dim the display window.

Remote

ONLY

DIMMER

DIM1

DIM OFF

(Canceled)

DIM2

AUTO DIM

DIM1

DIM2

Dims the display.

Erases the display illumination.

AUTO DIM Erases the display illumination when disc playback starts.*

• The display illuminates when playback stops.

* “AUTO DIM” does not work for CD/MP3/WMA.

NORMAL

CINEMA

Normally select this.

Suitable for a movie source.

USER1/USER2 You can adjust parameters and can store the settings (see below).

To erase the screen, press VFP again while holding SHIFT.

To adjust the picture tone

1 Select “USER1” or “USER2.”

• Follow steps 1 and 2 explained above.

2 Select a parameter you want to adjust.

ENTER

GAMMA Adjust if the neutral color is bright or dark (–3 to +3).

BRIGHTNESS Adjust if the entire picture is bright or dark (–8 to +8).

CONTRAST Adjust if the far and near positions are unnatural (–7 to +7).

SATURATION Adjust if the picture is whitish or blackish (–7 to +7).

TINT Adjust if the human skin color is unnatural (–7 to +7).

SHARPNESS Adjust if the picture is indistinct

(–8 to +8).

16

Basic.fm Page 17 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:29 PM

3 Adjust the parameter.

ENTER

Turning Off the Power

Automatically

Remote

ONLY

To turn off the unit after playback is over—Auto

Standby

4 Repeat steps 2 to 3 to adjust other parameters.

To erase the screen, press VFP again while holding SHIFT.

SLEEP

A.STANDBY

On

Canceled

Setting the Clock

Remote

ONLY

Without setting the built-in clock, you cannot use Daily

Timers, Recording Timer (see page 31) and Sleep Timer.

• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL or CLOCK/TIMER. You can return to the previous step.

1 Activate the clock setting mode.

CLOCK/

TIMER

• If you have already adjusted the clock before, press the button repeatedly until the clock setting mode is selected.

2

Adjust the hour.

SET

(at the same time)

When Auto Standby is in use, the A.STANDBY indicator lights on the display.

When disc play stops, the A.STANDBY indicator starts flashing. If no operation is done for about 3 minutes while the indicator is flashing, the System turns off (stands by) automatically.

• Auto Standby does not work while you are listening to radio (FM/AM) and the external component (AUX).

To turn off the unit after a certain period of time

—Sleep Timer

1 Specify the time (in minutes).

SLEEP

A.STANDBY

10 20 30 60 90 120

Canceled

150

3 Adjust the minute.

SET

2 Wait until the set time goes off.

To check the time remaining until the shut-off time

SLEEP

A.STANDBY

SLEEP

Now the built-in clock starts working.

To check the current clock time during play

DISPLAY

Clock

Source information

• While playing a DVD and MP3/WMA, you cannot check the current clock time (see page 9) .

• If you press the button repeatedly, you can change the shutoff time.

17

UniqueDVD.fm Page 18 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:30 PM

Remote control

SUB TITLE

AUDIO

ZOOM

, , ,

DVD/CD

3

8

SHIFT

Unique DVD/VCD Operations

ANGLE

10 keys

Selecting the View Angle

Remote

ONLY

While playing back a chapter (of DVD Video) containing multi-view angles, you can view the same scene from different angles.

• You can also select the multi-view angles using the onscreen bar (see page 24).

While playing...

ANGLE

3

ENTER

7

SLOW –/+

Ex.:

1/3

1

1/3

1

(at the same time)

2/3

2

2/3

2

3/3

3

3/3

3

Selecting the Subtitle Language

Remote

ONLY

For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter (of DVD

Video) containing subtitles in different languages, you can select the subtitle language to display on the TV.

For SVCD: While playing, you can select the subtitles even if no subtitles are recorded on the disc.

• You can also select the subtitle language using the onscreen bar (see page 24).

While playing a DVD Video...

1

Display the subtitle selection window.

1/3

ENGLISH

SUB TITLE

2

1/3

ENGLISH

(at the same time)

18

UniqueDVD.fm Page 19 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:30 PM

2

Select the subtitle language.

While playing a DVD Video...

Ex.:

1/3

ENGLISH

2/3

FRENCH

3/3

JAPANESE

Ex.:

1/3

ENGLISH

1/3

ENGLISH

2/3

FRENCH

2/3

FRENCH

3/3

JAPANESE

3/3

JAPANESE

1/3

ENGLISH

2/3

FRENCH

3/3

JAPANESE

While playing a DVD Audio...

Ex.:

1/3 2/3

1 2

3/3

3

While playing an SVCD video...

SUB TITLE

2

–/4

OFF

(at the same time)

1/4

1

4/4

4

3/4

3

AUDIO

1

(at the same time)

2/4

2

Selecting the Audio Track

Remote

ONLY

For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter containing audio languages, you can select the language to listen to.

For DVD Audio: While playing back a track containing audio channels, you can select the audio channel to listen to.

For Karaoke SVCD/VCD: When playing back a track, you can select the audio channel to play.

• You can also select the audio track using the on-screen bar

(see page 24).

While playing a Karaoke SVCD or VCD...

AUDIO

1

SVCD

ST1

R2

VCD

ST

ST2

L2

L

(at the same time)

L1

R1

R

ST1/ST2

ST

L1/L2/L

R1/R2/R

To listen to normal stereo (2 channel) playback.

To listen to the left audio channel.

To listen to the right audio channel.

• SVCD can have 4 audio channels. Karaoke SVCD usually uses these 4 channels to record two 2-channel recordings

(ST1/ST2).

Playing Back a Bonus Group

Remote

ONLY

Some DVD Audios have a special group called “bonus group” whose contents are not open to the public.

• To play back a bonus group, you have to enter the specific

“key number” (a kind of password) for the bonus group.

The way of getting the key number depends on the disc.

1

Select the bonus group.

• The bonus group is usually recorded as the last group

(for example, if a disc contains 4 groups including a bonus group, “group 4” is the bonus group).

• For how to select the group, see “To select a title/group” on page 13.

19

UniqueDVD.fm Page 20 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:30 PM

2

Enter the key number.

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

REV. MODE

7 8

PROGRESSIVE

0

FM MODE

9

ENTER

3

Follow the interactive instructions shown on the screen.

To cancel the key number entry, press

7

.

Special Effect Playback

Still picture playback

Remote

ONLY

To start still picture playback:

While playing...

To resume normal playback:

DVD/CD

Frame-by-frame playback

1

2

While playing...

Still picture playback starts.

Advance the still picture frame by frame.

To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD

3

.

Slow-motion playback

1

While playing...

Still picture playback starts.

2

Select slow motion speed.

SLOW – SLOW +

Forward slow motion starts.

Reverse slow motion* starts.

SLOW

+

1/32 1/16 1/8 1/4 1/2

SLOW –

1/32 1/16 1/8 1/4 1/2

*Not available for SVCD/VCD.

To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3 .

To replay the previous scenes

(One-Touch Replay)

• This function is only used while playing DVD Video.

While playing back...

The playback position moves back about 10 seconds before the current position (only within the same title).

Zoom

1

Remote

ONLY

While playing back...

ZOOM

4

(at the same time)

ZOOM

4

ZOOM 1

ZOOM OFF

ZOOM 2

ZOOM 6

ZOOM 3 ZOOM 4

ZOOM 5

2

Move the zoomed-in position.

To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly (while holding

SHIFT) until “ZOOM OFF” appears on the TV.

20

AdvancedDisc.fm Page 21 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:30 PM

Remote control

10 keys

,

DVD/CD

3

8

4

/

¢

SHIFT

Main unit

DVD/CD

3

4 , 7 , ¢

Advanced Disc Operations

Programming the Playing Order—

Program Play

Remote

ONLY

You can arrange the playing order of the chapters or tracks

(up to 99) before you start playback.

1

Before starting playback, activate Program Play.

PLAY

MODE

PROGRAM

Canceled

RANDOM

ENTER

CANCEL

7

PLAY

MODE

REPEAT

REPEAT A-B

PRGM

On the display

PROGRAM

No

1

8

9

6

7

10

2

3

4

5

Group/Title Track/Chapter

USE NUMERIC KEYS TO PROGRAM TRACKS.

USE CANCEL TO DELETE THE PROGRAM.

On the TV

2

Select chapters or tracks you want for Program Play.

• For DVD/MP3/WMA:

1 Select a title or group number.

2

3

Select a chapter or track number.

Repeat the above steps 1 and 2 .

• For SVCD/VCD/CD:

1 Select tracks.

To enter the numbers directly:

AUDIO

1

SUB TITLE

2

ANGLE

3

ZOOM

4

REV. MODE

7

DVD LEVEL

5

8

VFP

6

FM MODE

9

Examples:

To enter number 5, press 5.

To enter number 15, press +10, then 5.

To enter number 30, press +10,

+10, then 10.

10 10

0

21

AdvancedDisc.fm Page 22 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:30 PM

3

Start playback.

DVD/CD

Playback starts in the order you have programmed.

Playing at Random—Random Play

Remote

ONLY

You can play all chapters or tracks at random.

• Random Play cannot be used for some DVDs.

1

Before starting playback, activate Random Play.

PLAY

MODE PROGRAM

Canceled

RANDOM

To skip a step:

GROUP/TITLE

To pause:

To release, press

DVD/CD

3

.

To check the programmed contents

Before or after playback...

In the reverse order.

To stop:

RANDOM

2

Start playback.

DVD/CD

Playback starts in random order.

Random Play ends when the entire disc has been played.

In the programmed order.

• You can also use

4

or

¢

to check the programmed contents.

To modify the program

Before or after playback...

To erase the last step: To erase the entire program:

CANCEL

RETURN

To skip a chapter/ track:

To pause: To stop:

To release, press

DVD/CD

3

.

To exit from Random Play

Before or after playback...

PLAY

MODE PROGRAM

Canceled

RANDOM

To add steps in the program:

Repeat step 2 .

To exit from Program Play

Before or after playback...

PLAY

MODE PROGRAM

Canceled

RANDOM

22

AdvancedDisc.fm Page 23 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:30 PM

Playing Repeatedly

Remote

ONLY

• You can also select the repeat mode using the on-screen bar (see page 25).

Repeat Play

You can repeat playback.

• For DVD Video:

While playing...

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

REP CHAP

*

REP OFF

(Canceled)

REP TTL

• For DVD Audio:

While playing or before playback...

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

REP TRK

*

REP GRP

REP OFF

(Canceled)

• For MP3/WMA:

While playing or before playback...

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

REP TRK

*

REP OFF

(Canceled)

REP GRP

REP ALL

• For CD/SVCD/VCD:

While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD) or before playback...

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

REP TRK

*

REP OFF

(Canceled)

REP ALL

REP CHAP * Repeats the current chapter.

REP TTL Repeats the current title.

REP TRK * Repeats the current track.

REP GRP Repeats the current group.

REP ALL Repeats the disc or program.

*During Program Play and Random Play, “REP STEP” appears instead of these indications, and repeat modes change as follows for all the discs.

REP STEP REP ALL

REP OFF

(Canceled)

A-B Repeat

You can repeat playback of a desired portion by specifying the beginning (point A) and the ending (point B).

• A-B Repeat cannot be used for MP3/WMA and for some

DVDs.

• A-B Repeat can be used within the same title while playing a DVD Video, and within the same track for the other discs.

1

While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), select the start point (A).

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

starts flashing on the display.

• A appears on the TV if the TV is turned on.

(at the same time)

2

Select the end point (B).

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

stops flashing.

TV.

A-B appears on the

• You can search for the end point using the

¡

button.

(at the same time)

To cancel A-B Repeat, press REPEAT A-B again while holding SHIFT.

• A-B Repeat will also be canceled when you stop play or skip the chapter or track.

Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock

Main Unit

ONLY

You can lock the disc tray so that no one can eject the loaded disc.

• This is possible while the System is on standby.

While the disc tray is closed...

(at the same time)

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.

“UNLOCKED” appears on the display.

23

OSDOperation.fm Page 24 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:31 PM

24

On-Screen Disc Operations

Remote control

ZOOM

, , ,

ON SCREEN

DVD/CD

3

8

4

/

¢

SHIFT

On-screen bars

DVD Video

1

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

DVD Audio

1

2 3

CHAP.

TITLE 14

1 /

CHAP

1/3

23

1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

4

2 3

DVD-AUDIO

TIME OFF

SVCD

1

SVCD

TRACK

GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58

1 / 3 PAGE 1 / 3

4

2 3

TITLE 14

/ 1/3

CHAP 23

1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1/3

4

VCD

1

VCD

2

TITLE 14 CHAP 23

1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1/3

3

4

CD

1 2 3

CD TITLE 14 CHAP

1/3

23

1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1/3

4

10 keys

ENTER

CANCEL

7

REPEAT

¡

On-screen Bar Information

You can check the disc information (except for MP3/WMA/

JPEG disc) and use some functions through the on-screen bar.

1 Disc type

2 Playback information

Indication Meanings

Mbps Current transfer rate

(Megabits per second)

TITLE 2 Current title

CHAP 3

GROUP 1

TRACK 14

Current chapter

Current group

Current track

TOTAL 1:25:58 Time indications

3 Operation modes

Indication Meanings

Playback

/

/ Forward/Reverse search

Forward/Reverse slow-motion

Pause

Stop

4 Function icons (on the pull-down menu)

Indication Meanings

TIME

Select to change the time indication.

OFF

CHAP.

TRACK

Select to repeat playback.

Select for time search.

Select for chapter search.

Select for track search.

1/3

1/3

1/3

PAGE 1 / 5

Select to change the audio language or channel (see also page 19).

Select to change subtitle language

(see also page 18).

Select to change the view angle (see also page 18).

Select to change the page.

OSDOperation.fm Page 25 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:31 PM

Operations Using the On-screen Bar

Remote

ONLY

Ex.: Selecting a subtitle (French) for DVD Video

While a disc is selected as the source...

1

Display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.

ON SCREEN

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

TITLE 2 CHAP 3 TIME 0:00:58

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

CHAP.

14

1 / 1/3

23 TOTAL 1:25:58

1 / 1/3 1 1/3

Goes off

2

Select (highlight) the item you want.

For detailed operations of the following functions, see also “Operations Using the On-screen Bar” on the left.

To change the time information

You can change the time information in the on-screen bar and the display window on the main unit.

1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pulldown menu.

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

CHAP.

TITLE 14 CHAP 23

1 / 1/3 1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

2 Make sure TIME is selected (highlighted).

3 Change the time indication.

ENTER

TIME 0:00:58

T.REM 0:35:24

REM 0:11:23

TOTAL 1:01:58

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

CHAP.

TITLE 14 CHAP 23

1 / 1/3 1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

3

Display the pop-up window.

ENTER

TITLE 14

1

CHAP

1/3

23

1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

ENGLISH

4

Select the desired option in the pop-up window.

TITLE 14 CHAP

1 1/3

23

2 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

FRENCH

5

Finish the setting.

ENTER

Pop-up window goes off.

To erase the on-screen bar

ON SCREEN

TIME

REM

TOTAL

T.REM

Elapsed playing time of the current chapter/track.

Remaining time of the current chapter/ track.

Elapsed disc time.

Remaining disc time.

To erase the on-screen bar

ON SCREEN

Repeat Play

• See also page 23.

1 While playing a disc (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.

• Except for DVD Video: Repeat Play can be selected before starting playback.

3 Display the pop-up window.

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

CHAP.

TITLE 14

1 /

CHAP

1/3

23

1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

OFF

25

OSDOperation.fm Page 26 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:31 PM

4 Select the repeat mode you want.

A-B

TITLE

TRACK *

OFF

Repeats a desired portion (see below).

Repeats the current title.

GROUP

ALL

Repeats the current group.

Repeats the disc (except for DVD) or program.

CHAPTER * Repeats the current chapter.

Repeats the current track.

Cancels Repeat Play.

* During Program Play and Random Play, “STEP” appears.

5 Finish the setting.

ENTER

A-B Repeat

• See also page 23.

1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pulldown menu.

3 Display the pop-up window.

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

CHAP.

TITLE 14 CHAP 23 TOTAL 1:25:58

1 / 1/3 1 / 1/3 1 1/3

OFF

Time Search

You can move to a particular point by specifying the elapsed playing time from the beginning.

1 While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.

• Except for DVD: Time Search can be used before starting playback.

2 Select .

3 Display the pop-up window.

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

TITLE 14

CHAP.

TIME _ : _ _ : _ _

1 /

CHAP

1/3

23

1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

4 Enter the time.

You can specify the time in hours/minutes/seconds.

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

REV. MODE

7 8

PROGRESSIVE

0

FM MODE

9

Examples:

To move to a point of 1

(hours): 02 (minutes): 00

(seconds), press 1, 0, 2, 0, then

0.

To move to a point of 54

(minutes): 00 (seconds), press

0, 5, 4, 0, then 0.

• It is always required to enter the hour digit (even “0” hour), but it is not required to enter trailing zeros (the

• last two digits in the examples above).

To correct a misentry, press Cursor < to erase the last entry.

5 Finish the setting.

ENTER

The System starts playing the disc from the selected playing time.

4 Select “A-B.”

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

CHAP.

TITLE 14 CHAP

1 / 1/3

23

1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

A–B

5 Select the start point (A).

ENTER

DVD-VIDEO

A-

8.5Mbps

CHAP.

TITLE 14 CH

1 / 1/3

6 Select the end point (B).

ENTER

A-B Repeat starts. The selected portion plays repeatedly.

• Before pressing ENTER, you can search for the end point using the

¡

button.

To cancel A-B Repeat, repeat steps 1 to 3 , and select “OFF” in step 4 .

Chapter/Track Search

You can search for the chapter (DVD Video) or track (DVD

Audio) number to play.

1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pulldown menu.

2 Select CHAP.

or TRACK .

3 Display the pop-up window.

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

TITLE 14 CHAP 23

CHAP.

CHAPTER _

1 1/3 1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

26

OSDOperation.fm Page 27 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:31 PM

4 Enter the desired chapter/track number.

AUDIO

1

SUB TITLE

2

ANGLE

3

ZOOM

4

REV. MODE

7

DVD LEVEL

5

8

VFP

6

FM MODE

9

PROGRESSIVE

0

Examples:

To select chapter/track 5, press

5.

To select chapter/track 15, press 1, then 5.

To select chapter/track 30, press 3, then 0.

• To correct a misentry, press the 10 keys until the desired number shown in the pop-up window.

5 Finish the setting.

ENTER

The System starts playing the searched chapter or track.

Selecting Browsable Still Pictures

Remote

ONLY

While playing back a track (of DVD Audio) linked to browsable still pictures (BSP), you can select the still picture

(turn the page) to be shown on the TV.

• If a track is linked to browsable still pictures (BSP), they are usually shown in turn automatically during playback.

1 While playing a DVD Audio, display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.

3 Display the pop-up window.

DVD-AUDIO

TIME OFF TRACK

GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58

1 / 3 PAGE 1 / 5

1

4 Select a still picture you want.

DVD-AUDIO

TIME OFF TRACK

GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58

1 / 3 PAGE 3 / 5

3

5 Finish the setting.

ENTER

Operations on t he CONTROL Screen

Remote

ONLY

The CONTROL screen automatically appears on the TV when you load an MP3, WMA, or JPEG disc.

You can search for and play the desired tracks through the

CONTROL screen.

• If both types of files (MP3/WMA files and JPEG files) are recorded on a disc, select the file type to play (see page 35).

CONTROL screen

Ex.: When the MP3 disc is loaded.

1

2

3

4

Group : 2 / 3

Spring

Summer

Fall

Winter

Track Information

Title

Rain

Artist

Album

REPEAT TRACK Time : 00:00:14

Track : 5 / 14 (Total 41)

Cloudy.mp3

Fair.mp3

Fog.mp3

Hail.mp3

Indian summer.mp3

Rain.mp3

Shower.mp3

Snow.mp3

Thunder.mp3

Typhoon.mp3

Wind.mp3

Winter sky.mp3

6

7

8

9

0

-

5

1 Current group number/total group number

2 Current group (in blue)

3 Group list

4 Track information (ID3 Tag Version 1.0: only for

MP3/WMA)

5 Current track (in blue)

6 Repeat Play setting

7 Elapsed playing time of the current track

(only for MP3/WMA)

8 Operation mode icon

9 Current track number/total number of tracks in the current group (total number of tracks on the loaded disc)

0 Highlight (green) bar

Track list

27

OSDOperation.fm Page 28 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:31 PM

To move the highlight (green) bar between group list and track list:

Moves the bar to the track list.

To repeat slide-show for JPEG

While playing or before starting playback...

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

REP GRP REP ALL

REP OFF

(Canceled)

Moves the bar to the group list.

To select a group/track in the list:

Move the highlight bar to a desired item.

• If you move the highlight bar while playing back an MP3/

WMA disc, the selected track starts playback automatically.

REP GRP Repeats the current group.

REP ALL Repeats the disc.

• For Repeat Play of MP3/WMA, see page 23.

To zoom in the still picture

• You cannot zoom in the still picture during slide-show.

1

While playing back a still picture...

• During slide-show, press

8

to display the still picture, then...

To start playback

For MP3/WMA:

ZOOM

4

ENTER

Playback starts with the selected track.

• Pressing DVD/CD 3 also starts playback.

(at the same time)

For JPEG:

ZOOM

4

ZOOM 1

ZOOM OFF

ZOOM 2

ENTER

The selected track (still picture) is displayed until you change it.

2

Move the zoomed-in position.

DVD/CD

Slide-show playback starts.

Each track (still picture) is shown on the screen for about 3 seconds, then changes one after another.

• Once you start playing back a JPEG track, the CONTROL screen goes off.

• To cancel slide-show, and display the current still picture, press

8

.

To skip a track:

GROUP/TITLE

To stop playback:

To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly (while holding

SHIFT) until “ZOOM OFF” appears on the TV.

28

AdvancedTape.fm Page 29 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:31 PM

Remote control

REV. MODE

TAPE

2 3

DVD/CD

3

7

SHIFT

Advanced Tape Operations

IMPORTANT

It may be unlawful to record or play back copyrighted material without the consent of the copyright owner.

Recording on a Tape

You can use type I tapes for recording.

• To play a tape, see page 12.

1

Insert a recordable cassette.

Push Insert Close

FM/AM

AUX

With the tape side facing outside

2

Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode settings on the display.

Reverse mode indicator

Main unit

TAPE

2 3

DVD/CD

3

REC

PUSH OPEN 0

FM/AM

AUX

7

Tape direction indicator

To change the direction

Current source

3

(forward)

2

(reverse)

To change the Reverse mode if necessary

REV. MODE

7

(

(at the same time)

)

To record on both sides.

• When using Reverse Mode, start recording in the forward (

3

) direction.

To record on only one side.

29

AdvancedTape.fm Page 30 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:31 PM

3

Select and start playing the source—“FM,” “AM,”

“DVD/CD,” or “AUX.”

• When recording a disc, you can also use “Synchronized

Disc Recording” (see below).

4

Start recording.

REC

To record Program Play or Random Play

1 Select Program Play (and make a program) or Random

Play, but do not start playback.

2 Press REC to start recording.

• When disc play stops, recording continues. It is required that recording be stopped manually.

To stop recording:

On the main unit

To record only your favorite track

You can specify tracks to be recorded on the tape while listening to a disc (except for DVD Video).

1

Start playing a disc.

DVD/CD

Synchronized Disc Recording

You can start and stop both disc play and tape recording at the same time.

To record the entire disc

1

Load a disc and insert a recordable cassette.

• If the current playing source is not the disc player, press

DVD/CD

3

, then

7

.

2

Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode settings on the display.

• See step 2 of “Recording on a Tape” on page 29.

3

Start recording.

REC

The System automatically creates 4-second blanks between the tunes recorded on the tapes.

2

While a track you want to record on the tape is playing...

REC

On the main unit

The disc player returns to the beginning of that track and the track is recorded on the tape.

After recording the track, the disc player and cassette deck automatically stop.

3

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to record other tracks you want.

• You can exchange the discs if necessary.

To protect your recording

Cassettes have two small tabs on the back to protect from unexpected erasure or re-recording.

To protect your recording, remove these tabs.

On the main unit

• When either disc play* or recording ends, both disc player and the cassette deck stop at the same time.

• If you press REC soon after the recording is stopped, “NO

REC” may appear.

* For DVD Video: When a title is finished playing.

To record a “Live” disc

It will not be desirable to put 4-second blank portions between the tunes recorded on the tape.

To record the entire disc without any interruption recorded, pause the disc play (press DVD/CD

3

, then

8

) before pressing REC.

To re-record on a protected tape, cover the holes with adhesive tape.

30

Timer.fm Page 31 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:32 PM

Remote control

SET

,

Timer Operations

STANDBY/ON

CLOCK/

TIMER

CANCEL

Setting the Timer

Remote

ONLY

Using Daily Timer, you can wake up with your favorite song. On the other hand, with Recording Timer, you can make a tape of a radio broadcast automatically.

• You can store three Daily Timer settings and one

Recording Timer setting; however, you can activate only one of Daily Timers and Recording Timer at the same time.

• To exit from the timer setting, press CLOCK/TIMER as required.

• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL.

You can return to the previous step.

1

Select one of the timer setting modes you want to set—

Daily 1 ON time, Daily 2 ON time, Daily 3 ON time, or

Recording Timer ON time.

CLOCK/

TIMER

Daily 1 Timer

DAILY 1 * ON (Time)

Canceled

Daily 2 Timer

DAILY 2 * ON (Time)

Clock setting

(see page 17)

Daily 3 Timer

DAILY 3 * ON (Time)

ON (Time) REC TMR

Recording Timer

1

Ex. When Daily Timer 1 setting mode is selected

2

Make the timer setting as you want.

Repeat the following operations until you finish setting in the following order—

SET

* Daily Timer initial settings when shipped from the factory

• DAILY 1:ON Time (6:00)/OFF Time (8:00)/

Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)

• DAILY 2:ON Time (12:00)/OFF Time (14:00)/

Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)

• DAILY 3:ON Time (18:00)/OFF Time (20:00)/

Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)

For Daily Timers:

1 Set the hour then the minute for on-time.

2 Set the hour then the minute for off-time.

3 Select the playback source—“TUNER FM,”

“TUNER AM,” “TAPE,” “DISC,” or “AUX.”

1

4 For “TUNER FM” and “TUNER AM”: Select a preset channel.

For “DISC”: Select the title/group number, then the chapter/track number.

31

Timer.fm Page 32 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:32 PM

5 Select the volume level.

• You can select the volume level (“VOL 0” to

“VOL 50” and “VOL – –”).

If you select “VOL – –,” the volume is set to the last level when the unit has been turned off.

Once settings are complete, the Timer setting information appears in sequence.

For Recording Timer:

1 Set the hour then the minute for on-time.

2 Set the hour then the minute for off-time.

3 Select the playback source—“TUNER FM,”

4

“TUNER AM,” or “AUX.”

For “TUNER FM” and “TUNER AM”: Select a preset channel.

Once settings are complete, the Timer setting information appears in sequence.

3

Turn off the unit (on standby) if you have set the timer with the System turned on.

STANDBY/ON

How Recording Timer actually works

When Recording Timer has been set, Timer ( ) indicator and the REC indicator are lit on the display.

Recording Timer works only once.

When the on-time comes

The System turns on, tunes in to the specified station or changes the source to “AUX”, sets the volume level to the preset level, and starts recording.

When the off-time comes

The System stops recording, and turns off (stands by).

• The timer setting remains in memory until you change it.

To turn off the Timer after its setting is done

Since Daily Timer is activated at the same time everyday, you may need to cancel it on some particular days.

• Recording Timer can also be canceled temporarily.

1 Select the Timer you want to cancel.

CLOCK/

TIMER

Daily 1 Timer

DAILY 1 * ON (Time)

Daily 2 Timer

DAILY 2 * ON (Time)

Daily 3 Timer

DAILY 3 * ON (Time)

Canceled Clock setting

(see page 17)

ON (Time) REC TMR

Recording Timer

How Daily Timer actually works

Once the Daily Timer has been set, the timer ( ) indicator and timer number indicator (1/2/3) are lit on the display. Daily Timer is activated at the same time everyday until the timer is turned off manually (see the next column) or another timer is activated.

When the on-time comes

The System turns on, starts playing the specified source

(except “AUX”), and sets the volume level to the preset level.

• While Daily Timer is working, the timer ( ) indicator and timer number indicator (1/2/3) flash on the display.

When the off-time comes

The System stops playback, and turns off (stands by) automatically.

• The timer setting remains in memory until you change it.

1

2 Turn off the selected Timer.

Ex.To cancel Daily

Timer 1

CANCEL

RETURN

To turn on the Timer

1 Select the Timer (DAILY 1/2/3, and REC TMR) you want to activate.

CLOCK/

TIMER

Daily 1 Timer

DAILY 1 ON (Time)

Canceled

Daily 2 Timer

DAILY 2 ON (Time)

Clock setting

(see page 17)

Daily 3 Timer

DAILY 3 ON (Time)

ON (Time) REC TMR

Recording Timer

2 Activate the selected Timer.

SET

1

Ex. When Daily Timer 1 (DAILY 1) is activated

3 Wait until the indication goes off.

32

ChoiceMenu.fm Page 33 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:32 PM

Remote control

, , ,

SHIFT

Setup Menu Icons

The icon for the selected Setup Menu will be highlighted.

Ex.: LANGUAGE Setup Menu is selected.

1 2 3 4

LANGUAGE

MENU LANGUAGE

AUDIO LANGUAGE

SUBTITLE

ON SCREEN LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

Setup Menu Operations

10 keys

SET UP

ENTER

.

Operating Procedure

Remote

ONLY

You can use the Setup Menus only when a disc is selected as the source and its playback is not yet started.

Ex.: Selecting “STILL PICTURE” for “FILE TYPE”:

1

Display the Setup Menu.

SET UP

MENU

LANGUAGE

MENU LANGUAGE

AUDIO LANGUAGE

SUBTITLE

ON SCREEN LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

(at the same time)

2

Select one of the Setup Menus.

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

PICTURE

MONITOR TYPE

PICTURE SOURCE

SCREEN SAVER

FILE TYPE

4:3 LB

AUTO

ON

AUDIO

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

3

Select the item you want to adjust.

PICTURE

MONITOR TYPE

PICTURE SOURCE

SCREEN SAVER

FILE TYPE

4:3 LB

AUTO

ON

AUDIO

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

4

Display the pop-up window.

ENTER PICTURE

MONITOR TYPE

PICTURE SOURCE

SCREEN SAVER

FILE TYPE

4:3 LB

AUTO

ON

STILL PICTURE

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT . USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

5

Select the desired option in the pop-up window.

PICTURE

MONITOR TYPE

PICTURE SOURCE

SCREEN SAVER

FILE TYPE

4:3 LB

AUTO

ON

STILL PICTURE

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT . USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

1 LANGUAGE Setup Menu

2 PICTURE Setup Menu

3 AUDIO Setup Menu

4 OTHERS Setup Menu

33

ChoiceMenu.fm Page 34 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:32 PM

6

Finish the setting.

ENTER

7

Repeat steps 3 to 4 to set other items on the same

Setup Menu.

Repeat steps 2 to 4 to set other items on another Setup

Menu.

SUBTITLE

Some discs have multiple subtitle languages.

Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,

GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see

“Language Code List” on page 43) or “OFF (no subtitle).”

ON SCREEN LANGUAGE

Select one of the languages shown on the TV from—

ENGLISH, SPANISH and CHINESE.

To exit from the Setup Menu

SET UP

MENU

PICTURE Setup Menu

You can select the desired options concerning a picture or monitor screen.

(at the same time)

PICTURE

MONITOR TYPE

PICTURE SOURCE

SCREEN SAVER

FILE TYPE

4:3 LB

AUTO

ON

AUDIO

LANGUAGE Setup Menu

You can select the initial languages for disc playback. You can also select the language shown on the TV screen while operating this System.

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

LANGUAGE

MENU LANGUAGE

AUDIO LANGUAGE

SUBTITLE

ON SCREEN LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

MENU LANGUAGE

Some discs have multiple menu languages.

Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,

GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see

“Language Code List” on page 43).

AUDIO LANGUAGE

Some discs have multiple audio languages.

Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,

GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see

“Language Code List” on page 43).

MONITOR TYPE

Select the monitor type of your TV to play DVD Video recorded with aspect ratio of 16:9.

For the multi-color system TV

When you use a multi-color system TV, you can change the color system of the System automatically by selecting

“MULTI” options for the monitor type. In this case, the color system of the System is changed to match to that of the loaded disc regardless of the VIDEO OUT SELECT setting

(see page 6).

Select one of the following:

16:9 / 16:9 MULTI:

Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 16:9 (wide

TV).

4:3 LB (Letter Box) / 4:3 MULTI LB:

Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3

(conventional TV). While viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars appear on the top and the bottom of the screen.

4:3 PS (Pan Scan) / 4:3 MULTI PS:

Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3. While viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars do not appear; however, the left and right edges of the pictures will not be shown on the screen.

34

ChoiceMenu.fm Page 35 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:32 PM

Ex.: 16:9 Ex.: 4:3 LB Ex: 4:3 PS

AUDIO Setup Menu

You can adjust the sound settings of the System.

AUDIO

DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT

DOWN MIX

D. RANGE COMPRESSION

STREAM/PCM

DOLBY SURROUND

AUTO

PICTURE SOURCE

You can obtain optimal picture quality by selecting an appropriate option—picture source type (either video source or film source).

Select one of the following:

AUTO:

FILM:

Normally select this.

When playing back a disc containing both video and film sources, the System automatically changes the processing to match it to the picture type (film or video source) of the current chapter.

To play a film source disc.

VIDEO: To play a video source disc.

SCREEN SAVER

You can activate or deactivate screen saver while operating the built-in disc player.

Select one of the following:

ON: The pictures on the TV becomes dark when no operation is done for about 5 minutes.

OFF: To cancel the screen saver.

FILE TYPE

If both audio tracks (MP3 or WMA files) and still picture

(JPEG files) are recorded on a disc, you can select which to play.

Select one of the following:

AUDIO: To play MP3/WMA files.

STILL PICTURE: To play JPEG files.

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT

When using the digital output terminal on the rear, set this correctly according to the connected component.

Select one of the following:

PCM ONLY: To connect to a linear PCM digital equipment such as an MD recorder.

DOLBY DIGITAL

/PCM:

To connect to a Dolby Digital decoder or an amplifier with a built-in Dolby

Digital decoder.

STREAM/PCM: To connect to a DTS decoder or an amplifier with a built-in DTS decoder.

• See also “DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals” on page 45.

DOWN MIX

When playing a multi-channel DVD, the System converts the signals into 2 channels.

Downmix setting is effective for the speaker output (and digital audio output if “DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” is set to “PCM ONLY”) from this System.

Select one of the following:

DOLBY

SURROUND:

To connect an amplifier with the Dolby

Pro Logic decoder.

STEREO: To connect a conventional stereo amplifier, receiver, MD player, TV, etc.

35

ChoiceMenu.fm Page 36 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:32 PM

D. RANGE COMPRESSION

You can compress the dynamic range (the difference between the loudest sound and the softest sound) to enjoy a powerful sound even at a low volume level when listening to

Dolby Digital software. This is useful at night.

• The effectiveness varies depends on software.

Select one of the following:

AUTO: To enjoy powerful sounds with full dynamic range.

ON: Best for watching a movie at a low volume level.

ON SCREEN GUIDE

You can activate or deactivate the on-screen guide icons (see page 13).

• When recording the picture on a VCR, select “OFF” to avoid recording the guide icons on your video tape.

Select one of the following:

ON: To activate the on-screen guide icons.

OFF: To cancel the on-screen guide icons.

OTHERS Setup Menu

You can change some other convenient functions.

RESUME

O T H E R S

RESUME

ON SCREEN GUIDE

AV COMPULINK MODE

PARENTAL LOCK

ON

ON

DVD1

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

You can activate or deactivate Resume for disc playback

(see page 13).

Select one of the following:

ON: To activate Resume.

OFF: To cancel Resume.

AV COMPULINK MODE

When connecting the System to a JVC’s TV with the AV

COMPU LINK remote control system, select the proper setting.

Select one of the following:

DVD1: To connect to the VIDEO-3 Input jacks on the

TV.

DVD2:

DVD3:

To connect to the VIDEO-1 Input jacks on the

TV.

To connect to the VIDEO-2 Input jacks on the

TV.

• For details, see “AV COMPU LINK remote control system” on page 6.

PARENTAL LOCK

Select this to enter the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.

See the section that follows.

36

ChoiceMenu.fm Page 37 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:32 PM

Restricting the Review

—Parental Lock

Remote

ONLY

You can restrict playback of DVD Video containing violent scenes and those unsuitable for your family members. Once you have set the rating level, such violent scenes (for which a higher level than you set is assigned) may be skipped or changed to another scene (depending on how the disc is programmed).

To set Parental Lock

Set the rating level—Level 1 (most restrictive) to Level 8

(least restrictive).

1

Display the Setup Menu.

SET UP

MENU

LANGUAGE

MENU LANGUAGE

AUDIO LANGUAGE

SUBTITLE

ON SCREEN LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

5

Select “COUNTRY CODE,” then display the pop-up window.

ENTER

PA R E N TA L L O C K

COUNTRY CODE

SET LEVEL

PASSWORD

EXIT

GW

GY

HK

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

6

Select the country code of your area.

• See “Country/Area Codes List” on page 44 to find your country code.

ENTER

SELECT

ENTER

(at the same time)

2

Select the OTHERS Setup Menus.

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

O T H E R S

RESUME

ON SCREEN GUIDE

AV COMPULINK MODE

PARENTAL LOCK

ON

ON

DVD1

The System automatically enters “SET LEVEL” mode.

7

Make sure “SET LEVEL” is selected, then display the pop-up window.

ENTER

PA R E N TA L L O C K

COUNTRY CODE

SET LEVEL

PASSWORD

EXIT

5

4

3

8

7

8

Set the rating level (NONE, 8 – 1).

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

ENTER

3

Select “PARENTAL LOCK.”

O T H E R S

RESUME

ON SCREEN GUIDE

AV COMPULINK MODE

PARENTAL LOCK

ON

ON

DVD1

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

4

Enter the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.

ENTER

PA R E N TA L L O C K

COUNTRY CODE

SET LEVEL

PASSWORD

EXIT

HK

NONE

_ _ _ _

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

The System automatically enters “PASSWORD” entry mode.

9

Make sure “PASSWORD” is selected, then enter any

4-digit number for your password.

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

REV. MODE

7 8

PROGRESSIVE

0

FM MODE

9

ENTER

10

Finish the setting.

ENTER

37

ChoiceMenu.fm Page 38 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:32 PM

To change the setting

1

Display the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.

• Follow steps 1 to 4 of “To set Parental Lock.”

To release Parental Lock temporarily

When you set a strict rating level, some discs may not be played back at all. When you try to play such a disc, the following screen appears on the TV.

PA R E N TA L L O C K

COUNTRY CODE

SET LEVEL

PASSWORD

EXIT

HK

4

_ _ _ _

PA R E N TA L L O C K

TEMPORARY RELEASE

NOT RELEASE

PASSWORD _ _ _ _

SELECT

ENTER

PASSWORD? ••• PRESS 0 ~ 9 KEYS

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

“PASSWORD” is automatically selected.

• You cannot select any item other than “EXIT” until you enter the correct password.

2

Enter your password.

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

REV. MODE

7 8

PROGRESSIVE

0

FM MODE

9

ENTER

• If you enter a wrong password, “– – – –” appears again.

If you missed three times, “EXIT” is automatically selected. In this case, press ENTER to exit from the

PARENTAL LOCK submenu.

• If you forget your password, enter “8888.”

3

Change the settings.

• Follow steps 5 to 8 of “To set Parental Lock.”

4

Enter your password again (after selecting

“PASSWORD” manually if necessary).

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

REV. MODE

7 8

PROGRESSIVE

0

FM MODE

9

ENTER

• If you want to change a password, enter a new four digit number in this step.

SELECT

ENTER

PASSWORD? ••• PRESS 0 ~ 9 KEYS

1

Select “TEMPORARY RELEASE,” then ENTER.

“PASSWORD” is automatically selected.

ENTER

• If you do not play back such a disc, select “NOT

RELEASE,” then ENTER. Then eject the disc.

2

Enter your password.

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

REV. MODE

7 8

PROGRESSIVE

0

FM MODE

9

ENTER

• If you enter a wrong password three times, “NOT

RELEASE” is automatically selected. In this case, press

ENTER. Then eject the disc.

38

AdditonalInfo.fm Page 39 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:33 PM

Additional Information

Learning More about This System

Getting Started

(see pages 3 to 6)

Changing the Scanning Mode

• To enjoy the progressive video picture, connect a TV with the progressive video input using component video cord.

Before Operating the System

(see pages 7 to 9)

Playable Disc Types:

• If you play back an NTSC disc with this setting set to “PAL,” you can watch the playback pictures (the disc will be reproduced using “PAL 60” format), but the TV screen may roll over upward and downward rapidly.

• If you play back a PAL disc with this setting set to “NTSC,” you can watch the playback pictures, but the following symptoms may occur:

– The items on the disc menu will be blurred, and be shown slightly shifted when highlighted.

– The aspect ratio of the picture may differ from the original aspect ratio.

– The picture movement is not smooth.

Daily Operations—Playback

(see pages 10 to 14)

Listening to the Radio:

• If you store a new station into an occupied preset number, the previously stored station in that number will be erased.

• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure occurs, the preset stations will be erased in a few days. If this happens, preset the stations again.

Playing Back a Tape:

• It is not recommended to use the C-120 or longer tapes. These tapes easily jams in the pinch rollers and the capstans, and may cause characteristic deterioration.

Playing Back a Disc:

• For MP3/WMA playback...

– This System cannot play “packet write” discs.

– MP3/WMA discs are required a longer readout time than regular CDs. (It depends on the complexity of the group/file configuration.)

– Some MP3/WMA files cannot be played back and will be skipped. This result from their recording processes and conditions.

– When making MP3/WMA discs, use ISO 9660 Level 1 or

Level 2 for the disc format.

– This System can play back MP3/WMA files with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).

– It is recommended that you make each MP3 file at a sampling rate of 44.1 kHz and at bit rate of 128 kbps. This

System cannot play back files made at bit rate of less than 64 kbps.

– This System can recognize the total of 1000 tracks and of 99 groups (each group can contain up to 150 tracks). Those exceeding the maximum number cannot be recognized.

– Playback order of MP3/WMA tracks may be different from the one you have intended while recording (see page 40). If a folder does not include MP3/WMA tracks, they are ignored.

• When using an 8 cm disc, place it on the inner circle of the disc tray.

• On some DVD, SVCD, or VCD discs, the actual operations may be different from what is explained in this manual, due to the programming and disc structure; such differences are not a malfunction of this System.

• Some DVD Audio discs prohibit downmixed output. When you play back such a disc, “LR ONLY” appears on the display and the System plays back the left front and right front signals.

• 3D Phonic setting is also applied to the optical digital output signals through the DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT terminal.

• When using Resume on SVCD or VCD with PBC, the playback might start on a position slightly different from where you have stopped.

• You can use Resume only for the DVD/SVCD/VCD except for some discs—depending how the disc is programmed.

Daily Operations—Sound & Other Adjustments

(see pages 15 to 17)

Adjusting the Volume:

• Be sure to turn down the volume before connecting or putting the headphones.

Adjusting the Sound:

• This function also affects the sound through the headphones.

Setting the Clock:

• “0:00” will flash on the display until you set the clock.

• The clock may gain or lose 1 to 2 minutes per month. If this happens, reset the clock.

Unique DVD/VCD Operations

(see pages 18 to 20)

• During slow-motion playback, no sound will be reproduced.

• While zoomed in, the picture may look coarse.

Advanced Disc Operations

(see pages 21 to 23)

Programming the Playing Order—Program Play:

• If you try to program a 100th track, “MEM FULL” appears on the display.

• While programming steps...

Your entry will be ignored if you have tried to program an item number that does not exist on the disc (for example, selecting track 14 on a disc that only has 12 tracks).

Playing at Random—Random Play:

• The 4 button does not work for skipping chapters or tracks, but only work for going back to the beginning of the current chapter or track.

39

AdditonalInfo.fm Page 40 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:33 PM

On-Screen Disc Operations

(see pages 24 to 28)

• For JPEG files playback...

– It is recommended that you record a file at 640 x 480 resolution. (If a file has been recorded at a resolution of more than 640 x 480, it will take a long time to be shown.)

– This System can play only baseline JPEG files. Progressive

JPEG files or lossless JPEG files cannot be played.

Baseline JPEG format: Used for digital cameras, web, etc.

Progressive JPEG format: Used for web.

Lossless JPEG format: An old type and rarely used now.

– This System may not play back JPEG files properly which are recorded by the devices other than digital still camera.

– If progressive or lossless JPEG files are played back, a black screen appears. In this case, stop playback and select a baseline JPEG file. Note that it may take a long time to select another file.

Advanced Tape Operations

(see pages 29 to 30)

Recording on a Tape:

• The recording level is automatically set correctly. Thus, you can adjust the sound you are actually listening to without affecting the recording level.

• There is leader tape which cannot be recorded onto at the start and end of cassette tapes. Thus, when recording CDs or radio broadcasts, wind the leader tape first to ensure that the recording will be made without any music part lost.

• If you start recording with no cassette inserted, “NO TAPE” appears on the display. If a protected tape has been inserted,

“NO REC” appears.

• When using Reverse Mode for recording, start recording in the forward (

3

) direction first; otherwise, recording will stop when only one side (reverse) of the tape is recorded.

• You can also change Reverse Mode setting ( after starting recording.

and

• You cannot open or close the disc tray while recording.

)

Synchronized Disc Recording:

• When the tape reaches its end in the forward direction ( during recording with Reverse Mode set to

3

)

, the last tune will be re-recorded at the beginning of the reverse side.

Timer Operations

(see pages 31 to 32)

• When using an external component—“AUX” for the playback source, set the timer built in the component at the same time.

• Before turning off the power, do not forget to prepare the required materials—a disc or tape for playback and a recordable tape for recording.

• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure occurs, the timer will be canceled. You need to set the clock first, then the timer again.

• Without stopping the recording, you cannot change the source after Recording Timer start recording.

• If you set the Sleep Timer after Daily Timer starts playing the selected source, Daily Timer is canceled.

• If you set the Sleep Timer after Recording Timer starts recording, Recording Timer is canceled, but recording continues until Sleep Timer shuts off the power.

Setup Menu Operations

(see pages 33 to 38)

LANGUAGE:

• When the language you have selected for “MENU

LANGUAGE,” “AUDIO LANGUAGE,” or “SUBTITLE” is not recorded on a disc, the original language is used as the initial language.

PICTURE—MONITOR TYPE:

• Even if “4:3 PS” is selected, the screen size may become 4:3 letter box with some DVD Video discs. This depends on how the discs are recorded.

• When you select “16:9” for a picture whose aspect ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly changes due to the process for converting the picture width.

AUDIO—DOWN MIX:

• This setting is not effective when DTS multi-channel software is played back.

OTHERS—ON SCREEN GUIDE:

• Setup Menus and on-screen bar will be displayed (and recorded) even though this function is set to “OFF.”

Subtitles and the information for zooming in always appear on the display regardless of this setting.

MP3/WMA/JPEG groups/tracks configuration

This System plays back the tracks as follows.

Level 1

ROOT

Level 2

Hierarchy

Level 3 Level 4

01 03 04

02

1

2

3

4

5

6

05

7

8

Level 5

9

10

11

12

01

Group with its play order

1

Track with its play order

40

AdditonalInfo.fm Page 41 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:33 PM

Maintenance

To get the best performance of the System, keep your discs, tapes, and mechanism clean.

Handling discs

• When removing the disc from its case, hold it at the edge while pressing the center hole lightly.

• Do not touch the shiny surface of the disc, or bend the disc.

• Put the disc back in its case after use to prevent warping.

• Be careful not to scratch the surface of the disc.

• Avoid exposure to direct sunlight, temperature extremes, and moisture.

To clean the disc:

Wipe the disc with a soft cloth in a straight line from center to edge.

Cleaning the System

• Stains should be wiped off with a soft cloth. If the System is heavily stained, wipe it with a cloth soaked in water-diluted neutral detergent and wrung well, then wipe clean with a dry cloth.

• Since the System may deteriorate in quality, become damaged or get its paint peeled off, be careful about the following:

– DO NOT wipe it with a hard cloth.

– DO NOT wipe it strongly.

– DO NOT wipe it with thinner or benzine.

– DO NOT apply any volatile substance such as insecticides to it.

• DO NOT allow any rubber or plastic to remain in contact for a long time.

Handling cassette tapes

• If the tape is loose in its cassette, take up the slack by inserting a pencil in one of the reels and rotate it.

– If the tape is loose, it may get stretched, cut, or caught in the cassette.

• Be careful not to touch the tape surface.

• Avoid the following places to store the tape—in dusty places, in direct sunlight or heat, in moist areas, on a TV or speaker, or near a magnet.

To keep the best recording and playback sound quality

• Use a cotton swab moistened with alcohol to clean the heads, capstans, and pinch rollers.

• Use a head demagnetizer (available at electronics and audio shops) to demagnetize the heads (when the System turned off).

41

AdditonalInfo.fm Page 42 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:33 PM

Troubleshooting

If you are having a problem with your System, check this list for a possible solution before calling for service.

General:

Adjustments or settings are suddenly canceled before you finish.

]

There is a time limit. Repeat the procedure again.

Operations are disabled.

]

The built-in microprocessor may malfunction due to external electrical interference.

Unplug the AC power cord and then plug it back in.

Unable to operate the System from the remote control.

]

The path between the remote control and the remote sensor on the System is blocked.

]

The batteries are exhausted.

No sound is heard.

]

Speaker connections are incorrect or loose.

]

Headphones are connected.

No picture appears on the screen.

]

The video cord connections are incorrect or loose.

No picture is displayed on the TV, the picture is blurred, or the picture is divided into two parts.

]

The System is connected to a TV which does not support progressive scanning.

The left and right edges of the picture are missing on the screen.

]

Select “4:3 LB” for “MONITOR TYPE” (see page 34).

Radio Operations:

Hard to listen to broadcasts because of noise.

]

Antennas connections are incorrect or loose.

]

]

The AM loop antenna is too close to the System.

The FM antenna is not properly extended and positioned.

Disc Operations:

The disc does not play.

]

The disc is placed upside down. Place the disc with the label side up.

ID3 Tag on an MP3/WMA disc cannot be shown.

]

There are two types of ID3 Tag—Version 1 and Version 2.

This System can only show ID3 Tag Version 1.

MP3/WMA/JPEG groups and tracks are not played back as you expect.

]

The playing order is determined when the disc was recorded. It depends on the writing application.

MP3/WMA or JPEG tracks are not played back.

]

The inserted disc may include both type of tracks (MP3/

WMA files and JPEG files). In this case, you can only play

] back the files selected by the “FILE TYPE” setting (see page 35).

You have changed the “FILE TYPE” setting after you inserted a disc. In this case, reload the disc.

“NO AUDIO” appears.

]

This System cannot play back illegally produced DVD

Audio discs.

“LR ONLY” appears.

]

Some DVD Audio discs prohibit downmixed output. When you play back such a disc, this System plays back the left front and right front signals only.

The disc sound is discontinuous.

]

The disc is scratched or dirty.

The disc tray does not open or close.

]

The AC power cord is not plugged in.

]

Child Lock is in use (see page 23).

Tape Operations:

The cassette holder cannot be opened.

]

Power supply from the AC power cord has been cut off while the tape was running. Turn on the System.

Recordings:

Impossible to record.

]

Small tabs on the back of the cassette are removed. Cover the holes with adhesive tape.

Timer Operations:

Daily Timer and Recording Timer do not work.

]

The System has been turned on when the on-time comes.

Timer starts working only when the System is turned off.

Daily Timer does not start playback.

]

The disc loaded is a DVD video. Change the disc.

]

Title/group number and chapter/track number are not entered while setting the Daily Timer. Do not skip these steps when you want to play a disc using Daily Timer.

Setup Menu Operations:

No subtitle appears on the display though you have selected the initial subtitle language.

]

Some DVDs are programmed to always display no subtitle initially. If this happens, select the subtitle after starting play

(see page 18).

Audio language is different from the one you have selected as the initial audio language.

]

Some DVDs are programmed to always use the original language initially. If this happens, select the audio language after starting play (see page 19).

42

AdditionlList.fm Page 43 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:33 PM

Language Code List

EL

EO

ET

EU

FA

FI

FJ

FO

BO

BR

CA

CO

CS

CY

DA

DZ

AY

AZ

BA

BE

BG

BH

BI

BN

AA

AB

AF

AM

AR

AS

IK

IN

IS

IW

JI

HR

HU

HY

IA

IE

FY

GA

GD

GL

GN

GU

HA

HI

Tibetan

Breton

Catalan

Corsican

Czech

Welsh

Danish

Bhutani

Greek

Esperanto

Estonian

Basque

Persian

Finnish

Fiji

Faroese

Afar

Abkhazian

Afrikaans

Ameharic

Arabic

Assamese

Aymara

Azerbaijani

Bashkir

Byelorussian

Bulgarian

Bihari

Bislama

Bengali, Bangla

Frisian

Irish

Scots Gaelic

Galician

Guarani

Gujarati

Hausa

Hindi

Croatian

Hungarian

Armenian

Interlingua

Interlingue

Inupiak

Indonesian

Icelandic

Hebrew

Yiddish

Maori

Macedonian

Malayalam

Mongolian

Moldavian

Marathi

Malay (MAY)

Maltese

Burmese

Nauru

Nepali

Dutch

Norwegian

Occitan

(Afan) Oromo

Oriya

Javanese

Georgian

Kazakh

Greenlandic

Cambodian

Kannada

Korean (KOR)

Kashmiri

Kurdish

Kirghiz

Latin

Lingala

Laothian

Lithuanian

Latvian, Lettish

Malagasy

Panjabi

Polish

Pashto, Pushto

Portuguese

Quechua

Rhaeto-Romance

Kirundi

Rumanian

Russian

Kinyarwanda

Sanskrit

Sindhi

Sangho

Serbo-Croatian

Singhalese

Slovak

MY

NA

NE

NL

NO

OC

OM

OR

MI

MK

ML

MN

MO

MR

MS

MT

KU

KY

LA

LN

LO

LT

LV

MG

JW

KA

KK

KL

KM

KN

KO

KS

SA

SD

SG

SH

SI

SK

RM

RN

RO

RU

RW

PA

PL

PS

PT

QU

Turkmen

Tagalog

Setswana

Tonga

Turkish

Tsonga

Tatar

Twi

Ukrainian

Urdu

Uzbek

Vietnamese

Volapuk

Wolof

Xhosa

Yoruba

Zulu

Slovenian

Samoan

Shona

Somali

Albanian

Serbian

Siswati

Sesotho

Sundanese

Swedish

Swahili

Tamil

Telugu

Tajik

Thai

Tigrinya

UK

UR

UZ

VI

VO

WO

XH

YO

ZU

TK

TL

TN

TO

TR

TS

TT

TW

SU

SV

SW

TA

TE

TG

TH

TI

SL

SM

SN

SO

SQ

SR

SS

ST

43

AdditionlList.fm Page 44 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:33 PM

Country/Area Codes List

AZ

BA

BB

BD

BE

BF

AD

AE

AF

AG

AI

AL

AM

AN

AO

Andorra

United Arab Emirates

Afghanistan

Antigua and Barbuda

Anguilla

Albania

AQ

AR

AS

Armenia

Netherlands Antilles

Angola

Antarctica

Argentina

American Samoa

AT

AU

Austria

Australia

AW Aruba

Azerbaijan

Bosnia and Herzegovina

Barbados

Bangladesh

Belgium

Burkina Faso

BG

BH

BI

Bulgaria

Bahrain

Burundi

BJ Benin

BM Bermuda

BN Brunei Darussalam

BO

BR

BS

Bolivia

Brazil

Bahamas

BT

BV

Bhutan

Bouvet Island

BW Botswana

BY

BZ

CA

Belarus

Belize

Canada

CC

CF

Cocos (Keeling) Islands

Central African Republic

CG Congo

CH Switzerland

CI Côte d’Ivoire

CK Cook Islands

CL Chile

CM Cameroon

CN China

CO Colombia

CR Costa Rica

CU Cuba

CV

CX

CY

Cape Verde

Christmas Island

Cyprus

CZ

DE

DJ

Czech Republic

Germany

Djibouti

44

EG

EH

ER

ES

ET

FI

DK Denmark

DM Dominica

DO Dominican Republic

DZ

EC

EE

Algeria

Ecuador

Estonia

Egypt

Western Sahara

Eritrea

Spain

Ethiopia

Finland

FJ

FK

Fiji

Falkland Islands (Malvinas)

FM Micronesia (Federated States of)

FO Faroe Islands

FR

FX

France

France, Metropolitan

GA Gabon

GB United Kingdom

GD Grenada

GE Georgia

GF French Guiana

GH Ghana

GI Gibraltar

GL Greenland

GM Gambia

GN Guinea

GP Guadeloupe

GQ Equatorial Guinea

GR Greece

GS

GT

South Georgia and the South

Sandwich

Guatemala

GU Guam

GW Guinea-Bissau

GY Guyana

HK Hong Kong

HM Heard Island and McDonald

Islands

IL

IN

IO

IQ

IR

IS

IT

JM

HN Honduras

HR Croatia

HT Haiti

HU Hungary

ID Indonesia

IE Ireland

Israel

India

British Indian Ocean Territory

Iraq

Iran (Islamic Republic of)

Iceland

Italy

Jamaica

JO

JP

Jordan

Japan

KE Kenya

KG Kyrgyzstan

KH Cambodia

KI Kiribati

KM Comoros

KN Saint Kitts and Nevis

KP Korea, Democratic People’s

Republic of

KR Korea, Republic of

KW Kuwait

KY Cayman Islands

KZ Kazakhstan

LA Lao People’s Democratic

Republic

LB

LC

Lebanon

Saint Lucia

LI Liechtenstein

LK Sri Lanka

LR Liberia

LS

LT

LU

Lesotho

Lithuania

Luxembourg

LV

LY

Latvia

Libyan Arab Jamahiriya

MA Morocco

MC Monaco

MD Moldova, Republic of

MG Madagascar

MH Marshall Islands

ML Mali

MM Myanmar

MN Mongolia

MO Macau

MP Northern Mariana Islands

MQ Martinique

MR Mauritania

MS Montserrat

MT Malta

MU Mauritius

MV Maldives

MW Malawi

MX Mexico

MY Malaysia

MZ Mozambique

NA Namibia

NC New Caledonia

NE Niger

NF Norfolk Island

NG Nigeria

NI Nicaragua

NL Netherlands

NO Norway

AdditionlList.fm Page 45 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:33 PM

PE

PF

PG

PH

PK

PL

NP Nepal

NR Nauru

NU Niue

NZ New Zealand

OM Oman

PA Panama

Peru

French Polynesia

Papua New Guinea

Philippines

Pakistan

Poland

PM Saint Pierre and Miquelon

PN Pitcairn

PR Puerto Rico

PT Portugal

PW Palau

PY Paraguay

QA Qatar

RE Réunion

RO Romania

RU Russian Federation

RW Rwanda

SA Saudi Arabia

SB

SC

SD

Solomon Islands

Seychelles

Sudan

SE

SG

SH

SI

SJ

SK

Sweden

Singapore

Saint Helena

Slovenia

Svalbard and Jan Mayen

Slovakia

SL Sierra Leone

SM San Marino

SN Senegal

SO

SR

ST

Somalia

Suriname

Sao Tome and Principe

SV

SY

SZ

TC

TD

TF

El Salvador

Syrian Arab Republic

Swaziland

Turks and Caicos Islands

Chad

French Southern Territories

TG

TH

TJ

Togo

Thailand

Tajikistan

TK Tokelau

TM Turkmenistan

TN Tunisia

TO

TP

TR

Tonga

East Timor

Turkey

TT

TV

Trinidad and Tobago

Tuvalu

TW Taiwan

TZ Tanzania, United Republic of

UA Ukraine

UG Uganda

UM United States Minor Outlying

Islands

US United States

UY Uruguay

UZ Uzbekistan

VA Vatican City State (Holy See)

VC Saint Vincent and the Grenadines

VE Venezuela

VG Virgin Islands (British)

VI Virgin Islands (U.S.)

VN Vietnam

VU Vanuatu

WF Wallis and Futuna Islands

WS Samoa

YE Yemen

YT Mayotte

YU Yugoslavia

ZA South Africa

ZM Zambia

ZR Zaire

ZW Zimbabwe

DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals

DIGITAL AUDIO

OUTPUT

Playback disc

DVD Video with 48 kHz, 16/20/24 bit

Linear PCM with 96 kHz, Linear PCM with Dolby Digital with DTS

DVD Audio with 48/96/192 kHz,

16/20/24 bit Linear PCM with 44.1/88.2/176.4 kHz,

16/20/24 bit Linear PCM with Dolby Digital with DTS

SVCD, VCD, CD

CD with DTS

MP3/WMA disc

STREAM/PCM

DTS bitstream

Output Signals

DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM

48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM*

48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

Dolby Digital bitstream 48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

PCM ONLY

Dolby Digital bitstream

DTS bitstream

48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

DTS bitstream 44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

* While playing some DVDs, digital signals may be emitted at 20 bits or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the DVD

OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT terminal if the discs are not copy-protected.

45

Spec&Index.fm Page 46 Friday, May 28, 2004 1:29 PM

Specifications

Amplifier section

Output Power:

Audio Input

Digital output:

40 W (20 W + 20 W) at 4

AUX:

(10% THD)

400 mV/50 k

DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT:

–21 dBm to –15 dBm (660 nm ±30 nm)

Video output:

Color system:

VIDEO (composite):

S-VIDEO: Y (luminance)

C (chrominance, burst)

COMPONENT: (Y)

(P

B

/P

R

)

Speakers/Impedance:

NTSC/PAL selectable

1 V(p-p)/75

1 V(p-p)/75

0.286 V(p-p)/75

1 V(p-p)/75 Ω

0.7 V(p-p)/75

4

– 16

Tuner section

FM tuning range: 87.50 MHz – 108.00 MHz

AM (MW) tuning range:

531 kHz – 1 710 kHz (at 9 kHz intervals)

530 kHz – 1 710 kHz (at 10 kHz intervals)

Tape section

Frequency response:

Wow and flutter:

60 Hz – 14 000 Hz

0.15% (WRMS)

Disc player section

Playable disc: DVD Video/DVD Audio

CD/VCD/SVCD

CD-R/CD-RW (CD/SVCD/VCD/MP3/

WMA/JPEG format)

DVD-R/DVD-RW (Video format)

Dynamic range: 90 dB

Horizontal resolution:

Wow and flutter:

500 lines

Immeasurable

Speakers

Speaker units:

Impedance:

Dimensions (approx.):

Mass (approx.):

Full-range: 10 cm cone x 1

4 Ω

145 mm x 230 mm x 191 mm

(W/H/D)

1.8 kg each

Supplied Accessories

See page 3.

General

Power requirement:

Power consumption:

Dimensions (approx.):

Mass (approx.):

AC 220 V , 50 Hz/60 Hz

65 W (at operation)

1.3 W (on standby)

170 mm x 230 mm x 311 mm

(W/H/D)

4.8 kg

Parts Index

Refer to the pages to see how to use the buttons and controls.

Remote control

11, 12, 14,

16, 18–21,

26, 37

10, 13, 22, 28

9, 17

14

11, 16–20,

23

Main unit

8

Remote sensor

10, 11

10–13,

22, 28

30

11, 13

20

STANDBY/ON

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

REV. MODE

7

10

8

PROGRESSIVE

0

FM MODE

9

10

SLEEP

A.STANDBY

CLOCK/

TIMER

SET

TOP MENU

SET UP

MENU

ENTER

ON SCREEN CANCEL

RETURN

DVD/CD TAPE

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

PLAY

MODE

GROUP/TITLE SLOW – SLOW +

DISPLAY

3D

PHONIC

BASS/

TREBLE RHYTHM AX

DIMMER

FADE

MUTING

VOLUME

RM-SUXP450U REMOTE CONTROL

STANDBY/ON

3D

PHONIC

RHYTHM AX

DVD/CD TAPE FM/AM AUX

REC DOWN UP

VOLUME

10

17

17, 31

14, 20,

25–31, 33

11, 13,

20–23, 28

15

15

10, 15

16

15

12

14

15

10, 11,

15

13, 23

10

PHONES

46

UX-P450UB.book Page 2 Thursday, May 27, 2004 8:19 PM

VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED

EN, CS

© 2004 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED 0504AIMMDWJEM

Cover[A].fm Page 1 Friday, June 11, 2004 3:49 PM

®

MICRO COMPONENT SYSTEM

UX-P450

—Consists of CA-UXP450 and SP-UXP450

SUPER VIDEO

INSTRUCTIONS

GVT0129-014B

[A]

Safty[A].fm Page 1 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:04 PM

Warnings, Cautions and Others

Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off completely (all lamps and indications go off). The STANDBY/ON any position does not disconnect the mains line.

button in

• When the unit is on standby, the STANDBY/ON lamp lights in red.

• When the unit is turned on, the STANDBY/ON lamp lights in green.

The power can be remote controlled.

CAUTION

To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.:

1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet.

2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.

CAUTION

• Do not block the ventilation openings or holes.

(If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a newspaper or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.)

• Do not place any naked flame sources, such as lighted candles, on the apparatus.

• When discarding batteries, environmental problems must be considered and local rules or laws governing the disposal of these batteries must be followed strictly.

• Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS

1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

2.

CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified service personnel.

3.

CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam.

4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED

INSIDE THE UNIT.

15 cm

Caution: Proper Ventilation

To avoid risk of electric shock and fire, and to prevent damage, locate the apparatus as follows:

1. Front: No obstructions and open spacing.

2. Sides/ Top/ Back: No obstructions should be placed in the areas shown by the dimensions below.

3. Bottom: Place on the level surface. Maintain an adequate air path for ventilation by placing on a stand with a height of 10 cm or more.

1 cm

15 cm

1 cm 15 cm

15 cm

15 cm

SP-UXP450 CA-UXP450 SP-UXP450

10 cm

CA-UXP450

G-1

UX-P450ATOC.fm Page 1 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:04 PM

Contents

Introduction ..................................................... 2

Precautions ......................................................................2

How to Read This Manual...............................................2

On-Screen Disc Operations .......................... 24

On-screen Bar Information............................................ 24

Operations Using the On-screen Bar ............................. 25

Selecting Browsable Still Pictures................................. 27

Operations on the CONTROL Screen ........................... 27

Getting Started................................................. 3

Step 1: Unpack ................................................................3

Step 2: Prepare the Remote Control ................................3

Step 3: Hook Up ..............................................................4

Setting the Video Output Selector ...................................6

Changing the Scanning Mode .........................................6

Advanced Tape Operations .......................... 29

Recording on a Tape...................................................... 29

Synchronized Disc Recording ....................................... 30

Before Operating the System.......................... 7

Playable Disc Types ........................................................7

Display Indicators............................................................8

Timer Operations .......................................... 31

Setting the Timer ........................................................... 31

Setup Menu Operations ................................ 33

Operating Procedure ...................................................... 33

Restricting the Review—Parental Lock ........................ 37

Daily Operations—Playback ........................ 10

Listening to the Radio ...................................................11

Playing Back a Tape ......................................................12

Playing Back a Disc.......................................................12

Daily Operations—Sound & Other

Adjustments ................................................... 15

Adjusting the Volume....................................................15

Adjusting the Sound ......................................................15

Presetting Automatic DVD Video Sound

Increase Level ............................................................16

Changing the Display Brightness ..................................16

Changing the Picture Tone ............................................16

Setting the Clock ...........................................................17

Turning Off the Power Automatically...........................17

Additional Information................................. 39

Learning More about This System ................................ 39

Maintenance .................................................................. 41

Troubleshooting............................................................. 42

Language Code List....................................................... 43

Country/Area Codes List............................................... 44

DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals ..................... 45

Specifications ................................................................ 46

Parts Index ..................................................................... 46

Unique DVD/VCD Operations ..................... 18

Selecting the View Angle ..............................................18

Selecting the Subtitle Language ....................................18

Selecting the Audio Track .............................................19

Playing Back a Bonus Group ........................................19

Special Effect Playback .................................................20

Advanced Disc Operations............................ 21

Programming the Playing Order—Program Play..........21

Playing at Random—Random Play...............................22

Playing Repeatedly ........................................................23

Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock ........................23

1

Introduction.fm Page 2 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:03 PM

2

Introduction

Precautions

Installation

• Install in a place which is level, dry and neither too hot nor too cold—between 5°C and 35°C.

• Install the System in a location with adequate ventilation to prevent internal heat buildup inside the System.

DO NOT install the System in a location near heat sources, or in a place subject to direct sunlight, excessive dust or vibration.

How to Read This Manual

To make this manual as simple and easy-to-understand as possible, we have adapted the following methods:

• Button and control operations are explained as listed in the table below.

• Some related tips and notes are explained later in the sections “Additional Information” and

“Troubleshooting,” but not in the same section explaining the operations.

If you want to know more about the functions, or if you have a doubt about the functions, go to these sections and you will find the answers.

• Leave sufficient distance between the System and the TV.

• Keep the speakers away from the TV to avoid interference with TV.

Power sources

• When unplugging the System from the wall outlet, always pull on the plug, not the AC power cord.

Indicates that you press the button briefly .

Indicates that you press the button briefly and repeatedly until an option you want is selected.

DO NOT handle the AC power cord with wet hands.

Indicates that you press one of the buttons.

Moisture condensation

Moisture may condense on the lenses inside the System in the following cases:

• After starting to heat the room

• In a damp room

• If the System is brought directly from a cold to a warm place

Should this occur, the System may malfunction. In this case, leave the System turned on for a few hours until the moisture evaporates, unplug the AC power cord, then plug it in again.

Others

• Should any metallic object or liquid fall into the System, unplug the AC power cord and consult your dealer before operating any further.

2 sec.

Indicates that you press and hold the button for specified seconds.

• The number inside the arrow indicates the period of press (in this example, 2 seconds).

• If no number is inside the arrow, press and hold until the entire procedure is complete or until you get a result you want.

Indicates that you turn the control toward the specified direction(s).

DO NOT disassemble the System since there are no user serviceable parts inside.

• If you are not going to operate the System for an extended period of time, unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet.

If anything goes wrong, unplug the AC power cord and consult your dealer.

Remote

ONLY

Main Unit

ONLY

Indicates that this operation is only possible using the remote control.

Indicates that this operation is only possible using the buttons and controls on the main unit.

Introduction.fm Page 3 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:03 PM

Getting Started

Step 1

:Unpack the package and check the accessories.

Step

1

: Unpack

After unpacking, check to be sure that you have all the following items. The number in parentheses indicates the quantity of each piece supplied.

• FM antenna (1)

• AM loop antenna (1)

• Composite video cord (1)

• Remote control (1)

• Batteries (2)

If any item is missing, consult your dealer immediately.

Step

2

: Prepare the Remote Control

Insert the batteries into the remote control by matching the polarity (+ and –) correctly.

1

Step 2

: Prepare the remote control.

2

Step 3

: Hook up the components such as AM/FM antennas, speakers, etc. (see pages 4 to 6).

3

R6(SUM-3)/AA(15F)

Finally plug the AC power cord.

Now you can operate the System.

• DO NOT use an old battery together with a new one.

• DO NOT use different types of batteries together.

• DO NOT expose batteries to heat or flame.

• DO NOT leave the batteries in the battery compartment when you are not going to use the remote control for an extended period of time. Otherwise, the remote control will be damaged from battery leakage.

3

Connection.fm Page 4 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:02 PM

Step

3

: Hook Up

If you need more detailed information, see page 6.

Illustrations of the input/output terminals below are typical examples.

When you connect other components, refer also to their manuals since the terminal names actually printed on the rear may vary.

Turn the power off to all components before connections.

For better FM/AM reception

AM loop antenna

Keep it connected.

Outdoor FM antenna

(not supplied)

Before connecting optical digital cord

Remove the protective cap from the DVD

OPTICAL DIGITAL

OUT terminal.

Vinyl-covered wire (not supplied)

Extend it horizontally.

TV

DECODER

AUX

VCR, etc.

VIDEO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

Y

P

B

P

R

AV

COMPU LINK

Disconnect the supplied FM antenna, and connect to an outdoor FM antenna using a 75

wire with coaxial type connector.

Yellow

OR

Composite video cord (supplied)

S-video cord (not supplied)

OR

Green

Blue

Red Component video cord (not supplied)

AV COMPU LINK cord (not supplied)

(cord with monaural mini plug)

• For details, see “AV COMPU LINK remote control system” on page 6.

OPTICAL

DIGITAL IN

Optical digital cord (not supplied)

AUDIO OUT

LEFT

RIGHT

White

Red Audio cord (not supplied)

4

Connection.fm Page 5 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:02 PM

AM loop antenna (supplied)

Turn it until the best reception is obtained.

FM antenna (supplied)

Extend it so that you can obtain the best reception.

VIDEO

SELECT

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

PAL

NTSC

Y

P

B

S-VIDEO

OP

REVERSE

To a wall outlet

Plug the AC power cord only after all connections and selector settings on the rear are complete.

5

Connection.fm Page 6 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:02 PM

To connect the AM loop antenna

1 Hold

2 Insert

3 Release

IMPORTANT

The speakers are magnetically shielded to avoid color distortions on TVs. However, if not installed properly, it may cause color distortions. So, pay attention to the following when installing the speakers.

• When placing the speakers near a TV set, turn off the

TV’s main power switch or unplug it before installing the speakers. Then wait at least 30 minutes before turning on the TV’s main power switch again.

Some TVs may still be affected even though you have followed the above. If this happens, move the speakers away from the TV.

• If the AM loop antenna wire or speaker cords are covered with vinyl, remove the vinyl to expose the tip of the antenna by twisting the vinyl.

• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch any other terminals, connecting cords and power cord. Also, keep the antennas away from metallic parts of the System, connecting cords, and the AC power cord. This could cause poor reception.

To connect the speaker cords

Connect the right speaker to the RIGHT terminals, and the left speaker to the LEFT terminals.

AV COMPU LINK remote control system

This system allows you to use JVC’s TV with simple operations; by starting playing back a disc, the TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture.

• To use AV COMPU LINK, you need to connect the

System and the TV by using a cord with monaural miniplugs (not supplied) in addition to the video input/output connection through the COMPONENT jacks, S-VIDEO jack or VIDEO (composite) jack on the rear.

1 Hold

2 Insert

3 Release

• When connecting the speaker cords, match the polarity of the speaker terminals: Red cord to (+) and black cord to (–).

Setting the Video Output Selector

You can select the video output to match it to the color system of your TV.

NTSC: For an NTSC TV.

PAL: For a PAL TV.

VIDEO

OUT

SELECT

PAL

NTSC

• When using a multi-color system

TV, either position will work.

• DO NOT connect more than one speaker to each terminal.

• DO NOT allow the conductor of the speaker cords to be in touch with the metallic parts of the System.

Changing the Scanning Mode

Remote

ONLY

This System supports progressive scanning.

If you connect a progressive TV through the COMPONENT jacks, you can enjoy a high quality picture from the built-in

DVD player by selecting “PROGRE.”

PROGRESSIVE

0

PROGRE

INTER

PROGRE

INTER

(at the same time)

Progressive scanning. For a progressive TV.

Interlaced scanning. For a conventional TV.

6

Connection.fm Page 7 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:02 PM

Before Operating the System

Playable Disc Types

This unit has been designed to play back the following discs:

Disc Type Mark (Logo)

Video

Format

Region

Code*

Number

DVD Video

4 or

ALL

DVD Audio

Video CD

(VCD)

Super Video

CD (SVCD)

DIGITAL VIDEO

SUPER VIDEO

NTSC or

PAL

DVD Video—digital audio formats

The System can play back the following digital audio formats.

• Linear PCM: Uncompressed digital audio, the same format used for CDs and most studio masters.

• Dolby Digital: Compressed digital audio, developed by

Dolby Laboratories, which enables multi-channel encode to create the realistic surround sound.

• DTS (Digital Theater Systems): Compressed digital audio, developed by Digital Theater Systems, Inc., which enables multi-channel like Dolby Digital. As the compression ratio is lower than for Dolby Digital, it provides wider dynamic range and better separation.

When playing a multi-channel encoded DVD, the System properly converts these multi-channel signals into 2 channels, and emits the downmixed sound from the speakers.

• To enjoy the powerful sound of these multi-channel encoded DVDs, connect a proper decoder or an amplifier with a proper built-in decoder to the digital output terminal on the rear.

Audio CD

CD-R

CD-RW

DVD-R

DVD-RW

COMPACT

DIGITAL AUDIO

The System can play back CD-R or CD-RW recorded in the Audio CD, Video CD, SVCD,

MP3, WMA, and JPEG formats.

The System can play back DVD-R or DVD-

RW recorded in the video format.

In addition to the above discs, this System can play back audio data recorded on CD Text, CD-G (CD Graphics), and CD-Extra.

• The following discs cannot be played back:

DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, DVD+R, DVD+RW, CD-I (CD-I

Ready), CD-ROM, Photo CD, etc.

Playing back these discs will generate noise and damage the speakers.

• In this manual, “file” and “track” are interchangeably used for MP3/WMA/JPEG operations.

* Note on Region Code

DVD players and DVDs have their own Region Code numbers.

This System can play back only DVDs recorded with the NTSC or PAL color system whose Region Code numbers including

“4.”

EX.:

If a DVD with the improper Region Code numbers is loaded,

“RGN ERR (Region Code Error)” appears on the display and playback will not start.

• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “MLP Lossless”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

• “DTS” and “DTS2.0

+DIGITAL OUT ” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

• This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by

Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by

Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT ALL HIGH

DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE FULLY

COMPATIBLE WITH THIS PRODUCT AND MAY

CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE

PICTURE. IN CASE OF 525 OR 625 PROGRESSIVE

SCAN PICTURE PROBLEMS, IT IS RECOMMENDED

THAT THE USER SWITCH THE CONNECTION TO

THE ‘STANDARD DEFINITION’ OUTPUT. IF THERE

ARE QUESTIONS REGARDING OUR TV SET

COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS MODEL 525p AND

625p DVD PLAYER, PLEASE CONTACT OUR

CUSTOMER SERVICE CENTER.

7

Connection.fm Page 8 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:02 PM

Display Indicators

The indications on the display teach you a lot of things while you are operating the System.

Before operating the System, be familiar with when and how the indicator illuminates on the display.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8

SLEEP MONO ST MP3 WMA 3DPHONIC REC

123 REC

RANDOM

PRGM ALL BONUS B.S.P.

A.STANDBY

9 p q w e

1 Rhythm Ax indicator

• Lights when Rhythm Ax is activated.

2 Daily Timer indicators

• : lights when Daily Timer stands by or is being preset.

• 1/2/3: lights when a Daily Timer (1, 2, or 3) stands by; flashes while setting or working.

• REC: lights when the Recording Timer stands by; flashes while setting or working.

3 SLEEP indicator

• Lights when the Sleep Timer is activated.

4 FM reception indicators

• MONO: lights while receiving an FM stereo station in monaural.

• ST (stereo): lights while an FM stereo station with sufficient signal strength is tuned in.

5 MP3/WMA indicators

• MP3: lights when an MP3 track is detected.

• WMA: lights when a WMA track is detected.

6 3D PHONIC indicator

• Lights when 3D Phonic is activated.

7 REC indicator

• Lights while recording.

8 Tape operation indicators

2 3

(tape direction):

– Lights to indicate the current tape running direction.

– Flashes slowly during playback and recording.

– Flashes quickly while rewinding a tape.

(reverse mode):

: tape play continues endlessly.

: tape automatically reverses once.

: tape play stops at the end of one side.

9 Disc operation indicators

• RANDOM: lights when Random Play is activated.

• PRGM (program): lights when Program Play is activated.

• (repeat)/ALL:

– ALL : lights when Disc Repeat is activated.

– : lights when any Repeat other than the above is activated.

p BONUS indicator

• Lights when a DVD Audio with a bonus group is detected.

q B.S.P. (Browsable Still Picture) indicator

• Lights when Browsable Still Pictures are detected while playing a DVD Audio.

w Main display

• While listening to radio: Band (or preset number) and station frequency appear.

• While selecting “AUX”: “AUX” appears.

• While playing a tape: “TAPE” appears.

• While playing a disc: See “Indications on the main display while operating a disc” on page 9.

e A(auto). STANDBY indicator

• Lights when Auto Standby is activated.

• Flashes when disc playback stops with Auto Standby activated.

8

Connection.fm Page 9 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:02 PM

Indications on the main display while operating a disc

While playing back a disc:

• DVD Video:

While disc play is stopped:

• DVD Video:

Current chapter no.

Elapsed playing time

• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current title and chapter numbers for a few seconds.

• DVD Audio: • DVD Audio:

Total title no.

Track no.

Current track no.

Elapsed playing time

• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current group and track numbers for a few seconds.

• Audio CD: • Audio CD:

Total group no.

Group no.

Current track no.

Elapsed playing time

• SVCD/VCD:

Total track no.

• SVCD/VCD:

Total playing time

Current track no.

Elapsed playing time *

* “PBC” appears while playing a disc with PBC.

• MP3/WMA:

Total track no.

Total playing time *

* Changes to “PBC” when stopping PBC playback.

• MP3/WMA:

Current track no.

Current track no.

Elapsed playing time

• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current group and track numbers for a few seconds.

• JPEG: • JPEG:

Current group no.

Current group no.

Current file no.

Current group no.

• If Resume is turned “ON” (see page 36), “RESUME” appears when you stop playback.

Current file no.

9

Basic.fm Page 10 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:00 PM

10 keys

ENTER

TOP MENU

2

8

GROUP/TITLE

4 / ¢

SHIFT

1

2

DVD/CD

3

4

VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

Daily Operations

—Playback

1

SET

MENU

, , ,

RETURN

7

1 / ¡

3D PHONIC

3

In this manual, the operation using the remote control is mainly explained; however, you can use the buttons and controls on the main unit if they have the same (or similar) name and marks.

1

Turn on the power.

The STANDBY/ON lamp on the main unit lights in green.

• Without pressing STANDBY/ON , the System turns on by pressing one of the source selecting buttons in the next step.

2

Select the source.

Playback automatically starts if the selected source is ready to start.

• If you press AUX, start playback source on the external component.

3

Adjust the volume.

4

Operate the target source as explained later.

To turn off (stand by) the unit

STANDBY/ON

The STANDBY/ON lamp on the main unit lights in red.

• A small amount of power is always consumed even while on standby.

For private listening

Connect a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack on the main unit. The sound will no longer come out of the speakers. Be sure to turn down the volume before connecting or putting the headphones.

• Disconnecting the headphones will activate the speakers again.

DO NOT turn off (stand by) the System with the volume set to an extremely high level;

Otherwise, the sudden blast of sound can damage your hearing, speakers and/or headphones when you turn on the System or start playback.

10

Basic.fm Page 11 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:00 PM

Listening to the Radio

To select the band (FM or AM)

FM AM

Remote

ONLY

To preset the stations

You can preset 30 FM and 15 AM stations.

1

2

Tune in to a station you want to preset.

• You can also store the monaural reception mode for FM preset stations if selected.

Activate the preset number entry mode.

SET

To tune in to a station

While FM or AM is selected...

Remote control: Main unit:

2

sec.

GROUP/TITLE

DOWN

2 sec.

UP

Frequency starts changing on the display.

When a station (frequency) with sufficient signal strength is tuned in, the frequency stops changing.

• When you repeatedly press the button, the frequency changes step by step.

To stop searching manually, press either button.

Remote

ONLY

If the received FM station is hard to listen

FM MODE

9

3

• Finish the following process while the indication on the display is flashing.

Select a preset number for the station you store.

AUDIO

1

SUB TITLE

2

ANGLE

3

ZOOM

4

REV. MODE

DVD LEVEL

5

7 8

VFP

6

FM MODE

9

10 10

Examples:

To select preset number 5, press

5.

To select preset number 15, press +10, then 5.

To select preset number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.

• You can also use the

¡

or

1

buttons.

4 Store the station.

SET

Remote

ONLY

To tune in to a preset station

1

Select the band (FM or AM).

(at the same time)

The MONO indicator lights on the display. Reception will improve though stereo effect is lost—Monaural reception mode.

To restore the stereo effect, press the button again (the

MONO indicator goes off).

FM AM

2

Select a preset number for the station you store.

AUDIO

1

SUB TITLE

2

ANGLE

3

• You can also use the

¡

or

1

buttons.

ZOOM

4

DVD LEVEL

5

VFP

6

REV. MODE

7 8

FM MODE

9

10 10

11

Basic.fm Page 12 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:00 PM

Playing Back a Tape

To insert a tape

You can play back tapes of types I, II, and IV.

Push Insert Close

To start:

With the tape side facing outside

To stop:

To rewind tape:

Before or after play...

GROUP/TITLE

Rewind the tape to the right.

Rewind the tape to the left.

To change the tape running direction

3

(forward play)

2

(reverse play)

To reverse the tape automatically

REV. MODE

7

(at the same time)

Tape is played from the forward side to the reverse side. When the reverse side is played back, playback stops.

Tape is automatically reversed, and playback repeats until you stop it.

Tape will not be reversed. When the current side of the tape reaches its end, playback stops.

Playing Back a Disc

IMPORTANT: Before playing a disc, make sure of the following...

• Turn on the TV and select an appropriate input mode on the TV to view the pictures or on-screen displays on the

TV screen.

• For disc playback, you can change the initial setting to your preference. See “Setup Menu Operations” on page 33.

If “ ” appears on the TV screen when you press a button, the disc cannot accept the operation you have tried to do, or data required for that operation is not recorded on the disc.

Before operating a disc, be familiar how a disc is recorded.

• DVD Video comprises of “ Titles ” which includes

“ Chapters ,” DVD Audio/MP3/WMA/JPEG comprise of

“ Groups ” which includes “ Tracks ,” and CD/SVCD/VCD comprise of only “ Tracks .”

• For JPEG playback, see “Operations on the CONTROL

Screen” on page 27.

12

Basic.fm Page 13 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:00 PM

To insert a disc

You can insert a disc while playing another source.

To select a title/group

While playing...

Remote

ONLY

GROUP/TITLE

To close the disc tray, press

0

again.

• If you press DVD/CD

3

, disc tray closes automatically and playback starts (depending on how the disc is programmed internally).

To start: To pause: To stop:

DVD/CD

(at the same time)

• Group name appears for MP3/WMA discs.

To select a chapter/track

While playing...

GROUP/TITLE

• First time you press

4

, you can go back to the beginning of the current chapter/track.

To release, press

DVD/CD

3

.

• While playing DVD/SVCD/VCD: This System can store the stop point, and when you start playback again by pressing DVD/CD

3

(even while on standby), it starts from the position where you have stopped—Resume Play.

(“RESUME” appears on the display when you stop playback.)

To stop completely while Resume is activated, press

7 twice. (To cancel Resume, see “RESUME” on page 36.)

• When operating the System, the on-screen guide icon (see the following table) appears on the TV.

To deactivate the on-screen guide icons, see “ON

SCREEN GUIDE” on page 36.

On-screen guide icons

• During DVD Video playback, the following icons may appear on the TV:

At the beginning of a scene containing multiangle views.

At the beginning of a scene containing multiaudio sounds.

At the beginning of a scene containing multisubtitles.

• The following icons will be also shown on the TV to indicate your current operation.

, , , , ,

Remote

ONLY

To locate a particular portion

While playing a disc except MP3/WMA...

SLOW – SLOW

+ x2 x5 x10 x20 x2 x5 x10 x20 x60 x60

• No sound comes out while searching on DVD Video/

SVCD/VCD.

To return to normal playback, press DVD/CD

3

.

Remote

ONLY

To locate an item directly

You can select a title/chapter/track directly and start playback.

• For DVD Video, you can select a title before starting playback , while you can select a chapter after starting playback .

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

REV. MODE

7

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

8

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

FM MODE

9

Examples:

To select number 5, press 5.

To select number 15, press +10, then 5.

To select number 30, press +10,

+10, then 10.

10 10

13

Basic.fm Page 14 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:00 PM

To use 3D Phonic

While playing...

3D

PHONIC

3D PHONIC ACTION

3D PHONIC OFF

(Canceled)

3D PHONIC

3D PHONIC

DRAMA

THEATER

• The selected mode can only be shown on the TV.

ACTION Suitable for action movies and sports programs.

DRAMA

THEATER

Creates natural and warm sound. Enjoy movies in a relaxed mood.

Enjoy sound effects like in a major theater.

To play back using the disc menu

7

For DVD Video/DVD Audio:

1 Show the disc menu.

TOP MENU

SET UP

MENU

Remote

ONLY

7

For SVCD/VCD with PBC:

While playing a disc with PBC, “PBC” appears on the display.

When disc menu appears on the TV, select an item on the menu. Playback of the selected item starts.

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

REV. MODE

7

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

8

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

FM MODE

9

Examples:

To select number 5, press 5.

To select number 15, press +10, then 5.

To select number 30, press +10,

+10, then 10.

10 10

To move to the next or previous page of the current menu:

GROUP/TITLE

Moves to the next page.

2 Select an item on the disc menu.

ENTER

Moves to the previous page.

To return to the previous menu:

CANCEL

RETURN

(at the same time)

• With some discs, you can also select items by entering the number using the 10 keys.

To cancel PBC

AUDIO

1

SUB TITLE

2

ANGLE

3

ZOOM

4

REV. MODE

7

DVD LEVEL

5

8

VFP

6

FM MODE

9

10 10

Select a track.

Stop playback.

Playback starts with the selected track.

To reactivate PBC, press

7

(twice if Resume is turned

“ON”), then press DVD/CD

3

.

14

Basic.fm Page 15 Thursday, May 27, 2004 11:11 PM

Daily Operations

—Sound & Other Adjustments

Remote control

Adjusting the Volume

You can adjust the volume level from level 0 (VOL MIN) to level 40 (VOL MAX).

Remote control: Main unit:

VOLUME DVD LEVEL

CLOCK/

TIMER

ENTER

VFP

SLEEP

A.STANDBY

SET

, , ,

VOLUME

FADE

MUTING

Remote

ONLY

To drop the volume in a moment

To restore the volume, press again, or adjust the volume level.

BASS/TREBLE

DISPLAY

DIMMER

SHIFT

RHYTHM AX

VOLUME

+/–

FADE

MUTING

Adjusting the Sound

To emphasize rhythm feeling—RHYTHM AX

This function emphasizes bass attack feeling, and also changes the subwoofer level.

RHYTHM AX

RHYTHMAX OFF

(Canceled)

Main unit

RHYTHM AX

VOLUME +/–

To adjust the tone

You can adjust the bass and treble level from –5 to +5.

To adjust the bass

BASS/

TREBLE

BASS TRE

Canceled

VOLUME

To adjust the treble

BASS/

TREBLE

BASS TRE

Canceled

VOLUME

15

Basic.fm Page 16 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:00 PM

Presetting Automatic DVD Video Sound

Increase Level

Remote

ONLY

The DVD Video sound is sometimes recorded at a lower level than for other discs and sources. You can set the increase level for the currently loaded DVD Video, so you do not have to adjust the volume every time you change the source.

DVD LEVEL

5

NORMAL MIDDLE

HIGH

(at the same time)

NORMAL Original recording level.

MIDDLE Output level is increased (less than “HIGH”).

HIGH Output level is increased (more than

“MIDDLE”).

• Once the current DVD is ejected, this setting is canceled and set automatically to “NORMAL.”

Changing the Picture Tone

Remote

ONLY

While showing a playback picture on the TV, you can select the preset picture tone, or adjust it and store your own taste.

To select a preset picture tone

1 While playing, display VFP setting screen.

NORMAL

VFP

GAMMA

BRIGHTNESS

6

CONTRAST

SATURATION

TINT

SHARPNESS

(at the same time) On the TV

0

0

0

0

0

0

2 Select a preset picture tone.

NORMAL

USER2

CINEMA

USER1

Changing the Display Brightness

You can dim the display window.

Remote

ONLY

DIMMER

DIM1

DIM OFF

(Canceled)

DIM2

AUTO DIM

DIM1

DIM2

Dims the display.

Erases the display illumination.

AUTO DIM Erases the display illumination when disc playback starts.*

• The display illuminates when playback stops.

* “AUTO DIM” does not work for CD/MP3/WMA.

NORMAL

CINEMA

Normally select this.

Suitable for a movie source.

USER1/USER2 You can adjust parameters and can store the settings (see below).

To erase the screen, press VFP again while holding SHIFT.

To adjust the picture tone

1 Select “USER1” or “USER2.”

• Follow steps 1 and 2 explained above.

2 Select a parameter you want to adjust.

ENTER

GAMMA Adjust if the neutral color is bright or dark (–3 to +3).

BRIGHTNESS Adjust if the entire picture is bright or dark (–8 to +8).

CONTRAST Adjust if the far and near positions are unnatural (–7 to +7).

SATURATION Adjust if the picture is whitish or blackish (–7 to +7).

TINT Adjust if the human skin color is unnatural (–7 to +7).

SHARPNESS Adjust if the picture is indistinct

(–8 to +8).

16

Basic.fm Page 17 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:00 PM

3 Adjust the parameter.

ENTER

Turning Off the Power

Automatically

Remote

ONLY

To turn off the unit after playback is over—Auto

Standby

4 Repeat steps 2 to 3 to adjust other parameters.

To erase the screen, press VFP again while holding SHIFT.

SLEEP

A.STANDBY

On

Canceled

Setting the Clock

Remote

ONLY

Without setting the built-in clock, you cannot use Daily

Timers, Recording Timer (see page 31) and Sleep Timer.

• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL or CLOCK/TIMER. You can return to the previous step.

1 Activate the clock setting mode.

CLOCK/

TIMER

• If you have already adjusted the clock before, press the button repeatedly until the clock setting mode is selected.

2

Adjust the hour.

SET

(at the same time)

When Auto Standby is in use, the A.STANDBY indicator lights on the display.

When disc play stops, the A.STANDBY indicator starts flashing. If no operation is done for about 3 minutes while the indicator is flashing, the System turns off (stands by) automatically.

• Auto Standby does not work while you are listening to radio (FM/AM) and the external component (AUX).

To turn off the unit after a certain period of time

—Sleep Timer

1 Specify the time (in minutes).

SLEEP

A.STANDBY

10 20 30 60 90 120

Canceled

150

3 Adjust the minute.

SET

2 Wait until the set time goes off.

To check the time remaining until the shut-off time

SLEEP

A.STANDBY

SLEEP

Now the built-in clock starts working.

To check the current clock time during play

DISPLAY

Clock

Source information

• While playing a DVD and MP3/WMA, you cannot check the current clock time (see page 9) .

• If you press the button repeatedly, you can change the shutoff time.

17

UniqueDVD.fm Page 18 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:59 PM

Remote control

SUB TITLE

AUDIO

ZOOM

, , ,

DVD/CD

3

8

SHIFT

Unique DVD/VCD Operations

ANGLE

10 keys

Selecting the View Angle

Remote

ONLY

While playing back a chapter (of DVD Video) containing multi-view angles, you can view the same scene from different angles.

• You can also select the multi-view angles using the onscreen bar (see page 24).

While playing...

ANGLE

3

ENTER

7

SLOW –/+

Ex.:

1/3

1

1/3

1

(at the same time)

2/3

2

2/3

2

3/3

3

3/3

3

Selecting the Subtitle Language

Remote

ONLY

For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter (of DVD

Video) containing subtitles in different languages, you can select the subtitle language to display on the TV.

For SVCD: While playing, you can select the subtitles even if no subtitles are recorded on the disc.

• You can also select the subtitle language using the onscreen bar (see page 24).

While playing a DVD Video...

1

Display the subtitle selection window.

1/3

ENGLISH

SUB TITLE

2

1/3

ENGLISH

(at the same time)

18

UniqueDVD.fm Page 19 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:59 PM

2

Select the subtitle language.

While playing a DVD Video...

Ex.:

1/3

ENGLISH

2/3

FRENCH

3/3

JAPANESE

Ex.:

1/3

ENGLISH

1/3

ENGLISH

2/3

FRENCH

2/3

FRENCH

3/3

JAPANESE

3/3

JAPANESE

1/3

ENGLISH

2/3

FRENCH

3/3

JAPANESE

While playing a DVD Audio...

Ex.:

1/3 2/3

1 2

3/3

3

While playing an SVCD video...

SUB TITLE

2

–/4

OFF

(at the same time)

1/4

1

4/4

4

3/4

3

AUDIO

1

(at the same time)

2/4

2

Selecting the Audio Track

Remote

ONLY

For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter containing audio languages, you can select the language to listen to.

For DVD Audio: While playing back a track containing audio channels, you can select the audio channel to listen to.

For Karaoke SVCD/VCD: When playing back a track, you can select the audio channel to play.

• You can also select the audio track using the on-screen bar

(see page 24).

While playing a Karaoke SVCD or VCD...

AUDIO

1

SVCD

ST1

R2

VCD

ST

ST2

L2

L

(at the same time)

L1

R1

R

ST1/ST2

ST

L1/L2/L

R1/R2/R

To listen to normal stereo (2 channel) playback.

To listen to the left audio channel.

To listen to the right audio channel.

• SVCD can have 4 audio channels. Karaoke SVCD usually uses these 4 channels to record two 2-channel recordings

(ST1/ST2).

Playing Back a Bonus Group

Remote

ONLY

Some DVD Audios have a special group called “bonus group” whose contents are not open to the public.

• To play back a bonus group, you have to enter the specific

“key number” (a kind of password) for the bonus group.

The way of getting the key number depends on the disc.

1

Select the bonus group.

• The bonus group is usually recorded as the last group

(for example, if a disc contains 4 groups including a bonus group, “group 4” is the bonus group).

• For how to select the group, see “To select a title/group” on page 13.

19

UniqueDVD.fm Page 20 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:59 PM

2

Enter the key number.

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

REV. MODE

7 8

PROGRESSIVE

0

FM MODE

9

ENTER

3

Follow the interactive instructions shown on the screen.

To cancel the key number entry, press

7

.

Special Effect Playback

Still picture playback

Remote

ONLY

To start still picture playback:

While playing...

To resume normal playback:

DVD/CD

Frame-by-frame playback

1

2

While playing...

Still picture playback starts.

Advance the still picture frame by frame.

To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD

3

.

Slow-motion playback

1

While playing...

Still picture playback starts.

2

Select slow motion speed.

SLOW – SLOW +

Forward slow motion starts.

Reverse slow motion* starts.

SLOW

+

1/32 1/16 1/8 1/4 1/2

SLOW –

1/32 1/16 1/8 1/4 1/2

*Not available for SVCD/VCD.

To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3 .

To replay the previous scenes

(One-Touch Replay)

• This function is only used while playing DVD Video.

While playing back...

The playback position moves back about 10 seconds before the current position (only within the same title).

Zoom

1

Remote

ONLY

While playing back...

ZOOM

4

(at the same time)

ZOOM

4

ZOOM 1

ZOOM OFF

ZOOM 2

ZOOM 6

ZOOM 3 ZOOM 4

ZOOM 5

2

Move the zoomed-in position.

To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly (while holding

SHIFT) until “ZOOM OFF” appears on the TV.

20

AdvancedDisc.fm Page 21 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:58 PM

Remote control

10 keys

,

DVD/CD

3

8

4

/

¢

SHIFT

Main unit

DVD/CD

3

4 , 7 , ¢

Advanced Disc Operations

Programming the Playing Order—

Program Play

Remote

ONLY

You can arrange the playing order of the chapters or tracks

(up to 99) before you start playback.

1

Before starting playback, activate Program Play.

PLAY

MODE

PROGRAM

Canceled

RANDOM

ENTER

CANCEL

7

PLAY

MODE

REPEAT

REPEAT A-B

PRGM

On the display

PROGRAM

No

1

8

9

6

7

10

2

3

4

5

Group/Title Track/Chapter

USE NUMERIC KEYS TO PROGRAM TRACKS.

USE CANCEL TO DELETE THE PROGRAM.

On the TV

2

Select chapters or tracks you want for Program Play.

• For DVD/MP3/WMA:

1 Select a title or group number.

2

3

Select a chapter or track number.

Repeat the above steps 1 and 2 .

• For SVCD/VCD/CD:

1 Select tracks.

To enter the numbers directly:

AUDIO

1

SUB TITLE

2

ANGLE

3

ZOOM

4

REV. MODE

7

DVD LEVEL

5

8

VFP

6

FM MODE

9

Examples:

To enter number 5, press 5.

To enter number 15, press +10, then 5.

To enter number 30, press +10,

+10, then 10.

10 10

0

21

AdvancedDisc.fm Page 22 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:58 PM

3

Start playback.

DVD/CD

Playback starts in the order you have programmed.

Playing at Random—Random Play

Remote

ONLY

You can play all chapters or tracks at random.

• Random Play cannot be used for some DVDs.

1

Before starting playback, activate Random Play.

PLAY

MODE PROGRAM

Canceled

RANDOM

To skip a step:

GROUP/TITLE

To pause:

To release, press

DVD/CD

3

.

To check the programmed contents

Before or after playback...

In the reverse order.

To stop:

RANDOM

2

Start playback.

DVD/CD

Playback starts in random order.

Random Play ends when the entire disc has been played.

In the programmed order.

• You can also use

4

or

¢

to check the programmed contents.

To modify the program

Before or after playback...

To erase the last step: To erase the entire program:

CANCEL

RETURN

To skip a chapter/ track:

To pause: To stop:

To release, press

DVD/CD

3

.

To exit from Random Play

Before or after playback...

PLAY

MODE PROGRAM

Canceled

RANDOM

To add steps in the program:

Repeat step 2 .

To exit from Program Play

Before or after playback...

PLAY

MODE PROGRAM

Canceled

RANDOM

22

AdvancedDisc.fm Page 23 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:58 PM

Playing Repeatedly

Remote

ONLY

• You can also select the repeat mode using the on-screen bar (see page 25).

Repeat Play

You can repeat playback.

• For DVD Video:

While playing...

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

REP CHAP

*

REP OFF

(Canceled)

REP TTL

• For DVD Audio:

While playing or before playback...

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

REP TRK

*

REP GRP

REP OFF

(Canceled)

• For MP3/WMA:

While playing or before playback...

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

REP TRK

*

REP OFF

(Canceled)

REP GRP

REP ALL

• For CD/SVCD/VCD:

While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD) or before playback...

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

REP TRK

*

REP OFF

(Canceled)

REP ALL

REP CHAP * Repeats the current chapter.

REP TTL Repeats the current title.

REP TRK * Repeats the current track.

REP GRP Repeats the current group.

REP ALL Repeats the disc or program.

*During Program Play and Random Play, “REP STEP” appears instead of these indications, and repeat modes change as follows for all the discs.

REP STEP REP ALL

REP OFF

(Canceled)

A-B Repeat

You can repeat playback of a desired portion by specifying the beginning (point A) and the ending (point B).

• A-B Repeat cannot be used for MP3/WMA and for some

DVDs.

• A-B Repeat can be used within the same title while playing a DVD Video, and within the same track for the other discs.

1

While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), select the start point (A).

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

starts flashing on the display.

• A appears on the TV if the TV is turned on.

(at the same time)

2

Select the end point (B).

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

stops flashing.

TV.

A-B appears on the

• You can search for the end point using the

¡

button.

(at the same time)

To cancel A-B Repeat, press REPEAT A-B again while holding SHIFT.

• A-B Repeat will also be canceled when you stop play or skip the chapter or track.

Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock

Main Unit

ONLY

You can lock the disc tray so that no one can eject the loaded disc.

• This is possible while the System is on standby.

While the disc tray is closed...

(at the same time)

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.

“UNLOCKED” appears on the display.

23

OSDOperation.fm Page 24 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:56 PM

24

On-Screen Disc Operations

Remote control

ZOOM

, , ,

ON SCREEN

DVD/CD

3

8

4

/

¢

SHIFT

On-screen bars

DVD Video

1

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

DVD Audio

1

2 3

CHAP.

TITLE 14

1 /

CHAP

1/3

23

1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

4

2 3

DVD-AUDIO

TIME OFF

SVCD

1

SVCD

TRACK

GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58

1 / 3 PAGE 1 / 3

4

2 3

TITLE 14

/ 1/3

CHAP 23

1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1/3

4

VCD

1

VCD

2

TITLE 14 CHAP 23

1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1/3

3

4

CD

1 2 3

CD TITLE 14 CHAP

1/3

23

1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1/3

4

10 keys

ENTER

CANCEL

7

REPEAT

¡

On-screen Bar Information

You can check the disc information (except for MP3/WMA/

JPEG disc) and use some functions through the on-screen bar.

1 Disc type

2 Playback information

Indication Meanings

Mbps Current transfer rate

(Megabits per second)

TITLE 2 Current title

CHAP 3

GROUP 1

TRACK 14

Current chapter

Current group

Current track

TOTAL 1:25:58 Time indications

3 Operation modes

Indication Meanings

Playback

/

/ Forward/Reverse search

Forward/Reverse slow-motion

Pause

Stop

4 Function icons (on the pull-down menu)

Indication Meanings

TIME

Select to change the time indication.

OFF

CHAP.

TRACK

Select to repeat playback.

Select for time search.

Select for chapter search.

Select for track search.

1/3

1/3

1/3

PAGE 1 / 5

Select to change the audio language or channel (see also page 19).

Select to change subtitle language

(see also page 18).

Select to change the view angle (see also page 18).

Select to change the page.

OSDOperation.fm Page 25 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:56 PM

Operations Using the On-screen Bar

Remote

ONLY

Ex.: Selecting a subtitle (French) for DVD Video

While a disc is selected as the source...

1

Display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.

ON SCREEN

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

TITLE 2 CHAP 3 TIME 0:00:58

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

CHAP.

14

1 / 1/3

23 TOTAL 1:25:58

1 / 1/3 1 1/3

Goes off

2

Select (highlight) the item you want.

For detailed operations of the following functions, see also “Operations Using the On-screen Bar” on the left.

To change the time information

You can change the time information in the on-screen bar and the display window on the main unit.

1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pulldown menu.

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

CHAP.

TITLE 14 CHAP 23

1 / 1/3 1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

2 Make sure TIME is selected (highlighted).

3 Change the time indication.

ENTER

TIME 0:00:58

T.REM 0:35:24

REM 0:11:23

TOTAL 1:01:58

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

CHAP.

TITLE 14 CHAP 23

1 / 1/3 1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

3

Display the pop-up window.

ENTER

TITLE 14

1

CHAP

1/3

23

1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

ENGLISH

4

Select the desired option in the pop-up window.

TITLE 14 CHAP

1 1/3

23

2 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

FRENCH

5

Finish the setting.

ENTER

Pop-up window goes off.

To erase the on-screen bar

ON SCREEN

TIME

REM

TOTAL

T.REM

Elapsed playing time of the current chapter/track.

Remaining time of the current chapter/ track.

Elapsed disc time.

Remaining disc time.

To erase the on-screen bar

ON SCREEN

Repeat Play

• See also page 23.

1 While playing a disc (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.

• Except for DVD Video: Repeat Play can be selected before starting playback.

3 Display the pop-up window.

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

CHAP.

TITLE 14

1 /

CHAP

1/3

23

1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

OFF

25

OSDOperation.fm Page 26 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:56 PM

4 Select the repeat mode you want.

A-B

TITLE

TRACK *

OFF

Repeats a desired portion (see below).

Repeats the current title.

GROUP

ALL

Repeats the current group.

Repeats the disc (except for DVD) or program.

CHAPTER * Repeats the current chapter.

Repeats the current track.

Cancels Repeat Play.

* During Program Play and Random Play, “STEP” appears.

5 Finish the setting.

ENTER

A-B Repeat

• See also page 23.

1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pulldown menu.

3 Display the pop-up window.

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

CHAP.

TITLE 14 CHAP 23 TOTAL 1:25:58

1 / 1/3 1 / 1/3 1 1/3

OFF

Time Search

You can move to a particular point by specifying the elapsed playing time from the beginning.

1 While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.

• Except for DVD: Time Search can be used before starting playback.

2 Select .

3 Display the pop-up window.

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

TITLE 14

CHAP.

TIME _ : _ _ : _ _

1 /

CHAP

1/3

23

1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

4 Enter the time.

You can specify the time in hours/minutes/seconds.

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

REV. MODE

7 8

PROGRESSIVE

0

FM MODE

9

Examples:

To move to a point of 1

(hours): 02 (minutes): 00

(seconds), press 1, 0, 2, 0, then

0.

To move to a point of 54

(minutes): 00 (seconds), press

0, 5, 4, 0, then 0.

• It is always required to enter the hour digit (even “0” hour), but it is not required to enter trailing zeros (the

• last two digits in the examples above).

To correct a misentry, press Cursor < to erase the last entry.

5 Finish the setting.

ENTER

The System starts playing the disc from the selected playing time.

4 Select “A-B.”

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

CHAP.

TITLE 14 CHAP

1 / 1/3

23

1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

A–B

5 Select the start point (A).

ENTER

DVD-VIDEO

A-

8.5Mbps

CHAP.

TITLE 14 CH

1 / 1/3

6 Select the end point (B).

ENTER

A-B Repeat starts. The selected portion plays repeatedly.

• Before pressing ENTER, you can search for the end point using the

¡

button.

To cancel A-B Repeat, repeat steps 1 to 3 , and select “OFF” in step 4 .

Chapter/Track Search

You can search for the chapter (DVD Video) or track (DVD

Audio) number to play.

1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pulldown menu.

2 Select CHAP.

or TRACK .

3 Display the pop-up window.

DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps

TITLE 14 CHAP 23

CHAP.

CHAPTER _

1 1/3 1 / 1/3

TOTAL 1:25:58

1 1/3

26

OSDOperation.fm Page 27 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:56 PM

4 Enter the desired chapter/track number.

AUDIO

1

SUB TITLE

2

ANGLE

3

ZOOM

4

REV. MODE

7

DVD LEVEL

5

8

VFP

6

FM MODE

9

PROGRESSIVE

0

Examples:

To select chapter/track 5, press

5.

To select chapter/track 15, press 1, then 5.

To select chapter/track 30, press 3, then 0.

• To correct a misentry, press the 10 keys until the desired number shown in the pop-up window.

5 Finish the setting.

ENTER

The System starts playing the searched chapter or track.

Selecting Browsable Still Pictures

Remote

ONLY

While playing back a track (of DVD Audio) linked to browsable still pictures (BSP), you can select the still picture

(turn the page) to be shown on the TV.

• If a track is linked to browsable still pictures (BSP), they are usually shown in turn automatically during playback.

1 While playing a DVD Audio, display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.

3 Display the pop-up window.

DVD-AUDIO

TIME OFF TRACK

GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58

1 / 3 PAGE 1 / 5

1

4 Select a still picture you want.

DVD-AUDIO

TIME OFF TRACK

GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58

1 / 3 PAGE 3 / 5

3

5 Finish the setting.

ENTER

Operations on t he CONTROL Screen

Remote

ONLY

The CONTROL screen automatically appears on the TV when you load an MP3, WMA, or JPEG disc.

You can search for and play the desired tracks through the

CONTROL screen.

• If both types of files (MP3/WMA files and JPEG files) are recorded on a disc, select the file type to play (see page 35).

CONTROL screen

Ex.: When the MP3 disc is loaded.

1

2

3

4

Group : 2 / 3

Spring

Summer

Fall

Winter

Track Information

Title

Rain

Artist

Album

REPEAT TRACK Time : 00:00:14

Track : 5 / 14 (Total 41)

Cloudy.mp3

Fair.mp3

Fog.mp3

Hail.mp3

Indian summer.mp3

Rain.mp3

Shower.mp3

Snow.mp3

Thunder.mp3

Typhoon.mp3

Wind.mp3

Winter sky.mp3

6

7

8

9

0

-

5

1 Current group number/total group number

2 Current group (in blue)

3 Group list

4 Track information (ID3 Tag Version 1.0: only for

MP3/WMA)

5 Current track (in blue)

6 Repeat Play setting

7 Elapsed playing time of the current track

(only for MP3/WMA)

8 Operation mode icon

9 Current track number/total number of tracks in the current group (total number of tracks on the loaded disc)

0 Highlight (green) bar

Track list

27

OSDOperation.fm Page 28 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:56 PM

To move the highlight (green) bar between group list and track list:

Moves the bar to the track list.

To repeat slide-show for JPEG

While playing or before starting playback...

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

REP GRP REP ALL

REP OFF

(Canceled)

Moves the bar to the group list.

To select a group/track in the list:

Move the highlight bar to a desired item.

• If you move the highlight bar while playing back an MP3/

WMA disc, the selected track starts playback automatically.

REP GRP Repeats the current group.

REP ALL Repeats the disc.

• For Repeat Play of MP3/WMA, see page 23.

To zoom in the still picture

• You cannot zoom in the still picture during slide-show.

1

While playing back a still picture...

• During slide-show, press

8

to display the still picture, then...

To start playback

For MP3/WMA:

ZOOM

4

ENTER

Playback starts with the selected track.

• Pressing DVD/CD 3 also starts playback.

(at the same time)

For JPEG:

ZOOM

4

ZOOM 1

ZOOM OFF

ZOOM 2

ENTER

The selected track (still picture) is displayed until you change it.

2

Move the zoomed-in position.

DVD/CD

Slide-show playback starts.

Each track (still picture) is shown on the screen for about 3 seconds, then changes one after another.

• Once you start playing back a JPEG track, the CONTROL screen goes off.

• To cancel slide-show, and display the current still picture, press

8

.

To skip a track:

GROUP/TITLE

To stop playback:

To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly (while holding

SHIFT) until “ZOOM OFF” appears on the TV.

28

AdvancedTape.fm Page 29 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:55 PM

Remote control

REV. MODE

TAPE

2 3

DVD/CD

3

7

SHIFT

Advanced Tape Operations

IMPORTANT

It may be unlawful to record or play back copyrighted material without the consent of the copyright owner.

Recording on a Tape

You can use type I tapes for recording.

• To play a tape, see page 12.

1

Insert a recordable cassette.

Push Insert Close

FM/AM

AUX

With the tape side facing outside

2

Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode settings on the display.

Reverse mode indicator

Main unit

TAPE

2 3

DVD/CD

3

REC

PUSH OPEN 0

FM/AM

AUX

7

Tape direction indicator

To change the direction

Current source

3

(forward)

2

(reverse)

To change the Reverse mode if necessary

REV. MODE

7

(

(at the same time)

)

To record on both sides.

• When using Reverse Mode, start recording in the forward (

3

) direction.

To record on only one side.

29

AdvancedTape.fm Page 30 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:55 PM

3

Select and start playing the source—“FM,” “AM,”

“DVD/CD,” or “AUX.”

• When recording a disc, you can also use “Synchronized

Disc Recording” (see below).

4

Start recording.

REC

To record Program Play or Random Play

1 Select Program Play (and make a program) or Random

Play, but do not start playback.

2 Press REC to start recording.

• When disc play stops, recording continues. It is required that recording be stopped manually.

To stop recording:

On the main unit

To record only your favorite track

You can specify tracks to be recorded on the tape while listening to a disc (except for DVD Video).

1

Start playing a disc.

DVD/CD

Synchronized Disc Recording

You can start and stop both disc play and tape recording at the same time.

To record the entire disc

1

Load a disc and insert a recordable cassette.

• If the current playing source is not the disc player, press

DVD/CD

3

, then

7

.

2

Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode settings on the display.

• See step 2 of “Recording on a Tape” on page 29.

3

Start recording.

REC

The System automatically creates 4-second blanks between the tunes recorded on the tapes.

2

While a track you want to record on the tape is playing...

REC

On the main unit

The disc player returns to the beginning of that track and the track is recorded on the tape.

After recording the track, the disc player and cassette deck automatically stop.

3

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to record other tracks you want.

• You can exchange the discs if necessary.

To protect your recording

Cassettes have two small tabs on the back to protect from unexpected erasure or re-recording.

To protect your recording, remove these tabs.

On the main unit

• When either disc play* or recording ends, both disc player and the cassette deck stop at the same time.

• If you press REC soon after the recording is stopped, “NO

REC” may appear.

* For DVD Video: When a title is finished playing.

To record a “Live” disc

It will not be desirable to put 4-second blank portions between the tunes recorded on the tape.

To record the entire disc without any interruption recorded, pause the disc play (press DVD/CD

3

, then

8

) before pressing REC.

To re-record on a protected tape, cover the holes with adhesive tape.

30

Timer.fm Page 31 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:54 PM

Remote control

SET

,

Timer Operations

STANDBY/ON

CLOCK/

TIMER

CANCEL

Setting the Timer

Remote

ONLY

Using Daily Timer, you can wake up with your favorite song. On the other hand, with Recording Timer, you can make a tape of a radio broadcast automatically.

• You can store three Daily Timer settings and one

Recording Timer setting; however, you can activate only one of Daily Timers and Recording Timer at the same time.

• To exit from the timer setting, press CLOCK/TIMER as required.

• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL.

You can return to the previous step.

1

Select one of the timer setting modes you want to set—

Daily 1 ON time, Daily 2 ON time, Daily 3 ON time, or

Recording Timer ON time.

CLOCK/

TIMER

Daily 1 Timer

DAILY 1 * ON (Time)

Canceled

Daily 2 Timer

DAILY 2 * ON (Time)

Clock setting

(see page 17)

Daily 3 Timer

DAILY 3 * ON (Time)

ON (Time) REC TMR

Recording Timer

1

Ex. When Daily Timer 1 setting mode is selected

2

Make the timer setting as you want.

Repeat the following operations until you finish setting in the following order—

SET

* Daily Timer initial settings when shipped from the factory

• DAILY 1:ON Time (6:00)/OFF Time (8:00)/

Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)

• DAILY 2:ON Time (12:00)/OFF Time (14:00)/

Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)

• DAILY 3:ON Time (18:00)/OFF Time (20:00)/

Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)

For Daily Timers:

1 Set the hour then the minute for on-time.

2 Set the hour then the minute for off-time.

3 Select the playback source—“TUNER FM,”

“TUNER AM,” “TAPE,” “DISC,” or “AUX.”

1

4 For “TUNER FM” and “TUNER AM”: Select a preset channel.

For “DISC”: Select the title/group number, then the chapter/track number.

31

Timer.fm Page 32 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:54 PM

5 Select the volume level.

• You can select the volume level (“VOL 0” to

“VOL 50” and “VOL – –”).

If you select “VOL – –,” the volume is set to the last level when the unit has been turned off.

Once settings are complete, the Timer setting information appears in sequence.

For Recording Timer:

1 Set the hour then the minute for on-time.

2 Set the hour then the minute for off-time.

3 Select the playback source—“TUNER FM,”

4

“TUNER AM,” or “AUX.”

For “TUNER FM” and “TUNER AM”: Select a preset channel.

Once settings are complete, the Timer setting information appears in sequence.

3

Turn off the unit (on standby) if you have set the timer with the System turned on.

STANDBY/ON

How Recording Timer actually works

When Recording Timer has been set, Timer ( ) indicator and the REC indicator are lit on the display.

Recording Timer works only once.

When the on-time comes

The System turns on, tunes in to the specified station or changes the source to “AUX”, sets the volume level to the preset level, and starts recording.

When the off-time comes

The System stops recording, and turns off (stands by).

• The timer setting remains in memory until you change it.

To turn off the Timer after its setting is done

Since Daily Timer is activated at the same time everyday, you may need to cancel it on some particular days.

• Recording Timer can also be canceled temporarily.

1 Select the Timer you want to cancel.

CLOCK/

TIMER

Daily 1 Timer

DAILY 1 * ON (Time)

Daily 2 Timer

DAILY 2 * ON (Time)

Daily 3 Timer

DAILY 3 * ON (Time)

Canceled Clock setting

(see page 17)

ON (Time) REC TMR

Recording Timer

How Daily Timer actually works

Once the Daily Timer has been set, the timer ( ) indicator and timer number indicator (1/2/3) are lit on the display. Daily Timer is activated at the same time everyday until the timer is turned off manually (see the next column) or another timer is activated.

When the on-time comes

The System turns on, starts playing the specified source

(except “AUX”), and sets the volume level to the preset level.

• While Daily Timer is working, the timer ( ) indicator and timer number indicator (1/2/3) flash on the display.

When the off-time comes

The System stops playback, and turns off (stands by) automatically.

• The timer setting remains in memory until you change it.

1

2 Turn off the selected Timer.

Ex.To cancel Daily

Timer 1

CANCEL

RETURN

To turn on the Timer

1 Select the Timer (DAILY 1/2/3, and REC TMR) you want to activate.

CLOCK/

TIMER

Daily 1 Timer

DAILY 1 ON (Time)

Canceled

Daily 2 Timer

DAILY 2 ON (Time)

Clock setting

(see page 17)

Daily 3 Timer

DAILY 3 ON (Time)

ON (Time) REC TMR

Recording Timer

2 Activate the selected Timer.

SET

1

Ex. When Daily Timer 1 (DAILY 1) is activated

3 Wait until the indication goes off.

32

ChoiceMenu.fm Page 33 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:53 PM

Remote control

, , ,

SHIFT

Setup Menu Icons

The icon for the selected Setup Menu will be highlighted.

Ex.: LANGUAGE Setup Menu is selected.

1 2 3 4

LANGUAGE

MENU LANGUAGE

AUDIO LANGUAGE

SUBTITLE

ON SCREEN LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

Setup Menu Operations

10 keys

SET UP

ENTER

.

Operating Procedure

Remote

ONLY

You can use the Setup Menus only when a disc is selected as the source and its playback is not yet started.

Ex.: Selecting “STILL PICTURE” for “FILE TYPE”:

1

Display the Setup Menu.

SET UP

MENU

LANGUAGE

MENU LANGUAGE

AUDIO LANGUAGE

SUBTITLE

ON SCREEN LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

(at the same time)

2

Select one of the Setup Menus.

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

PICTURE

MONITOR TYPE

PICTURE SOURCE

SCREEN SAVER

FILE TYPE

4:3 LB

AUTO

ON

AUDIO

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

3

Select the item you want to adjust.

PICTURE

MONITOR TYPE

PICTURE SOURCE

SCREEN SAVER

FILE TYPE

4:3 LB

AUTO

ON

AUDIO

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

4

Display the pop-up window.

ENTER PICTURE

MONITOR TYPE

PICTURE SOURCE

SCREEN SAVER

FILE TYPE

4:3 LB

AUTO

ON

STILL PICTURE

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT . USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

5

Select the desired option in the pop-up window.

PICTURE

MONITOR TYPE

PICTURE SOURCE

SCREEN SAVER

FILE TYPE

4:3 LB

AUTO

ON

STILL PICTURE

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT . USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

1 LANGUAGE Setup Menu

2 PICTURE Setup Menu

3 AUDIO Setup Menu

4 OTHERS Setup Menu

33

ChoiceMenu.fm Page 34 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:53 PM

6

Finish the setting.

ENTER

7

Repeat steps 3 to 4 to set other items on the same

Setup Menu.

Repeat steps 2 to 4 to set other items on another Setup

Menu.

SUBTITLE

Some discs have multiple subtitle languages.

Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,

GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see

“Language Code List” on page 43) or “OFF (no subtitle).”

ON SCREEN LANGUAGE

Select one of the languages shown on the TV from—

ENGLISH, CHINESE and SPANISH.

To exit from the Setup Menu

SET UP

MENU

PICTURE Setup Menu

You can select the desired options concerning a picture or monitor screen.

(at the same time)

PICTURE

MONITOR TYPE

PICTURE SOURCE

SCREEN SAVER

FILE TYPE

4:3 LB

AUTO

ON

AUDIO

LANGUAGE Setup Menu

You can select the initial languages for disc playback. You can also select the language shown on the TV screen while operating this System.

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

LANGUAGE

MENU LANGUAGE

AUDIO LANGUAGE

SUBTITLE

ON SCREEN LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

MENU LANGUAGE

Some discs have multiple menu languages.

Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,

GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see

“Language Code List” on page 43).

AUDIO LANGUAGE

Some discs have multiple audio languages.

Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,

GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see

“Language Code List” on page 43).

MONITOR TYPE

Select the monitor type of your TV to play DVD Video recorded with aspect ratio of 16:9.

For the multi-color system TV

When you use a multi-color system TV, you can change the color system of the System automatically by selecting

“MULTI” options for the monitor type. In this case, the color system of the System is changed to match to that of the loaded disc regardless of the VIDEO OUT SELECT setting

(see page 6).

Select one of the following:

16:9 / 16:9 MULTI:

Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 16:9 (wide

TV).

4:3 LB (Letter Box) / 4:3 MULTI LB:

Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3

(conventional TV). While viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars appear on the top and the bottom of the screen.

4:3 PS (Pan Scan) / 4:3 MULTI PS:

Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3. While viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars do not appear; however, the left and right edges of the pictures will not be shown on the screen.

34

ChoiceMenu.fm Page 35 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:53 PM

Ex.: 16:9 Ex.: 4:3 LB Ex: 4:3 PS

AUDIO Setup Menu

You can adjust the sound settings of the System.

AUDIO

DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT

DOWN MIX

D. RANGE COMPRESSION

STREAM/PCM

DOLBY SURROUND

AUTO

PICTURE SOURCE

You can obtain optimal picture quality by selecting an appropriate option—picture source type (either video source or film source).

Select one of the following:

AUTO:

FILM:

Normally select this.

When playing back a disc containing both video and film sources, the System automatically changes the processing to match it to the picture type (film or video source) of the current chapter.

To play a film source disc.

VIDEO: To play a video source disc.

SCREEN SAVER

You can activate or deactivate screen saver while operating the built-in disc player.

Select one of the following:

ON: The pictures on the TV becomes dark when no operation is done for about 5 minutes.

OFF: To cancel the screen saver.

FILE TYPE

If both audio tracks (MP3 or WMA files) and still picture

(JPEG files) are recorded on a disc, you can select which to play.

Select one of the following:

AUDIO: To play MP3/WMA files.

STILL PICTURE: To play JPEG files.

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT

When using the digital output terminal on the rear, set this correctly according to the connected component.

Select one of the following:

PCM ONLY: To connect to a linear PCM digital equipment such as an MD recorder.

DOLBY DIGITAL

/PCM:

To connect to a Dolby Digital decoder or an amplifier with a built-in Dolby

Digital decoder.

STREAM/PCM: To connect to a DTS decoder or an amplifier with a built-in DTS decoder.

• See also “DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals” on page 45.

DOWN MIX

When playing a multi-channel DVD, the System converts the signals into 2 channels.

Downmix setting is effective for the speaker output (and digital audio output if “DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” is set to “PCM ONLY”) from this System.

Select one of the following:

DOLBY

SURROUND:

To connect an amplifier with the Dolby

Pro Logic decoder.

STEREO: To connect a conventional stereo amplifier, receiver, MD player, TV, etc.

35

ChoiceMenu.fm Page 36 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:53 PM

D. RANGE COMPRESSION

You can compress the dynamic range (the difference between the loudest sound and the softest sound) to enjoy a powerful sound even at a low volume level when listening to

Dolby Digital software. This is useful at night.

• The effectiveness varies depends on software.

Select one of the following:

AUTO: To enjoy powerful sounds with full dynamic range.

ON: Best for watching a movie at a low volume level.

ON SCREEN GUIDE

You can activate or deactivate the on-screen guide icons (see page 13).

• When recording the picture on a VCR, select “OFF” to avoid recording the guide icons on your video tape.

Select one of the following:

ON: To activate the on-screen guide icons.

OFF: To cancel the on-screen guide icons.

OTHERS Setup Menu

You can change some other convenient functions.

RESUME

O T H E R S

RESUME

ON SCREEN GUIDE

AV COMPULINK MODE

PARENTAL LOCK

ON

ON

DVD1

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

You can activate or deactivate Resume for disc playback

(see page 13).

Select one of the following:

ON: To activate Resume.

OFF: To cancel Resume.

AV COMPULINK MODE

When connecting the System to a JVC’s TV with the AV

COMPU LINK remote control system, select the proper setting.

Select one of the following:

DVD1: To connect to the VIDEO-3 Input jacks on the

TV.

DVD2:

DVD3:

To connect to the VIDEO-1 Input jacks on the

TV.

To connect to the VIDEO-2 Input jacks on the

TV.

• For details, see “AV COMPU LINK remote control system” on page 6.

PARENTAL LOCK

Select this to enter the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.

See the section that follows.

36

ChoiceMenu.fm Page 37 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:53 PM

Restricting the Review

—Parental Lock

Remote

ONLY

You can restrict playback of DVD Video containing violent scenes and those unsuitable for your family members. Once you have set the rating level, such violent scenes (for which a higher level than you set is assigned) may be skipped or changed to another scene (depending on how the disc is programmed).

To set Parental Lock

Set the rating level—Level 1 (most restrictive) to Level 8

(least restrictive).

1

Display the Setup Menu.

SET UP

MENU

LANGUAGE

MENU LANGUAGE

AUDIO LANGUAGE

SUBTITLE

ON SCREEN LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

5

Select “COUNTRY CODE,” then display the pop-up window.

ENTER

PA R E N TA L L O C K

COUNTRY CODE

SET LEVEL

PASSWORD

EXIT

AS

AT

AU

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

6

Select the country code of your area.

• See “Country/Area Codes List” on page 44 to find your country code.

ENTER

SELECT

ENTER

(at the same time)

2

Select the OTHERS Setup Menus.

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

O T H E R S

RESUME

ON SCREEN GUIDE

AV COMPULINK MODE

PARENTAL LOCK

ON

ON

DVD1

The System automatically enters “SET LEVEL” mode.

7

Make sure “SET LEVEL” is selected, then display the pop-up window.

ENTER

PA R E N TA L L O C K

COUNTRY CODE

SET LEVEL

PASSWORD

EXIT

5

4

3

8

7

8

Set the rating level (NONE, 8 – 1).

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

ENTER

3

Select “PARENTAL LOCK.”

O T H E R S

RESUME

ON SCREEN GUIDE

AV COMPULINK MODE

PARENTAL LOCK

ON

ON

DVD1

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

4

Enter the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.

ENTER

PA R E N TA L L O C K

COUNTRY CODE

SET LEVEL

PASSWORD

EXIT

AU

NONE

_ _ _ _

SELECT

ENTER

USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

The System automatically enters “PASSWORD” entry mode.

9

Make sure “PASSWORD” is selected, then enter any

4-digit number for your password.

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

REV. MODE

7 8

PROGRESSIVE

0

FM MODE

9

ENTER

10

Finish the setting.

ENTER

37

ChoiceMenu.fm Page 38 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:53 PM

To change the setting

1

Display the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.

• Follow steps 1 to 4 of “To set Parental Lock.”

To release Parental Lock temporarily

When you set a strict rating level, some discs may not be played back at all. When you try to play such a disc, the following screen appears on the TV.

PA R E N TA L L O C K

COUNTRY CODE

SET LEVEL

PASSWORD

EXIT

AU

4

_ _ _ _

PA R E N TA L L O C K

TEMPORARY RELEASE

NOT RELEASE

PASSWORD _ _ _ _

SELECT

ENTER

PASSWORD? ••• PRESS 0 ~ 9 KEYS

TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].

“PASSWORD” is automatically selected.

• You cannot select any item other than “EXIT” until you enter the correct password.

2

Enter your password.

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

REV. MODE

7 8

PROGRESSIVE

0

FM MODE

9

ENTER

• If you enter a wrong password, “– – – –” appears again.

If you missed three times, “EXIT” is automatically selected. In this case, press ENTER to exit from the

PARENTAL LOCK submenu.

• If you forget your password, enter “8888.”

3

Change the settings.

• Follow steps 5 to 8 of “To set Parental Lock.”

4

Enter your password again (after selecting

“PASSWORD” manually if necessary).

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

REV. MODE

7 8

PROGRESSIVE

0

FM MODE

9

ENTER

• If you want to change a password, enter a new four digit number in this step.

SELECT

ENTER

PASSWORD? ••• PRESS 0 ~ 9 KEYS

1

Select “TEMPORARY RELEASE,” then ENTER.

“PASSWORD” is automatically selected.

ENTER

• If you do not play back such a disc, select “NOT

RELEASE,” then ENTER. Then eject the disc.

2

Enter your password.

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

REV. MODE

7 8

PROGRESSIVE

0

FM MODE

9

ENTER

• If you enter a wrong password three times, “NOT

RELEASE” is automatically selected. In this case, press

ENTER. Then eject the disc.

38

AdditonalInfo.fm Page 39 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:52 PM

Additional Information

Learning More about This System

Getting Started

(see pages 3 to 6)

Changing the Scanning Mode

• To enjoy the progressive video picture, connect a TV with the progressive video input using component video cord.

Before Operating the System

(see pages 7 to 9)

Playable Disc Types:

• If you play back an NTSC disc with this setting set to “PAL,” you can watch the playback pictures (the disc will be reproduced using “PAL 60” format), but the TV screen may roll over upward and downward rapidly.

• If you play back a PAL disc with this setting set to “NTSC,” you can watch the playback pictures, but the following symptoms may occur:

– The items on the disc menu will be blurred, and be shown slightly shifted when highlighted.

– The aspect ratio of the picture may differ from the original aspect ratio.

– The picture movement is not smooth.

Daily Operations—Playback

(see pages 10 to 14)

Listening to the Radio:

• If you store a new station into an occupied preset number, the previously stored station in that number will be erased.

• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure occurs, the preset stations will be erased in a few days. If this happens, preset the stations again.

Playing Back a Tape:

• It is not recommended to use the C-120 or longer tapes. These tapes easily jams in the pinch rollers and the capstans, and may cause characteristic deterioration.

Playing Back a Disc:

• For MP3/WMA playback...

– This System cannot play “packet write” discs.

– MP3/WMA discs are required a longer readout time than regular CDs. (It depends on the complexity of the group/file configuration.)

– Some MP3/WMA files cannot be played back and will be skipped. This result from their recording processes and conditions.

– When making MP3/WMA discs, use ISO 9660 Level 1 or

Level 2 for the disc format.

– This System can play back MP3/WMA files with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).

– It is recommended that you make each MP3 file at a sampling rate of 44.1 kHz and at bit rate of 128 kbps. This

System cannot play back files made at bit rate of less than 64 kbps.

– This System can recognize the total of 1000 tracks and of 99 groups (each group can contain up to 150 tracks). Those exceeding the maximum number cannot be recognized.

– Playback order of MP3/WMA tracks may be different from the one you have intended while recording (see page 40). If a folder does not include MP3/WMA tracks, they are ignored.

• When using an 8 cm disc, place it on the inner circle of the disc tray.

• On some DVD, SVCD, or VCD discs, the actual operations may be different from what is explained in this manual, due to the programming and disc structure; such differences are not a malfunction of this System.

• Some DVD Audio discs prohibit downmixed output. When you play back such a disc, “LR ONLY” appears on the display and the System plays back the left front and right front signals.

• 3D Phonic setting is also applied to the optical digital output signals through the DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT terminal.

• When using Resume on SVCD or VCD with PBC, the playback might start on a position slightly different from where you have stopped.

• You can use Resume only for the DVD/SVCD/VCD except for some discs—depending how the disc is programmed.

Daily Operations—Sound & Other Adjustments

(see pages 15 to 17)

Adjusting the Volume:

• Be sure to turn down the volume before connecting or putting the headphones.

Adjusting the Sound:

• This function also affects the sound through the headphones.

Setting the Clock:

• “0:00” will flash on the display until you set the clock.

• The clock may gain or lose 1 to 2 minutes per month. If this happens, reset the clock.

Unique DVD/VCD Operations

(see pages 18 to 20)

• During slow-motion playback, no sound will be reproduced.

• While zoomed in, the picture may look coarse.

Advanced Disc Operations

(see pages 21 to 23)

Programming the Playing Order—Program Play:

• If you try to program a 100th track, “MEM FULL” appears on the display.

• While programming steps...

Your entry will be ignored if you have tried to program an item number that does not exist on the disc (for example, selecting track 14 on a disc that only has 12 tracks).

Playing at Random—Random Play:

• The 4 button does not work for skipping chapters or tracks, but only work for going back to the beginning of the current chapter or track.

39

AdditonalInfo.fm Page 40 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:52 PM

On-Screen Disc Operations

(see pages 24 to 28)

• For JPEG files playback...

– It is recommended that you record a file at 640 x 480 resolution. (If a file has been recorded at a resolution of more than 640 x 480, it will take a long time to be shown.)

– This System can play only baseline JPEG files. Progressive

JPEG files or lossless JPEG files cannot be played.

Baseline JPEG format: Used for digital cameras, web, etc.

Progressive JPEG format: Used for web.

Lossless JPEG format: An old type and rarely used now.

– This System may not play back JPEG files properly which are recorded by the devices other than digital still camera.

– If progressive or lossless JPEG files are played back, a black screen appears. In this case, stop playback and select a baseline JPEG file. Note that it may take a long time to select another file.

Advanced Tape Operations

(see pages 29 to 30)

Recording on a Tape:

• The recording level is automatically set correctly. Thus, you can adjust the sound you are actually listening to without affecting the recording level.

• There is leader tape which cannot be recorded onto at the start and end of cassette tapes. Thus, when recording CDs or radio broadcasts, wind the leader tape first to ensure that the recording will be made without any music part lost.

• If you start recording with no cassette inserted, “NO TAPE” appears on the display. If a protected tape has been inserted,

“NO REC” appears.

• When using Reverse Mode for recording, start recording in the forward (

3

) direction first; otherwise, recording will stop when only one side (reverse) of the tape is recorded.

• You can also change Reverse Mode setting ( after starting recording.

and

• You cannot open or close the disc tray while recording.

)

Synchronized Disc Recording:

• When the tape reaches its end in the forward direction ( during recording with Reverse Mode set to

3

)

, the last tune will be re-recorded at the beginning of the reverse side.

Timer Operations

(see pages 31 to 32)

• When using an external component—“AUX” for the playback source, set the timer built in the component at the same time.

• Before turning off the power, do not forget to prepare the required materials—a disc or tape for playback and a recordable tape for recording.

• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure occurs, the timer will be canceled. You need to set the clock first, then the timer again.

• Without stopping the recording, you cannot change the source after Recording Timer start recording.

• If you set the Sleep Timer after Daily Timer starts playing the selected source, Daily Timer is canceled.

• If you set the Sleep Timer after Recording Timer starts recording, Recording Timer is canceled, but recording continues until Sleep Timer shuts off the power.

Setup Menu Operations

(see pages 33 to 38)

LANGUAGE:

• When the language you have selected for “MENU

LANGUAGE,” “AUDIO LANGUAGE,” or “SUBTITLE” is not recorded on a disc, the original language is used as the initial language.

PICTURE—MONITOR TYPE:

• Even if “4:3 PS” is selected, the screen size may become 4:3 letter box with some DVD Video discs. This depends on how the discs are recorded.

• When you select “16:9” for a picture whose aspect ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly changes due to the process for converting the picture width.

AUDIO—DOWN MIX:

• This setting is not effective when DTS multi-channel software is played back.

OTHERS—ON SCREEN GUIDE:

• Setup Menus and on-screen bar will be displayed (and recorded) even though this function is set to “OFF.”

Subtitles and the information for zooming in always appear on the display regardless of this setting.

MP3/WMA/JPEG groups/tracks configuration

This System plays back the tracks as follows.

Level 1

ROOT

Level 2

Hierarchy

Level 3 Level 4

01 03 04

02

1

2

3

4

5

6

05

7

8

Level 5

9

10

11

12

01

Group with its play order

1

Track with its play order

40

AdditonalInfo.fm Page 41 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:52 PM

Maintenance

.

To get the best performance of the System, keep your discs, tapes, and mechanism clean

Handling discs

• When removing the disc from its case, hold it at the edge while pressing the center hole lightly.

• Do not touch the shiny surface of the disc, or bend the disc.

• Put the disc back in its case after use to prevent warping.

• Be careful not to scratch the surface of the disc.

• Avoid exposure to direct sunlight, temperature extremes, and moisture.

To clean the disc:

Wipe the disc with a soft cloth in a straight line from center to edge.

Cleaning the System

• Stains should be wiped off with a soft cloth. If the System is heavily stained, wipe it with a cloth soaked in water-diluted neutral detergent and wrung well, then wipe clean with a dry cloth.

• Since the System may deteriorate in quality, become damaged or get its paint peeled off, be careful about the following:

– DO NOT wipe it with a hard cloth.

– DO NOT wipe it strongly.

– DO NOT wipe it with thinner or benzine.

– DO NOT apply any volatile substance such as insecticides to it.

• DO NOT allow any rubber or plastic to remain in contact for a long time.

Handling cassette tapes

• If the tape is loose in its cassette, take up the slack by inserting a pencil in one of the reels and rotate it.

– If the tape is loose, it may get stretched, cut, or caught in the cassette.

• Be careful not to touch the tape surface.

• Avoid the following places to store the tape—in dusty places, in direct sunlight or heat, in moist areas, on a TV or speaker, or near a magnet.

To keep the best recording and playback sound quality

• Use a cotton swab moistened with alcohol to clean the heads, capstans, and pinch rollers.

• Use a head demagnetizer (available at electronics and audio shops) to demagnetize the heads (when the System turned off).

41

AdditonalInfo.fm Page 42 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:52 PM

Troubleshooting

If you are having a problem with your System, check this list for a possible solution before calling for service.

General:

Adjustments or settings are suddenly canceled before you finish.

]

There is a time limit. Repeat the procedure again.

Operations are disabled.

]

The built-in microprocessor may malfunction due to external electrical interference.

Unplug the AC power cord and then plug it back in.

Unable to operate the System from the remote control.

]

The path between the remote control and the remote sensor on the System is blocked.

]

The batteries are exhausted.

No sound is heard.

]

Speaker connections are incorrect or loose.

]

Headphones are connected.

No picture appears on the screen.

]

The video cord connections are incorrect or loose.

No picture is displayed on the TV, the picture is blurred, or the picture is divided into two parts.

]

The System is connected to a TV which does not support progressive scanning.

The left and right edges of the picture are missing on the screen.

]

Select “4:3 LB” for “MONITOR TYPE” (see page 34).

Radio Operations:

Hard to listen to broadcasts because of noise.

]

Antennas connections are incorrect or loose.

]

]

The AM loop antenna is too close to the System.

The FM antenna is not properly extended and positioned.

Disc Operations:

The disc does not play.

]

The disc is placed upside down. Place the disc with the label side up.

ID3 Tag on an MP3/WMA disc cannot be shown.

]

There are two types of ID3 Tag—Version 1 and Version 2.

This System can only show ID3 Tag Version 1.

MP3/WMA/JPEG groups and tracks are not played back as you expect.

]

The playing order is determined when the disc was recorded. It depends on the writing application.

MP3/WMA or JPEG tracks are not played back.

]

The inserted disc may include both type of tracks (MP3/

WMA files and JPEG files). In this case, you can only play

] back the files selected by the “FILE TYPE” setting (see page 35).

You have changed the “FILE TYPE” setting after you inserted a disc. In this case, reload the disc.

“NO AUDIO” appears.

]

This System cannot play back illegally produced DVD

Audio discs.

“LR ONLY” appears.

]

Some DVD Audio discs prohibit downmixed output. When you play back such a disc, this System plays back the left front and right front signals only.

The disc sound is discontinuous.

]

The disc is scratched or dirty.

The disc tray does not open or close.

]

The AC power cord is not plugged in.

]

Child Lock is in use (see page 23).

Tape Operations:

The cassette holder cannot be opened.

]

Power supply from the AC power cord has been cut off while the tape was running. Turn on the System.

Recordings:

Impossible to record.

]

Small tabs on the back of the cassette are removed. Cover the holes with adhesive tape.

Timer Operations:

Daily Timer and Recording Timer do not work.

]

The System has been turned on when the on-time comes.

Timer starts working only when the System is turned off.

Daily Timer does not start playback.

]

The disc loaded is a DVD video. Change the disc.

]

Title/group number and chapter/track number are not entered while setting the Daily Timer. Do not skip these steps when you want to play a disc using Daily Timer.

Setup Menu Operations:

No subtitle appears on the display though you have selected the initial subtitle language.

]

Some DVDs are programmed to always display no subtitle initially. If this happens, select the subtitle after starting play

(see page 18).

Audio language is different from the one you have selected as the initial audio language.

]

Some DVDs are programmed to always use the original language initially. If this happens, select the audio language after starting play (see page 19).

42

AdditionlList.fm Page 43 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:51 PM

Language Code List

EL

EO

ET

EU

FA

FI

FJ

FO

BO

BR

CA

CO

CS

CY

DA

DZ

AY

AZ

BA

BE

BG

BH

BI

BN

AA

AB

AF

AM

AR

AS

IK

IN

IS

IW

JI

HR

HU

HY

IA

IE

FY

GA

GD

GL

GN

GU

HA

HI

Tibetan

Breton

Catalan

Corsican

Czech

Welsh

Danish

Bhutani

Greek

Esperanto

Estonian

Basque

Persian

Finnish

Fiji

Faroese

Afar

Abkhazian

Afrikaans

Ameharic

Arabic

Assamese

Aymara

Azerbaijani

Bashkir

Byelorussian

Bulgarian

Bihari

Bislama

Bengali, Bangla

Frisian

Irish

Scots Gaelic

Galician

Guarani

Gujarati

Hausa

Hindi

Croatian

Hungarian

Armenian

Interlingua

Interlingue

Inupiak

Indonesian

Icelandic

Hebrew

Yiddish

Maori

Macedonian

Malayalam

Mongolian

Moldavian

Marathi

Malay (MAY)

Maltese

Burmese

Nauru

Nepali

Dutch

Norwegian

Occitan

(Afan) Oromo

Oriya

Javanese

Georgian

Kazakh

Greenlandic

Cambodian

Kannada

Korean (KOR)

Kashmiri

Kurdish

Kirghiz

Latin

Lingala

Laothian

Lithuanian

Latvian, Lettish

Malagasy

Panjabi

Polish

Pashto, Pushto

Portuguese

Quechua

Rhaeto-Romance

Kirundi

Rumanian

Russian

Kinyarwanda

Sanskrit

Sindhi

Sangho

Serbo-Croatian

Singhalese

Slovak

MY

NA

NE

NL

NO

OC

OM

OR

MI

MK

ML

MN

MO

MR

MS

MT

KU

KY

LA

LN

LO

LT

LV

MG

JW

KA

KK

KL

KM

KN

KO

KS

SA

SD

SG

SH

SI

SK

RM

RN

RO

RU

RW

PA

PL

PS

PT

QU

Turkmen

Tagalog

Setswana

Tonga

Turkish

Tsonga

Tatar

Twi

Ukrainian

Urdu

Uzbek

Vietnamese

Volapuk

Wolof

Xhosa

Yoruba

Zulu

Slovenian

Samoan

Shona

Somali

Albanian

Serbian

Siswati

Sesotho

Sundanese

Swedish

Swahili

Tamil

Telugu

Tajik

Thai

Tigrinya

UK

UR

UZ

VI

VO

WO

XH

YO

ZU

TK

TL

TN

TO

TR

TS

TT

TW

SU

SV

SW

TA

TE

TG

TH

TI

SL

SM

SN

SO

SQ

SR

SS

ST

43

AdditionlList.fm Page 44 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:51 PM

Country/Area Codes List

AD

AE

AF

AG

AI

AL

AM

AN

AO

Andorra

United Arab Emirates

Afghanistan

Antigua and Barbuda

Anguilla

Albania

AQ

AR

AS

AT

AU

AW

Armenia

Netherlands Antilles

Angola

Antarctica

Argentina

American Samoa

AZ

BA

BB

BD

BE

BF

Austria

Australia

Aruba

Azerbaijan

Bosnia and Herzegovina

Barbados

BG

BH

BI

Bangladesh

Belgium

Burkina Faso

Bulgaria

Bahrain

Burundi

BJ Benin

BM Bermuda

BN Brunei Darussalam

BO

BR

BS

Bolivia

Brazil

Bahamas

BT

BV

Bhutan

Bouvet Island

BW Botswana

BY

BZ

CA

Belarus

Belize

Canada

CC

CF

Cocos (Keeling) Islands

Central African Republic

CG Congo

CH Switzerland

CI Côte d’Ivoire

CK Cook Islands

CL Chile

CM Cameroon

CN China

CO Colombia

CR Costa Rica

CU Cuba

CV

CX

CY

Cape Verde

Christmas Island

Cyprus

CZ

DE

DJ

Czech Republic

Germany

Djibouti

44

EG

EH

ER

ES

ET

FI

DK Denmark

DM Dominica

DO Dominican Republic

DZ

EC

EE

Algeria

Ecuador

Estonia

Egypt

Western Sahara

Eritrea

Spain

Ethiopia

Finland

FJ

FK

Fiji

Falkland Islands (Malvinas)

FM Micronesia (Federated States of)

FO Faroe Islands

FR

FX

France

France, Metropolitan

GA Gabon

GB United Kingdom

GD Grenada

GE Georgia

GF French Guiana

GH Ghana

GI Gibraltar

GL Greenland

GM Gambia

GN Guinea

GP Guadeloupe

GQ Equatorial Guinea

GR Greece

GS

GT

South Georgia and the South

Sandwich

Guatemala

GU Guam

GW Guinea-Bissau

GY Guyana

HK Hong Kong

HM Heard Island and McDonald

Islands

IL

IN

IO

IQ

IR

IS

IT

JM

HN Honduras

HR Croatia

HT Haiti

HU Hungary

ID Indonesia

IE Ireland

Israel

India

British Indian Ocean Territory

Iraq

Iran (Islamic Republic of)

Iceland

Italy

Jamaica

JO

JP

Jordan

Japan

KE Kenya

KG Kyrgyzstan

KH Cambodia

KI Kiribati

KM Comoros

KN Saint Kitts and Nevis

KP Korea, Democratic People’s

Republic of

KR Korea, Republic of

KW Kuwait

KY Cayman Islands

KZ Kazakhstan

LA Lao People’s Democratic

Republic

LB

LC

Lebanon

Saint Lucia

LI Liechtenstein

LK Sri Lanka

LR Liberia

LS

LT

LU

Lesotho

Lithuania

Luxembourg

LV

LY

Latvia

Libyan Arab Jamahiriya

MA Morocco

MC Monaco

MD Moldova, Republic of

MG Madagascar

MH Marshall Islands

ML Mali

MM Myanmar

MN Mongolia

MO Macau

MP Northern Mariana Islands

MQ Martinique

MR Mauritania

MS Montserrat

MT Malta

MU Mauritius

MV Maldives

MW Malawi

MX Mexico

MY Malaysia

MZ Mozambique

NA Namibia

NC New Caledonia

NE Niger

NF Norfolk Island

NG Nigeria

NI Nicaragua

NL Netherlands

NO Norway

AdditionlList.fm Page 45 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:51 PM

PE

PF

PG

PH

PK

PL

NP Nepal

NR Nauru

NU Niue

NZ New Zealand

OM Oman

PA Panama

Peru

French Polynesia

Papua New Guinea

Philippines

Pakistan

Poland

PM Saint Pierre and Miquelon

PN Pitcairn

PR Puerto Rico

PT Portugal

PW Palau

PY Paraguay

QA Qatar

RE Réunion

RO Romania

RU Russian Federation

RW Rwanda

SA Saudi Arabia

SB

SC

SD

Solomon Islands

Seychelles

Sudan

SE

SG

SH

SI

SJ

SK

Sweden

Singapore

Saint Helena

Slovenia

Svalbard and Jan Mayen

Slovakia

SL Sierra Leone

SM San Marino

SN Senegal

SO

SR

ST

Somalia

Suriname

Sao Tome and Principe

SV

SY

SZ

TC

TD

TF

El Salvador

Syrian Arab Republic

Swaziland

Turks and Caicos Islands

Chad

French Southern Territories

TG

TH

TJ

Togo

Thailand

Tajikistan

TK Tokelau

TM Turkmenistan

TN Tunisia

TO

TP

TR

Tonga

East Timor

Turkey

TT

TV

Trinidad and Tobago

Tuvalu

TW Taiwan

TZ Tanzania, United Republic of

UA Ukraine

UG Uganda

UM United States Minor Outlying

Islands

US United States

UY Uruguay

UZ Uzbekistan

VA Vatican City State (Holy See)

VC Saint Vincent and the Grenadines

VE Venezuela

VG Virgin Islands (British)

VI Virgin Islands (U.S.)

VN Vietnam

VU Vanuatu

WF Wallis and Futuna Islands

WS Samoa

YE Yemen

YT Mayotte

YU Yugoslavia

ZA South Africa

ZM Zambia

ZR Zaire

ZW Zimbabwe

DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals

DIGITAL AUDIO

OUTPUT

Playback disc

DVD Video with 48 kHz, 16/20/24 bit

Linear PCM with 96 kHz, Linear PCM with Dolby Digital with DTS

DVD Audio with 48/96/192 kHz,

16/20/24 bit Linear PCM with 44.1/88.2/176.4 kHz,

16/20/24 bit Linear PCM with Dolby Digital with DTS

SVCD, VCD, CD

CD with DTS

MP3/WMA disc

STREAM/PCM

DTS bitstream

Output Signals

DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM

48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM*

48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

Dolby Digital bitstream 48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

PCM ONLY

Dolby Digital bitstream

DTS bitstream

48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

DTS bitstream 44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM

* While playing some DVDs, digital signals may be emitted at 20 bits or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the DVD

OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT terminal if the discs are not copy-protected.

45

Spec&Index.fm Page 46 Friday, June 11, 2004 3:51 PM

Specifications

Amplifier section

Output Power:

Audio Input

Digital output:

40 W (20 W + 20 W) at 4

(10% THD)

AUX: 400 mV/50 k

DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT:

–21 dBm to –15 dBm (660 nm ±30 nm)

Video output:

Color system:

VIDEO (composite):

S-VIDEO: Y (luminance)

C (chrominance, burst)

COMPONENT: (Y)

(P

B

Speakers/Impedance:

/P

R

)

NTSC/PAL selectable

1 V(p-p)/75

1 V(p-p)/75

0.286 V(p-p)/75

1 V(p-p)/75

0.7 V(p-p)/75

4

– 16

Tuner section

FM tuning range:

AM (MW) tuning range:

Tape section

Frequency response:

Wow and flutter:

87.50 MHz – 108.00 MHz

522 kHz – 1 629 kHz

60 Hz – 14 000 Hz

0.15% (WRMS)

Disc player section

Playable disc: DVD Video/DVD Audio

CD/VCD/SVCD

CD-R/CD-RW (CD/SVCD/VCD/MP3/

WMA/JPEG format)

DVD-R/DVD-RW (Video format)

Dynamic range:

Horizontal resolution:

Wow and flutter:

90 dB

500 lines

Immeasurable

Speakers

Speaker units:

Impedance:

Dimensions (approx.):

Mass (approx.):

Full-range: 10 cm cone x 1

4

145 mm x 230 mm x 191 mm

(W/H/D)

1.8 kg each

Supplied Accessories

See page 3.

General

Power requirement:

Power consumption:

Dimensions (approx.):

Mass (approx.):

AC 240 V , 50 Hz

65 W (at operation)

1.5 W (on standby)

170 mm x 230 mm x 311 mm

(W/H/D)

4.8 kg

Parts Index

Refer to the pages to see how to use the buttons and controls.

Remote control

11, 12, 13,

16, 18–21,

26, 37

10, 13, 22, 28

9, 17

14

11, 16–20,

23

Main unit

8

Remote sensor

10

10–13,

22, 28

30

11, 13

20

STANDBY/ON

AUDIO

1

ZOOM

4

SUB TITLE

2

DVD LEVEL

5

ANGLE

3

VFP

6

REV. MODE

7

10

8

PROGRESSIVE

0

FM MODE

9

10

SLEEP

A.STANDBY

CLOCK/

TIMER

SET

TOP MENU

SET UP

MENU

ENTER

ON SCREEN CANCEL

RETURN

DVD/CD TAPE

REPEAT A-B

REPEAT

PLAY

MODE

GROUP/TITLE SLOW – SLOW +

DISPLAY

3D

PHONIC

BASS/

TREBLE RHYTHM AX

DIMMER

FADE

MUTING

VOLUME

RM-SUXP450U REMOTE CONTROL

STANDBY/ON

3D

PHONIC

RHYTHM AX

DVD/CD TAPE FM/AM AUX

REC DOWN UP

VOLUME

10

17

17, 31

14, 20,

25–31, 33

11, 13,

20–23, 28

15

15

10, 15

16

15

12

14

15

10, 15

13, 23

10

PHONES

46

Cover[A].fm Page 2 Tuesday, May 18, 2004 1:50 PM

VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED

EN

© 2004 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED

0504AIMMDWJEM

advertisement

Related manuals

advertisement